Mercedes Benz 2014 Glk Class Owners Manual ÿþy

2015-09-08

: Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz-2014-Glk-Class-Owners-Manual-763418 mercedes-benz-2014-glk-class-owners-manual-763418 mercedes-benz pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 384 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

GLK-Class
Operator's Manual
Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only
Symbols
Registered trademarks:
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are
registered trademarks of Daimler AG.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Johnson Controls.
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered
trademarks of Apple Inc.
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of
Harman International Industries.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are
registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of
iBiquity Digital Corporation.
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are
registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,
LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the
following symbols:
GWARNING
Warning notes make you aware dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
HEnvironmental note
Environmental notes provide you with
information on environmentally aware actions
or disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to
dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
iPractical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
XThis symbol indicates an
instruction that must be followed.
XSeveral of these symbols in
succession indicate an instruction
with several steps.
(Y page) This symbol tells you where you
can find more information about a
topic.
YY This symbol indicates a warning or
an instruction that is continued on
the next page.
Display This font indicates a display in the
multifunction display/COMAND
display.
Parts of the software in the vehicle are
protected by copyright © 2005
The FreeType Project
http://www.freetype.org. All rights
reserved.
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving. For your own safety
and a longer vehicle life, follow the
instructions and warning notices in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage
to the vehicle or personal injury to you or
others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
RModel
ROrder
RCountry specification
RAvailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
RDesign
REquipment
RTechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROperator's Manual
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep printed copies of the documents in the
vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,
always pass the documents on to the new
owner.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
2045844383 É2045844383ÌËÍ
Index ....................................................... 4
Introduction ......................................... 22
At a glance ........................................... 31
Safety ................................................... 41
Opening and closing ........................... 75
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 97
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 111
Climate control ................................. 127
Driving and parking .......................... 143
On-board computer and displays .... 219
Stowage and features ...................... 273
Maintenance and care ...................... 299
Breakdown assistance ..................... 313
Wheels and tires ............................... 329
Technical data ................................... 365
Contents 3
1, 2, 3 ...
115 V socket ...................................... 285
12 V socket
see Sockets
360° camera
Function/notes ............................. 197
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ............................ 236
Function/notes ................................ 67
Important safety notes .................... 67
Warning lamp ................................. 263
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification ................. 133
Active Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-
board computer) ............................ 229
Display message ............................ 253
Function/information .................... 206
Trailer towing ................................. 209
Active Driving Assistance package . 206
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-
board computer) ............................ 229
Display message ............................ 252
Function/information .................... 209
Trailer towing ......................... 206, 212
Active light function ......................... 115
Active Parking Assist
Canceling ....................................... 192
Detecting parking spaces .............. 189
Display message ............................ 253
Exiting a parking space .................. 191
Important safety notes .................. 188
Parking .......................................... 190
Towing a trailer .............................. 192
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Display message ............................ 247
Function/notes ............................. 116
Switching on/off ................... 116, 117
Switching on/off (on-board
computer) ...................................... 231
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 372
Air bags
Display message ............................ 242
Front air bag (driver, front
passenger) ....................................... 46
Important safety notes .................... 44
Knee bag .......................................... 46
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp .................................. 49
Pelvis air bag ................................... 48
Safety guidelines ............................. 43
Side impact air bag .......................... 47
Window curtain air bag .................... 48
Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
Air filter (display message) .............. 250
AIR FLOW ........................................... 135
Air vents
Glove box ....................................... 141
Important safety notes .................. 140
Rear ............................................... 141
Setting ........................................... 140
Setting the center air vents ........... 140
Setting the side air vents ............... 140
Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-theft alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Approach/departure angle .............. 173
Ashtray ............................................... 283
Assistance display (on-board
computer) .......................................... 228
Assistance menu (on-board
computer) .......................................... 228
ASSYST PLUS
Displaying a service message ........ 300
Hiding a service message .............. 300
Notes ............................................. 300
Resetting the service interval
display ........................................... 300
Service message ............................ 300
Special service requirements ......... 301
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating ................... 74
Function ........................................... 74
Switching off the alarm .................... 74
4Index
ATTENTION ASSIST
Activating/deactivating ................. 229
Display message ............................ 251
Function/notes ............................. 201
Audio menu (on-board
computer) .......................................... 226
Audio system
see separate operating instructions
Authorized Centers
see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized workshops
see Qualified specialist workshop
AUTO lights
Display message ............................ 246
see Lights
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
stop function) .................................... 149
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
start/stop function) .......................... 149
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 113
Automatic transmission
Automatic drive program ............... 156
Changing gear ............................... 155
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 152
Display message ............................ 258
Driving tips .................................... 155
Emergency running mode .............. 158
Engaging drive position .................. 154
Engaging neutral ............................ 153
Engaging park position
automatically ................................. 153
Engaging reverse gear ................... 153
Engaging the park position ............ 153
Kickdown ....................................... 155
Manual drive program .................... 156
Overview ........................................ 152
Problem (malfunction) ................... 158
Program selector button ................ 155
Pulling away ................................... 147
Starting the engine ........................ 147
Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 156
Trailer towing ................................. 155
Transmission position display ........ 153
Transmission positions .................. 154
Automatic transmission
emergency mode ............................... 158
B
Backup lamp
Changing bulbs .............................. 122
Display message ............................ 245
Bag hook ............................................ 278
Ball coupling
Installing ........................................ 214
Removing ....................................... 216
Storing ........................................... 217
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 68
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
PLUS) .................................................... 68
Battery (SmartKey)
Checking .......................................... 79
Important safety notes .................... 78
Replacing ......................................... 79
Battery (vehicle)
Charging ........................................ 318
Display message ............................ 249
Important safety notes .................. 316
Jump starting ................................. 320
Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating ................. 229
Display message ............................ 253
Notes/function .............................. 202
Trailer towing ................................. 204
see Active Blind Spot Assist
BlueTEC
Adding DEF .................................... 162
BlueTEC (DEF) .................................... 370
Brake Assist
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Display message ............................ 238
Notes ............................................. 372
Brake lamps
Display message ............................ 244
Brakes
ABS .................................................. 67
BAS .................................................. 68
BAS PLUS ........................................ 68
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 372
Display message ............................ 236
Driving tips .................................... 168
Important safety notes .................. 168
Maintenance .................................. 169
Index 5
Parking brake ........................ 165, 169
Warning lamp ................................. 263
Breakdown
see Flat tire
see Towing away/tow-starting
Bulbs
see Replacing bulbs
C
California
Important notice for retail
customers and lessees .................... 24
Calling up a malfunction
see Display messages
Car
see Vehicle
Care
Carpets .......................................... 312
Car wash ........................................ 306
Display ........................................... 310
Exterior lights ................................ 309
Gear or selector lever .................... 311
Interior ........................................... 310
Matte finish ................................... 308
Notes ............................................. 305
Paint .............................................. 307
Plastic trim .................................... 310
Power washer ................................ 307
Rear view camera .......................... 309
Roof lining ...................................... 312
Seat belt ........................................ 312
Seat cover ..................................... 311
Sensors ......................................... 309
Steering wheel ............................... 311
Tail pipes ....................................... 310
Trim pieces .................................... 311
Washing by hand ........................... 306
Wheels ........................................... 307
Windows ........................................ 308
Wiper blades .................................. 308
Wooden trim .................................. 311
Cargo compartment cover ............... 278
Cargo compartment
enlargement ...................................... 276
Cargo compartment floor
Opening/closing ............................ 281
Stowage well (under) ..................... 281
Cargo net
Attaching ....................................... 280
Important safety information ......... 279
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 277
Car wash (care) ................................. 306
CD player/CD changer (on-board
computer) .......................................... 226
Center console
Lower section .................................. 37
Upper section .................................. 36
Central locking
Automatic locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 232
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 76
Changing bulbs
Cornering light function ................. 121
High-beam headlamps ................... 120
Low-beam headlamps .................... 120
Parking lamps ................................ 120
Reversing lamps ............................ 122
Standing lamps (front) ................... 120
Turn signals (front) ......................... 121
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes .................... 66
Rear doors ....................................... 66
Children
In the vehicle ................................... 61
Restraint systems ............................ 61
Special seat belt retractor ............... 64
Child seat
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ............................................ 64
Top Tether ....................................... 65
Cigarette lighter ................................ 284
Cleaning
Mirror turn signal ........................... 309
Trailer tow hitch ............................. 310
Climate control
Adjusting the airflow (AIR FLOW) ... 135
Automatic climate control (3-zone) 132
Controlling automatically ............... 135
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 133
Defrosting the windows ................. 138
Defrosting the windshield .............. 137
Dual-zone automatic climate
control ........................................... 129
Important safety notes .................. 128
Indicator lamp ................................ 135
6Index
Maximum cooling .......................... 138
Notes on using automatic climate
control ........................................... 133
Notes on using dual-zone
automatic climate control .............. 130
Overview of systems ...................... 128
Problems with cooling with air
dehumidification ............................ 135
Problem with the rear window
defroster ........................................ 139
Rear control panel ......................... 132
Refrigerant ..................................... 374
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 374
Setting the air distribution ............. 136
Setting the airflow ......................... 137
Setting the air vents ...................... 140
Setting the temperature ................ 136
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ............................................ 139
Switching on/off ........................... 133
Switching residual heat on/off ...... 139
Switching the rear window
defroster on/off ............................ 138
Switching the ZONE function on/
off .................................................. 137
Coat hooks ......................................... 280
Cockpit
Overview .......................................... 32
see Instrument cluster
Collapsible spare wheel
Inflating ......................................... 362
see Emergency spare wheel
COMAND
see separate operating instructions
Combination switch .......................... 114
Consumption statistics (on-board
computer) .......................................... 223
Convenience closing feature .............. 90
Convenience opening feature ............ 90
Coolant (engine)
Checking the level ......................... 304
Display message ............................ 247
Filling capacity ............................... 373
Important safety notes .................. 372
Temperature gauge ........................ 220
Warning lamp ................................. 269
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyright ............................................. 29
Cornering light function
Changing bulbs .............................. 121
Display message ............................ 243
Function/notes ............................. 116
Crash-responsive emergency
lighting ............................................... 119
Cruise control
Cruise control lever ....................... 174
Deactivating ................................... 175
Display message ............................ 255
Driving system ............................... 173
Function/notes ............................. 173
Important safety notes .................. 173
Setting a speed .............................. 175
Storing and maintaining current
speed ............................................. 174
Cup holder
Center console .............................. 282
Important safety notes .................. 282
Rear compartment ......................... 282
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 27
Customer Relations Department ....... 27
D
Dashboard
see Instrument cluster
Dashboard lighting
see Instrument cluster lighting
Data
see Technical data
Daytime running lamps
Display message ............................ 246
Switching on/off (on-board
computer) ...................................... 231
Switching on/off (switch) .............. 113
Dealerships
see Qualified specialist workshop
Declarations of conformity ................. 26
DEF
Adding ........................................... 162
Display message ............................ 250
Filling capacity ............................... 371
Important safety notes .................. 370
Index 7
Delayed switch-off
Exterior lighting (on-board
computer) ...................................... 231
Interior lighting .............................. 232
Diagnostics connection ...................... 26
Diesel .................................................. 370
Digital speedometer ......................... 224
DIRECT SELECT lever
see Automatic transmission
Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 310
Display messages
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 300
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 235
Driving systems ............................. 251
Engine ............................................ 247
General notes ................................ 235
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 235
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 260
Lights ............................................. 243
Safety systems .............................. 236
SmartKey ....................................... 260
Tires ............................................... 256
Vehicle ........................................... 258
Distance recorder ............................. 223
see Odometer
see Trip odometer
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 271
DISTRONIC PLUS
Activation conditions ..................... 177
Deactivating ................................... 181
Display message ............................ 254
Displays in the multifunction
display ........................................... 180
Driving tips .................................... 182
Function/notes ............................. 175
Important safety notes .................. 175
Setting the specified minimum
distance ......................................... 180
Warning lamp ................................. 271
Doors
Automatic locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 232
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 82
Central locking/unlocking
(SmartKey) ....................................... 76
Control panel ................................... 39
Display message ............................ 259
Emergency locking ........................... 83
Emergency unlocking ....................... 83
Important safety notes .................... 81
Opening (from inside) ...................... 81
Drinking and driving ......................... 166
Drinks holder
see Cup holder
Drive program
Automatic ...................................... 156
Display ........................................... 153
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 153
Manual ........................................... 156
Driver's door
see Doors
Driving abroad
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 301
Symmetrical low beam .................. 112
Driving in mountainous terrain
Approach/departure angle ............ 173
Driving lamps
see Daytime running lamps
Driving off-road
see Off-road driving
Driving safety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 67
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 68
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
PLUS) ............................................... 68
Electronic brake force distribution ... 72
ESP® (Electronic Stability
Program) .................................... 69, 70
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction
System) ........................................... 70
Important safety information ........... 67
Overview .......................................... 67
PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 72
Driving systems
360°camera .................................. 197
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 206
Active Driving Assistance package 206
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 209
Active Parking Assist ..................... 188
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 201
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 202
Cruise control ................................ 173
Display message ............................ 251
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 175
HOLD function ............................... 183
8Index
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 204
Lane Tracking package .................. 202
PARKTRONIC ................................. 185
Rear view camera .......................... 192
Driving tips
Automatic transmission ................. 155
Brakes ........................................... 168
Break-in period .............................. 144
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 182
Downhill gradient ........................... 168
Drinking and driving ....................... 166
Driving abroad ............................... 112
Driving in winter ............................. 170
Driving on flooded roads ................ 170
Driving on sand .............................. 172
Driving on wet roads ...................... 170
Driving over obstacles ................... 172
Exhaust check ............................... 166
Fuel ................................................ 166
General .......................................... 166
Hydroplaning ................................. 170
Icy road surfaces ........................... 171
Limited braking efficiency on
salted roads ................................... 168
Off-road driving .............................. 172
Off-road fording ............................. 170
Snow chains .................................. 333
Symmetrical low beam .................. 112
Tire ruts ......................................... 172
Towing a trailer .............................. 212
Traveling uphill ............................... 173
Wet road surface ........................... 168
DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 226
DVD video (on-board computer) ...... 227
E
EASY-ENTRY feature
Activating/deactivating ................. 233
Function/notes ............................. 105
EASY-EXIT feature
Crash-responsive ........................... 106
Function/notes ............................. 105
Switching on/off ........................... 233
EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
Display message ............................ 237
Function/notes ................................ 72
ECO display
Function/notes ............................. 167
On-board computer ....................... 224
ECO start/stop function
Automatic engine start .................. 149
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 149
Deactivating/activating ................. 150
General information ....................... 148
Important safety notes .................. 148
Introduction ................................... 148
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency release
Driver's door .................................... 83
Vehicle ............................................. 83
Emergency spare wheel
General notes ................................ 362
Important safety notes .................. 361
Storage location ............................ 362
Stowing .......................................... 363
Technical data ............................... 364
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Function ........................................... 60
Safety guidelines ............................. 43
Emergency unlocking
Tailgate ............................................ 88
Emissions control
Service and warranty information .... 23
Engine
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 268
Display message ............................ 247
ECO start/stop function ................ 148
Engine number ............................... 367
Irregular running ............................ 151
Jump-starting ................................. 320
Starting problems .......................... 151
Starting the engine with the
SmartKey ....................................... 147
Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 147
Switching off .................................. 164
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 325
Engine, jump starting
see Jump starting (engine)
Engine electronics
Problem (malfunction) ................... 151
Index 9
Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 303
Additives ........................................ 372
Checking the oil level ..................... 302
Checking the oil level using the
dipstick .......................................... 303
Display message ............................ 249
Filling capacity ............................... 372
Notes about oil grades ................... 371
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 302
Viscosity ........................................ 372
ESP® (Electronic Stability
Program)
Deactivating/activating ................... 70
Display message ............................ 236
ETS/4ETS ........................................ 70
Function/notes ......................... 69, 70
Important safety information ........... 70
Trailer stabilization ........................... 71
Warning lamp ................................. 265
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction
System) ................................................ 70
Exhaust check ................................... 166
Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning
instructions) ...................................... 310
Exterior lighting
Setting options .............................. 112
see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting ....................................... 106
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 107
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 107
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 107
Folding in when locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 234
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 107
Setting ........................................... 107
Storing settings (memory function) 109
Storing the parking position .......... 108
F
Filler cap
see Fuel filler flap
First-aid kit ......................................... 314
Flat tire
MOExtended run-flat system ......... 315
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 314
see Emergency spare wheel
Floormats ........................................... 298
Fog lamps
Switching on/off ........................... 113
Folding the rear bench seat
forwards/back .................................. 276
Fording
Off-road ......................................... 170
On flooded roads ........................... 170
Front fog lamps
Display message ............................ 245
Switching on/off ........................... 113
Fuel
Additives ........................................ 369
Consumption statistics .................. 223
Displaying the current
consumption .................................. 224
Displaying the range ...................... 224
Driving tips .................................... 166
Fuel gauge ....................................... 33
Grade (gasoline) ............................ 369
Important safety notes .................. 368
Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 369
Problem (malfunction) ................... 161
Quality (diesel) ............................... 370
Refueling ........................................ 158
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 368
Fuel filler flap
Opening/closing ............................ 159
Fuel filter (display message) ............ 250
Fuel level
Calling up the range (on-board
computer) ...................................... 224
Fuel tank
Capacity ........................................ 368
Problem (malfunction) ................... 161
Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool
kit) ...................................................... 314
Fuses
Allocation chart ............................. 325
Before changing ............................. 325
Dashboard fuse box ....................... 325
Fuse box in the cargo
compartment ................................. 326
10 Index
Fuse box in the engine
compartment ................................. 326
Important safety notes .................. 325
G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory ..................... 298
Important safety notes .................. 295
Opening/closing the garage door .. 297
Programming (button in the rear-
view mirror) ................................... 296
Gear or selector lever (cleaning
guidelines) ......................................... 311
Genuine parts ...................................... 22
Glove box ........................................... 275
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
(definition) ......................................... 352
H
Handbrake
see Parking brake
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 115
Headlamps
Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 305
Cleaning system (function) ............ 115
Cleaning system (notes) ................ 373
Fogging up ..................................... 117
see Automatic headlamp mode
Head restraints
Adjusting ....................................... 101
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 101
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 101
Adjusting (rear) .............................. 102
Installing/removing (rear) .............. 102
see NECK-PRO head restraints/
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
Heating
see Climate control
High-beam headlamps
Changing bulbs .............................. 120
Display message ............................ 245
Switching on/off ........................... 115
Hill start assist .................................. 148
HOLD function
Deactivating ................................... 184
Display message ............................ 251
Function/notes ............................. 183
Hood
Closing ........................................... 302
Display message ............................ 259
Important safety notes .................. 301
Opening ......................................... 302
Hydroplaning ..................................... 170
I
Ignition lock
see Key positions
Immobilizer .......................................... 73
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Instrument cluster
Overview .......................................... 33
Settings ......................................... 230
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 231
Interior lighting ................................. 118
Automatic control .......................... 118
Delayed switch-off (on-board
computer) ...................................... 232
Emergency lighting ........................ 119
Manual control ............................... 118
Overview ........................................ 118
Reading lamp ................................. 118
Setting the brightness of the
display/switch (on-board
computer) ...................................... 231
J
Jack
Storage location ............................ 314
Using ............................................. 356
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 320
K
KEYLESS-GO
Convenience closing feature ............ 91
Display message ............................ 260
Locking ............................................ 77
Start/Stop button .......................... 145
Index 11
Starting the engine ........................ 147
Unlocking ......................................... 77
Key positions
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 145
SmartKey ....................................... 145
Kickdown
Driving tips .................................... 155
Knee bag .............................................. 46
L
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating ................. 229
Display message ............................ 252
Function/information .................... 204
Lane Tracking package ..................... 202
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ................................................ 64
License plate lamp (display
message) ............................................ 245
Light function, active
Display message ............................ 246
Lighting
Light switch ................................... 112
Lights
Activating/deactivating the
interior lighting delayed switch-off . 232
Active light function ....................... 115
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 113
Cornering light function ................. 116
Display message ............................ 243
Driving abroad ............................... 112
Fog lamps ...................................... 113
Hazard warning lamps ................... 115
High beam flasher .......................... 115
High-beam headlamps ................... 115
Low-beam headlamps .................... 113
Parking lamps ................................ 114
Rear fog lamp ................................ 114
Setting the brightness of the
display/switch (on-board
computer) ...................................... 231
Standing lamps .............................. 114
Switching Adaptive Highbeam
Assist on/off ................................. 231
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (on-board computer) 231
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (switch) .................... 113
Switching the exterior lighting
delayed switch-off on/off (on-
board computer) ............................ 231
Switching the surround lighting
on/off (on-board computer) .......... 231
Turn signals ................................... 114
see Interior lighting
see Replacing bulbs
Light sensor (display message) ....... 246
Loading guidelines ............................ 274
Locking
see Central locking
Locking (doors)
Automatic ........................................ 82
Emergency locking ........................... 83
From inside (central locking
button) ............................................. 82
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Locking verification signal (on-
board computer) ............................... 233
Low-beam headlamps
Changing bulbs .............................. 120
Display message ............................ 243
Setting for driving abroad
(symmetrical) ................................. 112
Switching on/off ........................... 113
Lumbar support
Adjusting ....................................... 102
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar
support .......................................... 103
M
M+S tires ............................................ 332
Malfunction message
see Display messages
Matte finish (cleaning instructions) 308
mbrace
Call priority .................................... 291
Display message ............................ 238
Downloading destinations
(COMAND) ..................................... 291
Downloading routes ....................... 294
12 Index
Emergency call .............................. 288
General notes ................................ 287
Geo fencing ................................... 295
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 293
MB info call button ........................ 290
Remote vehicle locking .................. 292
Roadside Assistance button .......... 290
Search & Send ............................... 292
Self-test ......................................... 288
Speed alert .................................... 294
System .......................................... 288
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 295
Vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis ....................................... 293
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 292
Mechanical key
Function/notes ................................ 78
Locking vehicle ................................ 83
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 83
Memory card (audio) ......................... 226
Memory function ............................... 109
Message memory (on-board
computer) .......................................... 235
Messages
see Display messages
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
see Rear-view mirror
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Mobile phone
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 227
Modifying the programming
(SmartKey) ........................................... 77
MOExtended run-flat system ........... 315
Mounting wheels
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 358
Mounting a new wheel ................... 357
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 355
Raising the vehicle ......................... 356
Removing a wheel .......................... 357
Securing the vehicle against
rolling away ................................... 355
MP3
Operation ....................................... 226
see separate operating instructions
Multifunction display
Function/notes ............................. 222
Permanent display ......................... 231
Multifunction steering wheel
Operating the on-board computer . 221
Overview .......................................... 35
N
Navigation
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 225
see separate operating instructions
NECK-PRO head restraints
Operation ......................................... 54
Resetting after being triggered ........ 55
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
Operation ......................................... 54
Resetting after being triggered ........ 55
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 144
O
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Faults ............................................... 53
Operation ......................................... 49
System self-test ............................... 52
Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 61
System overview .............................. 42
OCS
Faults ............................................... 53
Operation ......................................... 49
System self-test ............................... 52
Odometer ........................................... 223
Off-road driving
Approach/departure angle ............ 376
Checklist after driving off-road ...... 172
Checklist before driving off-road .... 172
Fording depth ................................ 375
General information ....................... 172
Important safety notes .................. 171
Maximum gradient climbing ability 376
Traveling uphill ............................... 173
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer
Assistance menu ........................... 228
Audio menu ................................... 226
Convenience submenu .................. 233
Displaying a service message ........ 300
Index 13
Display messages .......................... 235
Factory settings submenu ............. 234
Important safety notes .................. 220
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 230
Lighting submenu .......................... 231
Menu overview .............................. 223
Message memory .......................... 235
Navigation menu ............................ 225
Operation ....................................... 221
Service menu ................................. 230
Settings menu ............................... 230
Standard display ............................ 223
Telephone menu ............................ 227
Trip menu ...................................... 223
Vehicle submenu ........................... 232
Video DVD operation ..................... 227
Opening and closing the side trim
panels ................................................. 121
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity ................ 26
Important safety notes .................... 25
Operating system
see On-board computer
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment ........................... 23
Outside temperature display ........... 221
Overhead control panel ...................... 38
Override feature
Rear side windows ........................... 66
P
Paint code number ............................ 366
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 307
Panic alarm .......................................... 42
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel
Opening/closing .............................. 93
Opening/closing the roller
sunblind ........................................... 94
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 95
Resetting ......................................... 94
Panorama sliding sunroof
Important safety notes .................... 92
Parking ............................................... 164
Important safety notes .................. 164
Parking brake ................................ 165
Position of exterior mirror, front-
passenger side ............................... 108
Rear view camera .......................... 192
see PARKTRONIC
Parking aid
Active Parking Assist ..................... 188
see Exterior mirrors
see PARKTRONIC
Parking brake
Display message ............................ 237
Notes/function .............................. 165
Parking lamps
Changing bulbs .............................. 120
Switching on/off ........................... 114
PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating ................. 187
Driving system ............................... 185
Function/notes ............................. 185
Important safety notes .................. 185
Problem (malfunction) ................... 188
Range of the sensors ..................... 185
Trailer towing ................................. 187
Warning display ............................. 186
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 53
Problems (malfunction) .................. 242
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp ...................................................... 49
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 310
Power washers .................................. 307
Power windows
see Side windows
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
protection)
Display message ............................ 238
Operation ......................................... 54
PRE-SAFE® Brake
Activating/deactivating ................. 229
Display message ............................ 239
Function/notes ................................ 72
Warning lamp ................................. 271
Program selector button .................. 155
Protection of the environment
General notes .................................. 22
Pulling away
Automatic transmission ................. 147
14 Index
Q
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 27
R
Radar sensor system
Activating/deactivating ................. 233
Display message ............................ 251
Radio
Selecting a station ......................... 226
see separate operating instructions
Radio-wave reception/
transmission in the vehicle
Declaration of conformity ................ 26
Reading lamp ..................................... 118
Rear compartment
Setting the airflow ......................... 137
Setting the air vents ...................... 141
Rear fog lamp
Display message ............................ 245
Switching on/off ........................... 114
Rear view camera
Cleaning instructions ..................... 309
Function/notes ............................. 192
Switching on/off ........................... 193
Rear-view mirror
Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 106
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 107
Rear window defroster
Problem (malfunction) ................... 139
Switching on/off ........................... 138
Rear window wiper
Replacing the wiper blade .............. 124
Switching on/off ........................... 123
Refrigerant (air-conditioning
system)
Important safety notes .................. 374
Refueling
Fuel gauge ....................................... 33
Important safety notes .................. 158
Refueling process .......................... 159
see Fuel
Remote control
Garage door opener ....................... 295
Programming (garage door opener) 296
Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes .................. 119
Overview of bulb types .................. 119
Reporting safety defects .................... 27
Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Display message ............................ 249
Warning lamp ................................. 268
see Fuel
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 139
Restraint system
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System)
Reversing feature
Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 93
Roller sunblinds ............................... 94
Side windows ................................... 89
Tailgate ............................................ 84
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 24
Roller blind
see Roller sunblind
Roller sunblind
Opening/closing .............................. 94
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel ..................................... 93
Roof carrier ........................................ 281
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
guidelines) ......................................... 312
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 375
Route (navigation)
see Route guidance (navigation)
Route guidance (navigation) ............ 225
S
Safety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 61
Child restraint systems .................... 61
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 49
Overview of occupant safety
systems ........................................... 42
Safety system
see Driving safety systems
Index 15
Seat belts
Adjusting the driver's and front-
passenger seat belt ......................... 58
Adjusting the height ......................... 58
Belt force limiters ............................ 60
center rear-compartment seat ......... 59
Cleaning ......................................... 312
Correct usage .................................. 56
Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 60
Fastening ......................................... 58
Important safety guidelines ............. 56
Releasing ......................................... 59
Safety guidelines ............................. 43
Switching belt adjustment on/off
(on-board computer) ...................... 233
Warning lamp ................................. 261
Warning lamp (function) ................... 59
Seats
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 100
Adjusting lumbar support .............. 102
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar
support .......................................... 103
Adjusting the head restraint .......... 101
Cleaning the cover ......................... 311
Correct driver's seat position ........... 98
Folding the backrest (rear
compartment) forwards/back ....... 276
Folding the rear bench seat
forwards/back ............................... 276
Important safety notes .................... 99
Seat heating problem .................... 104
Storing settings (memory function) 109
Switching seat heating on/off ....... 103
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 309
Service menu (on-board computer) . 230
Service products
Brake fluid ..................................... 372
Coolant (engine) ............................ 372
DEF special additives ..................... 370
Engine oil ....................................... 371
Fuel ................................................ 367
Important safety notes .................. 367
Refrigerant (air-conditioning
system) .......................................... 374
Washer fluid ................................... 373
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 234
On-board computer ....................... 230
Setting the air distribution ............... 136
Setting the airflow ............................ 137
Side impact air bag ............................. 47
Side marker lamp (display
message) ............................................ 245
Side windows
Cleaning ......................................... 308
Convenience closing feature ............ 90
Convenience opening feature .......... 90
Important safety information ........... 88
Opening/closing .............................. 89
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 92
Resetting ......................................... 91
Sliding sunroof
see Panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel
SmartKey
Changing the battery ....................... 79
Changing the programming ............. 77
Checking the battery ....................... 79
Convenience closing feature ............ 90
Convenience opening feature .......... 90
Display message ............................ 260
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 76
Important safety notes .................... 76
Loss ................................................. 80
Mechanical key ................................ 78
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 145
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 80
Starting the engine ........................ 147
Snow chains ...................................... 333
Sockets
Center console .............................. 284
General notes ................................ 284
Rear compartment ......................... 285
Spare wheel
Storage location ............................ 362
Stowing .......................................... 363
Specialist workshop ............................ 27
Special seat belt retractor .................. 64
Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
Speedometer
Digital ............................................ 224
In the Instrument cluster ................. 33
Segments ...................................... 221
Selecting the unit of measurement 230
see Instrument cluster
16 Index
SRS
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System)
SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System)
Display message ............................ 239
Introduction ..................................... 43
Warning lamp ................................. 267
Warning lamp (function) ................... 43
Standing lamps
Changing bulbs .............................. 120
Display message ............................ 245
Switching on/off ........................... 114
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting (engine) ................................ 146
Steering (display message) .............. 259
Steering wheel
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 105
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 104
Button overview ............................... 35
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 221
Cleaning ......................................... 311
Important safety notes .................. 104
Paddle shifters ............................... 156
Storing settings (memory function) 109
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 156
Stowage areas ................................... 275
Stowage compartments
Armrest (under) ............................. 275
Cup holders ................................... 282
Glove box ....................................... 275
Important safety information ......... 275
Rear ............................................... 276
Stowage net ................................... 276
Stowage net ....................................... 276
Summer opening
see Convenience opening feature
Summer tires ..................................... 332
Sun visor ............................................ 282
Surround lighting (on-board
computer) .......................................... 231
SUV
(Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 25
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ................................................. 139
Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 74
T
Tachometer ........................................ 220
Tailgate
Display message ............................ 258
Emergency unlocking ....................... 88
Important safety notes .................... 84
Limiting the opening angle ............... 87
Opening/closing (automatically
from inside) ...................................... 87
Opening/closing (automatically
from outside) ................................... 85
Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 85
Opening dimensions ...................... 375
Tail lamps
Display message ............................ 244
Tank content
Fuel gauge ....................................... 33
Technical data
Capacities ...................................... 367
Emergency spare wheel ................. 364
Information .................................... 366
Tires/wheels ................................. 359
Trailer loads ................................... 376
Vehicle data ................................... 375
TELEAID
Call priority .................................... 291
Downloading destinations
(COMAND) ..................................... 291
Downloading routes ....................... 294
Emergency call .............................. 288
Geo fencing ................................... 295
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 293
MB info call button ........................ 290
Remote vehicle locking .................. 292
Roadside Assistance button .......... 290
Search & Send ............................... 292
Self-test ......................................... 288
Speed alert .................................... 294
System .......................................... 288
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 295
Vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis ....................................... 293
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 292
Tele Aid
General notes ................................ 287
Index 17
Telephone
Accepting a call ............................. 227
Display message ............................ 259
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 227
Number from the phone book ........ 228
Redialing ........................................ 228
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 227
Temperature
Coolant .......................................... 220
Outside temperature ...................... 221
Setting (climate control) ................ 136
Theft deterrent systems
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 74
Immobilizer ...................................... 73
Time
see separate operating instructions
Tire pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 338
Checking manually ........................ 337
Display message ............................ 256
Important safety notes .................. 338
Maximum ....................................... 336
Notes ............................................. 335
Pressure loss warning .................... 337
Recommended ............................... 334
Tire pressure loss warning
system
General notes ................................ 337
Important safety notes .................. 337
Restarting ...................................... 338
Tire pressure monitoring system
Checking the tire pressure
electronically ................................. 340
Function/notes ............................. 338
General notes ................................ 338
Important safety notes .................. 339
Restarting ...................................... 341
Warning lamp ................................. 272
Warning message .......................... 341
Tires
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 353
Average weight of the vehicle
occupants (definition) .................... 351
Bar (definition) ............................... 351
Changing a wheel .......................... 354
Characteristics .............................. 351
Checking ........................................ 331
Definition of terms ......................... 351
Direction of rotation ...................... 354
Display message ............................ 256
Distribution of the vehicle
occupants (definition) .................... 354
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) ............................................... 350
DOT (Department of
Transportation) (definition) ............ 351
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
(definition) ..................................... 352
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
(definition) ..................................... 352
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
(definition) ..................................... 352
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) (definition) ......................... 352
Important safety notes .................. 330
Increased vehicle weight due to
optional equipment (definition) ...... 351
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 352
Labeling (overview) ........................ 347
Load bearing index (definition) ...... 353
Load index ..................................... 350
Load index (definition) ................... 352
M+S tires ....................................... 332
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(definition) ..................................... 352
Maximum load on a tire (definition) 353
Maximum permissible tire
pressure (definition) ....................... 352
Maximum tire load ......................... 345
Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 352
MOExtended tires .......................... 315
Optional equipment weight
(definition) ..................................... 353
PSI (pounds per square inch)
(definition) ..................................... 353
Replacing ....................................... 354
Service life ..................................... 332
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 353
Speed rating (definition) ................ 352
Storing ........................................... 355
Structure and characteristics
(definition) ..................................... 351
Summer tires ................................. 332
Temperature .................................. 347
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
(definition) ..................................... 353
18 Index
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 353
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 353
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 351
Tire size (data) ............................... 359
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity, speed rating .................... 348
Tire tread ....................................... 331
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 353
Total load limit (definition) ............. 354
Traction ......................................... 346
Traction (definition) ....................... 353
Tread wear ..................................... 346
TWR (permissible trailer drawbar
noseweight) (definition) ................. 353
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards ...................................... 346
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (definition) .................... 351
Unladen weight (definition) ............ 352
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 354
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 351
see Flat tire
Top Tether ............................................ 65
Towing
Important safety guidelines ........... 322
Installing the towing eye ................ 323
Removing the towing eye ............... 323
With the rear axle raised ................ 324
Towing a trailer
Active Parking Assist ..................... 192
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 310
Coupling up a trailer ...................... 214
Decoupling a trailer ....................... 216
Driving tips .................................... 212
Important safety notes .................. 212
Installing the ball coupling ............. 214
Lights display message .................. 243
Mounting dimensions .................... 376
Power supply ................................. 217
Removing the ball coupling ............ 216
Storing the ball coupling ................ 217
Trailer loads ................................... 376
Towing away
With both axles on the ground ....... 324
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting ............ 325
Important safety notes .................. 322
Trailer coupling
see Towing a trailer
Trailer loads and drawbar
noseweights ...................................... 216
Trailer towing
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 209
Active Lane Keeping Assist .... 206, 212
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 204
PARKTRONIC ................................. 187
Permissible trailer loads and
drawbar noseweights ..................... 216
Transfer case ..................................... 158
Transmission
see Automatic transmission
Transmission position display ......... 153
Transmission position display
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 153
Transporting the vehicle .................. 324
Traveling uphill
Brow of hill ..................................... 173
Driving downhill ............................. 173
Maximum gradient-climbing
capability ....................................... 173
Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 311
Trip computer (on-board computer) 223
Trip odometer
Calling up ....................................... 223
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 224
Turn signals
Changing bulbs (front) ................... 121
Display message ............................ 244
Switching on/off ........................... 114
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)
(definition) ......................................... 353
Type identification plate
see Vehicle identification plate
U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 83
From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 82
Index 19
V
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 283
Vehicle
Correct use ...................................... 27
Data acquisition ............................... 28
Display message ............................ 258
Emergency locking ........................... 83
Emergency unlocking ....................... 83
Equipment ....................................... 23
Individual settings .......................... 230
Limited Warranty ............................. 28
Loading .......................................... 342
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 83
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 76
Lowering ........................................ 358
Maintenance .................................... 24
Parking for a long period ................ 165
Pulling away ................................... 147
Raising ........................................... 356
Reporting problems ......................... 27
Securing from rolling away ............ 355
Towing away .................................. 322
Transporting .................................. 324
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 83
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 76
Vehicle data ................................... 375
Vehicle data ....................................... 375
Vehicle data (off-road driving)
Approach/departure angle ............ 376
Fording depth ................................ 375
Maximum gradient climbing ability 376
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 375
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 83
Vehicle identification number
see VIN
Vehicle identification plate .............. 366
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 314
Video (DVD) ........................................ 227
VIN ...................................................... 366
W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 263
Brakes ........................................... 263
Check Engine ................................. 268
Coolant .......................................... 269
Distance warning ........................... 271
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 271
ESP® .............................................. 265
ESP® OFF ....................................... 266
Fuel tank ........................................ 268
Overview .......................................... 34
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 49
Reserve fuel ................................... 268
Seat belt ........................................ 261
SRS ................................................ 267
Tire pressure monitor .................... 272
Warranty ............................................ 366
Washer fluid
Display message ............................ 259
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 358
Wheel chock ...................................... 355
Wheels
Changing a wheel .......................... 354
Checking ........................................ 331
Cleaning ......................................... 307
Cleaning (warning) ......................... 355
Emergency spare wheel ................. 361
Important safety notes .................. 330
Interchanging/changing ................ 354
Mounting a new wheel ................... 357
Mounting a wheel .......................... 355
Removing a wheel .......................... 357
Storing ........................................... 355
Tightening torque ........................... 358
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 359
Window curtain air bag
Display message ............................ 240
Operation ......................................... 48
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 137
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system .............. 305
Notes ............................................. 373
Windshield wipers
Problem (malfunction) ................... 126
Rear window wiper ........................ 123
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 123
Switching on/off ........................... 122
20 Index
Winter driving
Important safety notes .................. 332
Slippery road surfaces ................... 171
Snow chains .................................. 333
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 332
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 308
Important safety notes .................. 123
Replacing (rear window) ................ 124
Replacing (windshield) ................... 124
Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) 311
Workshops
see Qualified specialist workshop
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 137
Index 21
Protection of the environment
General notes
HEnvironmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of
comprehensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner
that takes the requirements of both nature
and humanity into account.
You too can help to protect the environment
by operating your vehicle in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
Roperating conditions of your vehicle
Ryour personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel
consumption.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures
are correct.
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
them.
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals.
Ralways have service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when
starting the engine.
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle
is stationary.
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front.
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.
Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel
consumption.
Environmental concerns and
recommendations
Wherever the operating instructions require
you to dispose of materials, first try to
regenerate or re-use them. Observe the
relevant environmental rules and regulations
when disposing of materials. In this way you
will help to protect the environment.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
HEnvironmental note
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
parts.
! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning
Devices, as well as control units and
sensors for these restraint systems, may be
installed in the following areas of your
vehicle:
Rdoors
Rdoor pillars
Rdoor sills
Rseats
Rcockpit
Rinstrument cluster
Rcenter console
Do not install accessories such as audio
systems in these areas. Do not carry out
repairs or welding. You could impair the
operating efficiency of the restraint
systems.
22 Introduction
Have aftermarket accessories installed at
a qualified specialist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels
as well as accessories relevant to safety
which have not been approved by Mercedes.
This could lead to malfunctions in safety-
relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use
only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of
equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and
accessories that have been specifically
approved for your vehicle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to
strict quality control. Every part has been
specifically developed, manufactured or
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz
vehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should therefore be used.
More than 300,000 different genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for
Mercedes-Benz models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts for necessary service and repair work.
In addition, strategically located parts
delivery centers provide quick and reliable
parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification
number (VIN) (Y page 366) when ordering
genuine Mercedes-Benz parts.
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment
This Operator's Manual describes all models
and all standard and optional equipment of
your vehicle available at the time of going to
print. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may
not feature all functions described here. This
also applies to safety-relevant systems and
functions. The equipment in your vehicle may
therefore differ from that shown in the
descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement lists all
systems installed in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
Booklet are important documents and should
be kept in the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation
Service and literature
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following
warranties:
RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
REmission Systems Warranty
REmission Performance Warranty
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
Control Systems Warranty
RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
laws)
Introduction 23
Z
Information for customers in
California
Under California law you may be entitled to a
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
purchase price or lease price, if after a
reasonable number of repair attempts
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered
by its express warranty. During the period of
18 months from original delivery of the
vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles
(approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a
reasonable number of repair attempts is
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or
more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or
malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect
or malfunction has been subject to repair
two or more times, and you have directly
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in
writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or
malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly
notified us in writing of the need for its
repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
repair of the same or different substantial
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative
total of more than 30 calendar days.
Please send your written notice to:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Maintenance
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes
all the necessary maintenance work which
should be done at regular intervals.
Always have the Service and Warranty
Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle
to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The
service advisor will record every service for
you in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program offers technical help in the event of
a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside
Assistance Hotline are answered by our
agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
For additional information, refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside
Assistance" section in the Service and
Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both
in your vehicle literature portfolio.
Change of address or change of
ownership
In the event of a change of address, please
send us the "Notification of Address Change"
in the Service and Guarantee booklet or
simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline
number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service Center (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in
contacting you in a timely manner should the
need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the
entire literature in the vehicle so that it is
available to the next owner.
24 Introduction
If you have purchased a used car, please send
us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in
the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
Vehicle operation outside the USA
and Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign
countries, please be aware that:
Rservice facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available.
Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
may cause damage to the catalytic
converter.
Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower
octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause
engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available
for delivery in Europe through our European
Delivery Program. For details, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to
one of the following addresses.
In the USA
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Sports Utility Vehicle
GWARNING
Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle
may start to skid and roll over in the event of
an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when
the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road
conditions. There is a risk of an accident.
Always adapt your speed and driving style to
the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
and severe or fatal injury.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt.
You and all vehicle occupants should always
wear your seat belts.
Operating safety
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
Always have the prescribed service/
maintenance work as well as any required
repairs carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
GWARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
GWARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other
Introduction 25
Z
networked components. In particular,
systems relevant to safety could also be
affected. As a result, these may no longer
function as intended and/or jeopardize the
operating safety of the vehicle. There is an
increased risk of an accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as
electronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and
electronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
curb or an unpaved road
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g.
a curb or a hole in the road
Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage
or parts of the chassis.
In situations like this, the body, the
undercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or
tires could be damaged without the
damage being visible. Components
damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail
or, in the case of an accident, no longer
withstand the strain they are designed to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged,
combustible materials such as leaves,
grass or twigs can gather between the
underbody and the underbody paneling. If
these materials come in contact with hot
parts of the exhaust system for an
extended period, they can catch fire.
Have the vehicle checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop. If on continuing your journey
you notice that driving safety is impaired,
pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
paying attention to road and traffic
conditions. In such cases, visit a qualified
specialist workshop.
Declarations of conformity
Vehicle components which receive
and/or transmit radio waves
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: 1) These devices may not cause
harmful interference, and 2) These devices
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) These devices
may not cause interference, and (2) These
devices must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device."
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is only intended
for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
a qualified specialist workshop.
GWARNING
If you connect equipment to the diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,
the operating safety of the vehicle could be
affected. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not connect any equipment to a
diagnostics connection in the vehicle.
GWARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle
is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
26 Introduction
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
! If the engine is switched off and
equipment on the diagnostics connection
is used, the starter battery may discharge.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics
connection can lead to emissions monitoring
information being reset, for example. This
may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the
requirements of the next emissions test
during the main inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a
qualified specialist workshop. It has the
necessary specialist knowledge, tools and
qualifications to correctly carry out the work
required on your vehicle. This is especially the
case for work relevant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Always have the following work carried out at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
Rwork relevant to safety
Rservice and maintenance work
Rrepair work
Ralterations, installation work and
modifications
Rwork on electronic components
Correct use
If you remove any warning stickers, you or
others could fail to recognize certain dangers.
Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when
driving your vehicle:
Rthe safety notes in this manual
Rthe Technical Data section in this manual
Rtraffic rules and regulations
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or
contact us at one of the following addresses.
In the USA
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only:
The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
of 1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
Introduction 27
Z
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
Limited Warranty
! Follow the instructions in this manual
about the proper operation of your vehicle
as well as about possible vehicle damage.
Damage to your vehicle that arises from
culpable contraventions against these
instructions is not covered either by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the
New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
Data stored in the vehicle
Information about electronic data
acquisition in the vehicle
(Including notice pursuant to California Code
§ 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with
devices that can record vehicle systems data.
If your vehicle is equipped with mbrace
(Canada: TELE AID), data is transmitted in the
event of an accident.
This information helps, for example, to test
vehicle systems after an accident and to
continually improve vehicle safety.
Daimler AG can access these data and submit
them:
Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
purposes
Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner
Ron the instruction of prosecuting
authorities
Rfor use in arbitration of disputes that
involve Daimler AG, its subsidiaries or its
sales and service organizations
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law
Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELE
AID) purchase agreement to find out more
about data that can be recorded and
transmitted by this system.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as during air bag deployment
or when hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
Rhow various systems in your vehicle are
operating
Rwhether or not the driver and passenger
seat belts are fastened
Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal and
Rhow fast the vehicle is traveling
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and
no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) are recorded. However,
28 Introduction
other parties, such as law enforcement, can
combine the EDR data with the type of
personal identification data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, who have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-
source software used in your vehicle and its
electronic components is available on the
following website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource
Introduction 29
Z
30
Dashboard ........................................... 32
Instrument cluster .............................. 33
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 35
Center console .................................... 36
Overhead control panel ...................... 38
Door control panel .............................. 39
31
At a glance
Dashboard
Function Page
:Steering wheel paddle
shifters 156
;Combination switch 114
=Instrument cluster 33
?Horn
APARKTRONIC warning
display 185
BOverhead control panel 38
COperating the climate
control systems 128
DIgnition lock 145
Start/Stop button 145
Function Page
EAdjusting the steering
wheel manually 104
FAdjusting the steering
wheel electrically 104
GCruise control lever 174
HParking brake 165
IDiagnostics connection 26
JOpening the hood 302
KReleasing the parking brake 165
LLight switch 112
32 Dashboard
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Displays and controls
Function Page
:Fuel gauge
;Coolant temperature 220
=Speedometer with
segments 221
Function Page
?Multifunction display 222
ATachometer 220
iAdjust the instrument cluster lighting
using the on-board computer
(Y page 231).
Instrument cluster 33
At a glance
Warning and indicator lamps
Function Page
:÷ ESP®265
;· Distance warning 271
=å ESP® OFF 265
?$ Brakes (USA only) 263
AJ Brakes (Canada only) 263
B#! Turn signals 114
C! ABS 263
D6 SRS 267
E; Check Engine 268
Fh Tire pressure monitor 272
Gü Seat belt 261
Function Page
H% Diesel engine:
preglow 147
I? Coolant 269
JK High-beam
headlamps 115
KL Low-beam
headlamps 113
LT Parking lamps 114
MR Rear fog lamp 114
NN Front fog lamps 113
O8 Reserve fuel 268
34 Instrument cluster
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Function Page
:Multifunction display 222
;Audio/COMAND display;
see the separate operating
instructions
=?
Switches on the Voice
Control System; see the
separate operating
instructions
?~
Rejects or ends a call 227
Exits phone book/redial
memory
6
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial
memory
WX
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute
Function Page
A=;
Selects a menu 221
9:
Selects a submenu or
scrolls through lists 221
a
Confirms your selection 221
Hides display messages 235
B%
Back 221
Switches off the Voice
Control System; see the
separate operating
instructions
Multifunction steering wheel 35
At a glance
Center console
Center console, upper section
Function Page
:£ Hazard warning
lamps 115
;ATA indicator lamp 74
=45 Indicator lamp 49
?å ESP®70
ACOMAND; see the separate
operating instructions
Function Page
Bc Seat heating 103
C¤ ECO start/stop
function 148
Dc PARKTRONIC 185
36 Center console
At a glance
Center console, lower section
Function Page
:Stowage compartment 275
Ashtray 283
Cigarette lighter 284
Socket 284
;Cup holder 282
Function Page
=Stowage compartment 275
?Audio/COMAND
controller; see the separate
operating instructions
Center console 37
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Function Page
:u Switches the rear-
compartment interior
lighting on/off 118
;| Switches the
automatic interior lighting
control on/off 118
=p Switches the right-
hand reading lamp on/off 118
?3 Opens/closes the
panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel with roller
sunblinds 93
Aï MB Info call button
(mbrace system) 290
BG SOS button (mbrace
system) 288
Function Page
CRear-view mirror 106
DButtons for the garage door
opener 297
EMicrophone for mbrace
(emergency call system),
telephone and the Voice
Control System1
FF Roadside Assistance
call button (mbrace
system) 290
Gp Switches the left-
hand reading lamp on/off 118
Hc Switches the front
interior lighting on/off 118
1The Voice Control System is only available in combination with COMAND. Observe the additional operating
instructions.
38 Overhead control panel
At a glance
Door control panel
Function Page
:Opens the door 81
;%& Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 82
=Adjusts the seats
electrically 100
?r45=
Stores settings for the seat,
exterior mirrors and
steering wheel 109
AZ Selects the left
exterior mirror 106
Bö Folds the exterior
mirrors in/out 107
C\ Selects the right
exterior mirror 106
Function Page
D7 Adjusts the exterior
mirrors 106
EW Opens/closes the
front side windows 89
FW Opens/closes the
rear side windows 89
Gn Activates/
deactivates the override
feature for the side
windows in the rear
compartment 66
Hq Opens/closes the
tailgate 87
Door control panel 39
At a glance
40
Useful information .............................. 42
Panic alarm .......................................... 42
Occupant safety .................................. 42
Children in the vehicle ........................ 61
Driving safety systems ....................... 67
Theft deterrent locking system ......... 73
41
Safety
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 27).
Panic alarm
X To activate: press ! button : for
approximately one second.
An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting
flashes.
XTo deactivate: press ! button :
again.
or
XInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or
XPress the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.
The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the
vehicle.
Occupant safety
Overview of occupant safety
In this section, you will learn the most
important facts about the restraint system
components of the vehicle.
The restraint system consists of:
Rseat belts
Rchild restraint systems
RLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors
Additional protection is provided by:
RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
RNECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO
luxury head restraints
Rair bag system components with:
-PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
-front-passenger seat with Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
The different air bag systems work
independently of each other. The protective
functions of the system work in conjunction
with each other. Not all air bags are always
deployed in an accident.
GWARNING
Modifications to or work improperly
conducted on restraint system components
or their wiring, as well as tampering with
interconnected electronic systems, can lead
to the restraint systems no longer functioning
as intended.
Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs), for example, could deploy
inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents
although the deceleration threshold for air
bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,
never modify the restraint systems. Do not
tamper with electronic components or their
software.
iFor information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle restraint
systems for infants and children, see
"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 61).
42 Occupant safety
Safety
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
Introduction
SRS consists of:
RThe 6 SRS warning lamp
RAir bags
RAir bag control unit (with crash sensors)
REmergency Tensioning Devices
RBelt force limiters
SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming
into contact with the vehicle's interior in the
event of an accident. It can also reduce the
effect of the forces to which occupants are
subjected during an accident.
SRS warning lamp
GWARNING
If SRS is malfunctioning, child restraint
system components may be triggered
unintentionally or might not be triggered at all
in the event of an accident with a high rate of
vehicle deceleration. There is an increased
risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Have SRS checked and repaired immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop.
SRS functions are checked regularly when
you switch on the ignition and when the
engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions
can be detected in good time.
The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
on. It goes out no later than a few seconds
after the engine is started.
The SRS components are in operational
readiness when the 6 SRS warning lamp
goes out while the engine is running.
There is a malfunction if:
Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light
up when the ignition is switched on
Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
warning lamp does not go out after a few
seconds
Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
warning lamp lights up again
Safety guidelines for seat belts,
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)
and air bags
GWARNING
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have
been subjected to stress in an accident
must be replaced. Their anchoring points
must also be checked. Only use seat belts
installed or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain
perchlorate material, which may require
special handling and regard for the
environment. Check your national disposal
guidelines. California residents, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
that has deployed must be replaced.
RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
RDo not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the seat belts.
RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
RNo modifications of any kind may be made
to any components or wiring of the SRS.
RDo not change or remove any component
or part of the SRS.
RDo not install additional trim material, seat
covers, badges, etc. over the steering
wheel hub, front-passenger front air bag
Occupant safety 43
Safety
Z
cover, outer sides of the seat backrests,
door trim panels, or door frame trims.
RDo not install additional electrical/
electronic equipment on or near SRS
components and wiring.
RKeep area between air bags and occupants
free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,
umbrellas, etc.).
RDo not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may be thrown around in
the vehicle and cause head and other
injuries when the window curtain air bag is
deployed.
RAir bag system components will be hot after
an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.
RNever place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a
risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended air bag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be
performed by qualified technicians.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
RFor your protection and the protection of
others, when scrapping the air bag unit or
ETD, our safety instructions must be
followed. These instructions are available
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
RGiven the considerable deployment speed,
required inflation volume, and the material
of the air bags, there is the possibility of
abrasions or other, potentially more serious
injuries resulting from air bag deployment.
If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz
strongly recommends that you inform the
subsequent owner that the vehicle is
equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the
applicable section in the Operator's Manual.
Air bags
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Using unsuitable seat covers could restrict or
even prevent deployment of the air bags
integrated into the seats. Consequently, the
air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
they are designed to do. In addition, the
function of the air bag deactivation system
could be restricted. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
GWARNING
The air bag parts are hot after the airbag has
been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have the
deployed air bags replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop as soon as possible.
GWARNING
Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence
of injuries and fatalities in certain situations:
Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front-
passenger front air bags and driver's knee
bag)
Rside impacts (side impact air bags, window
curtain air bags and pelvis air bags)
Rrollover (window curtain air bags)
However, no system available today can
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
When the air bags are deployed, a small
amount of powder is released. The powder
generally does not constitute a health hazard
and does not indicate that there is a fire in the
vehicle. In order to prevent potential
breathing difficulties, you should leave the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
have any breathing difficulty but cannot get
out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates,
then get fresh air by opening a window or
door.
44 Occupant safety
Safety
GWARNING
In order to reduce the potential danger of
injuries caused during the deployment of the
front air bags, the driver and front passenger
must always be correctly seated and wear
their seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision, you must always be in the normal
seat position with your back against the
backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure
that it is correctly positioned on your body.
As the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating position
and correct positioning of the hands on the
steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
properly or are too close to the air bag can be
seriously injured or killed by an air bag, as it
inflates with great force instantaneously:
Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly and
in a position that is as upright as possible
with your back against the backrest.
Rmove the driver's seat as far back as
possible, still permitting proper operation
of vehicle controls. The distance from the
center of the driver's chest to the center of
the air bag cover on the steering wheel
must be at least 10 inches (25 cm). You
should be able to accomplish this by
adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If
you have any difficulties, please contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rdo not lean your head or chest close to the
steering wheel or dashboard.
Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
Placing hands and arms inside the rim can
increase the risk and potential severity of
hand/arm injury if the driver front air bag
inflates.
Radjust the front-passenger seat as far back
as possible from the dashboard when the
seat is occupied.
Roccupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their heads
in the area of the door where the side
impact air bag inflates. This could result in
serious or fatal injuries should the side
impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as
upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized
infant restraint, toddler restraint or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight
of the child.
Failure to follow these instructions can result
in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you
make the buyer aware of this safety
information. Be sure to give the buyer this
Operator's Manual.
The air bag installation locations are
identified by the AIR BAG symbol.
The air bags are deployed if the air bag control
unit detects the need for deployment. Only in
the event of such a situation will the air bags
provide their supplemental protection.
If the driver and front passenger do not wear
their seat belts, it is not possible for the air
bags to provide their supplemental
protection.
In the event of other types of impacts and
impacts below air bag deployment
thresholds, the air bags will not deploy. The
driver and passenger will then be protected
to the extent possible by a properly fastened
seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also
needed to provide the best possible
protection in a rollover.
Air bags provide additional protection; they
are not, however, a substitute for seat belts.
All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat
belts regardless of whether your vehicle is
equipped with air bags or not.
It is important for your safety and that of your
passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
and to have any malfunctioning air bags
repaired. This will help to make sure the air
bags continue to perform their protective
function for the vehicle occupants in the
event of a crash.
Occupant safety 45
Safety
Z
iAfter an air bag has been deployed, have
the vehicle towed to the nearest qualified
specialist workshop, even if your vehicle is
ready to drive.
Front air bags
The front air bags increase protection for the
driver's and front passenger's head and
chest.
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the
steering wheel; front-passenger front air
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove
box.
They are deployed:
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a
longitudinal direction
Rif the system determines that air bag
deployment can offer additional protection
to that provided by the seat belt
Rindependently of other air bags in the
vehicle
The release time of the front air bags is
dependent upon the use of the seat belt.
If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags are
generally not deployed. If the system detects
high vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal
direction, the front air bags are deployed.
Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air
bags. In the event of a collision, the air bag
control unit evaluates the vehicle
deceleration. In the first deployment stage,
the front air bag is filled with enough
propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.
The front air bag is fully deployed if a second
deployment threshold is exceeded within a
few milliseconds.
The deployment of front-passenger front air
bag ; is also influenced by the weight
category of the front passenger, which is
determined by the Occupant Classification
System (OCS) (Y page 49).
The lighter the passenger-side occupant, the
higher the vehicle deceleration rate required
(predicted at the start of the impact) for
second stage inflation of the front-passenger
front air bag. In the second stage, the front
air bags are inflated with the maximum
amount of propellant gas available.
The front air bags are not deployed in
situations where a low impact severity is
predicted. You will then be protected by the
fastened seat belt.
The front-passenger front air bag will only be
deployed if:
Rthe system, based on the OCS weight
sensor readings, detects that the front-
passenger seat is occupied
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp on the center console is not lit
(Y page 49)
Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high-
impact severity
Driver's knee bag
46 Occupant safety
Safety
Driver's knee bag : increases the driver's
protection against:
Rknee injuries
Rthigh injuries
Rlower leg injuries
Driver's knee bag : deploys under the
steering column. If, during a frontal collision,
the system determines that air bag
deployment can offer additional protection to
that provided by the seat belt, driver's knee
bag : is deployed along with the driver's air
bag. Driver's knee bag : operates best in
conjunction with correctly positioned and
fastened seat belts.
Side impact air bags
GWARNING
Using unsuitable seat covers could restrict or
even prevent deployment of the air bags
integrated into the seats. Consequently, the
air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
they are designed to do. In addition, the
function of the air bag deactivation system
could be restricted. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
GWARNING
Sensors to control the air bags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not
performed correctly to the doors or door
paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead
to the function of the sensors being impaired.
The air bags might therefore not function
properly any more. Consequently, the air bags
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door
paneling carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-
Benz. The seat covers must have a special
tear seam for side impact air bags. Otherwise,
the side impact air bags cannot deploy
correctly and therefore cannot provide the
intended protection in the event of an
accident.
When deployed, the side impact air bags offer
additional protection for the thorax of the
vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle
on which the impact occurs. However, they
do not protect the:
Rhead
Rneck
Rarms
Side impact air bags : deploy next to the
outer seat cushions.
Side impact air bags : are deployed:
Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
Rindependently of the front air bags
Rindependently of the ETDs
If the vehicle rolls over, the side impact air
bags are generally not deployed. Side impact
air bags are deployed if the system detects
high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a
lateral direction and determines that side
impact air bag deployment can offer
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt.
Occupant safety 47
Safety
Z
Side impact air bags : will not deploy in side
impacts which do not exceed the system's
preset deployment thresholds for lateral
acceleration/deceleration. You will then be
protected by the fastened seat belt.
The side impact air bag on the front-
passenger side is not deployed in the
following situations:
ROCS has detected that the front-passenger
seat is unoccupied.
Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not
fastened.
The side impact air bag on the front-
passenger side will deploy if the front-
passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of
whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
or not.
Pelvis air bags
GWARNING
Only use seat covers which have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using seat covers or other seat
coverings can cause a malfunction of the side
impact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for availability.
Pelvis air bag deployment enhances the level
of protection of the vehicle occupants on the
side of the vehicle on which the impact
occurs.
Pelvis air bags : deploy next to and below
the outer seat cushions. They are deployed:
Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
Rindependently of the front air bags
Rindependently of the ETDs
If the vehicle rolls over, the pelvis air bags are
generally not deployed. Exception: if the
system detects high vehicle deceleration or
acceleration in a lateral direction and
determines that deployment can offer
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt.
Pelvis air bags : will not deploy in side
impacts which do not exceed the system's
preset deployment thresholds for lateral
acceleration/deceleration. You will then be
protected by the fastened seat belt.
The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side
is not deployed in the following situations:
ROCS has detected that the front-passenger
seat is unoccupied.
Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not
fastened.
The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side
will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is
fastened, regardless of whether the front-
passenger seat is occupied or not.
Window curtain air bags
The window curtain air bags enhance the level
of protection for the head, but not chest or
arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of
the vehicle on which the impact occurs.
The window curtain air bags are integrated
into the side of the roof frame and deploy in
the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
48 Occupant safety
Safety
Window curtain air bags : are deployed:
Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
Rregardless of whether the front-passenger
seat is occupied
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
Rif the vehicle rolls over and the system
determines that window curtain air bag
deployment can offer additional protection
to that provided by the seat belt
Rindependently of the front air bags
Window curtain air bags : will not deploy in
the event of impacts which do not exceed the
system's preset deployment thresholds for
vehicle acceleration/deceleration. You will
then be protected by the fastened seat belt.
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
How the Occupant Classification
System works
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
categorizes the occupant on the front-
passenger seat using a weight sensor. The
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated
automatically for certain weight categories.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
shows you the current status. If the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
lit, the passenger air bag is disabled.
The system does not deactivate:
Rthe side impact air bag
Rthe pelvis air bag
Rthe window curtain air bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly
Rin a position that is as upright as possible
with their back against the seat backrest
Rwith their feet on the floor
The OCS weight sensor reading is affected if
the occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. by
leaning on the armrest.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or
the seat cushion are damaged, have the
necessary repair work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use seat
accessories that have been approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Both the driver and the front passenger
should always observe the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp as an indication of
whether or not the front passenger is
positioned correctly. Observe also the air bag
display messages that can be displayed in the
instrument cluster (Y page 242).
GWARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates
when an adult or someone larger than a small
individual is in the front-passenger seat, have
the front passenger reposition himself or
herself in the seat until the 45
indicator lamp goes out.
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front-passenger front air
bag deployment when the OCS has classified
the front-passenger seat occupant as
weighing as much as or less than a typical 12-
month-old child in a standard child restraint
or if the front-passenger seat is classified as
being empty.
Occupant safety 49
Safety
Z
When the OCS senses that the front-
passenger seat occupant is classified as
being up to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint, the 45 indicator lamp will
illuminate when the engine is started and
remain illuminated, indicating that the front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front-
passenger seat is classified as being empty,
the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate
when the engine is started and remain
illuminated, indicating that the front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front-
passenger seat occupant is classified as
being heavier than the weight of a typical 12-
month-old child seated in a standard child
restraint or as being a small individual (such
as a young teenager or a small adult), the
45 indicator lamp will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds when the engine is
started and then, depending on occupant
weight sensor readings from the front-
passenger seat, remain illuminated or go out.
With the 45 indicator lamp
illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag
is deactivated. With the 45 indicator
lamp out, the front-passenger front air bag is
activated.
When the OCS senses that the front-
passenger seat occupant is classified as an
adult or someone larger than a small
individual, the 45 indicator lamp will
illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when
the engine is started and then go out,
indicating that the front-passenger front air
bag is activated.
If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,
the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated and will not be deployed.
If the 45 indicator lamp is not
illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag
is activated and will be deployed:
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
Rindependently of the side impact air bags
If the front-passenger front air bag is
deployed, the rate of inflation will be
influenced by:
Rthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as
assessed by the air bag control unit
Rthe front passenger's weight category as
identified by OCS
GWARNING
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained on the rear
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
we strongly recommend that children be
placed in the rear seats whenever possible.
Regardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriate infant
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat
belt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchors
and Top Tether strap, fully in accordance with
the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should always
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized infant
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when circumstances
require you to place a child in the front-
passenger seat:
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to deactivate the
50 Occupant safety
Safety
front-passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the system senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropriate
child restraint on the front-passenger seat.
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front-passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front-passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
even with the air bag technology installed
in your vehicle. The only means to eliminate
this risk completely is never to place a child
in a rear-facing child restraint in the front-
passenger seat. We therefore strongly
recommend that you always place a child
in a rear-facing child restraint on the rear
seat.
RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on
the front-passenger seat, make sure the
45 indicator lamp is illuminated,
indicating that the front-passenger front air
bag is deactivated. Should the 45
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while
the restraint is installed, please check
installation. Periodically check the
45 indicator lamp while driving to
make sure that the 45 indicator
lamp is illuminated. If the 45
indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do
not transport a child on the front-passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front-passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front-passenger
front air bag inflates.
RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child
restraint on the front-passenger seat:
-move the seat as far back as possible
-use the proper child restraint
recommended for the age, size and
weight of the child
-secure child restraint with the vehicle's
seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer's instructions
RFor children larger than the typical 12-
month-old child, the front-passenger front
air bag may or may not be activated.
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
mean that the front-passenger front air bag
will also deploy.
The OCS may have detected that the seat:
Ris empty or occupied by the weight of a
typical child up to twelve months old,
seated in a child restraint system.
Ris occupied by a small individual, such as a
young teenager or a small adult.
Ris occupied by a child in a child restraint
system whose weight is greater than that
of a typical twelve month old child.
These are examples of when the OCS
deactivates the front-passenger front air bag.
Deactivation takes place although the
collision fulfills the criteria for deploying the
driver's air bag.
If the SmartKey is removed from the ignition
lock or is in position 0, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up.
Occupant safety 51
Safety
Z
GWARNING
If the red 6 SRS warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and the 45
indicator lamp light up simultaneously, the
OCS is malfunctioning. The front passenger
front air bag will be deactivated in this case.
Have the system checked by qualified
technicians as soon as possible. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
In order to ensure proper operation of the air
bag system and OCS:
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
position that is as upright as possible with
your back against the seat backrest.
RWhen seated, a passenger should not
position him/herself in such a way as to
cause the passenger's weight to be lifted
from the seat cushion as this may result in
the OCS being unable to correctly
approximate the passenger's weight
category.
RRead and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
System self-test
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up if you:
Rturn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock
Rpress the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button
once or twice on vehicles with KEYLESS-
GO.
When an adult is sitting correctly on the front-
passenger seat and is categorized by the OCS
system as an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp lights up and goes off
again after approximately six seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the OCS
system classifies the front-passenger seat as
being empty, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp will continue to light up and
not go out.
GWARNING
If the 4 5 indicator lamp does not
illuminate, the system is not functioning. You
must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center before seating any child on the front
passenger seat.
For more information about the OCS, see
"Problems with the Occupant Classification
System" (Y page 53).
GWARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect the
function of the OCS. This could result in the
front-passenger front air bag not functioning
as intended during an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects between the seat
surface and the child restraint system. Make
sure that the bottom and back of the child
restraint system make full contact with the
front-passenger seat cushion and backrest.
Always comply with the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions.
52 Occupant safety
Safety
Problems with the Occupant Classification System
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator
lights up and remains
on.
The person on the
front-passenger seat:
Rhas the weight of a
typical adult
Rhas been determined
by the system not to
be a child
The OCS is malfunctioning.
XMake sure that the front passenger is sitting in a correct, upright
position.
XHave the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display (Y page 242).
GWARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typical
adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do not
allow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator
lamp does not light up
and/or stays on.
The front-passenger
seat is:
Runoccupied
Roccupied with a
weight up to that of a
typical twelve-
month-old child in a
standard child
restraint system
The OCS is malfunctioning.
XMake sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
child seat.
XMake sure that the backrest and base of the child restraint
system are resting securely on the front-passenger seat. If
necessary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
XWhen installing the child restraint system, make sure that the
seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-
passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt
being pulled too tightly.
XCheck the installation of the child restraint system.
XMake sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto
the seat.
XIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, have
the OCS system checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop. Do not transport a child on the front-
passenger seat until the OCS has been repaired.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display (Y page 242).
Occupant safety 53
Safety
Z
GWARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passenger
seat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
protection system)
GWARNING
The PRE-SAFE® system reduces the impact of
an accident on vehicle occupants, as long as
their seat belts have been fastened correctly.
Although your vehicle is equipped with a PRE-
SAFE® system, the possibility of injury in the
event of an accident cannot be ruled out. You
should therefore always drive carefully and
adapt your driving style to the prevailing road,
weather and traffic conditions.
PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures to
protect occupants in certain hazardous
situations.
PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
Rif BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully on
vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS
Rif, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, the
radar sensor system detects an imminent
danger of collision in certain situations
Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when
physical limits are exceeded and the
vehicle understeers or oversteers severely
If the seat belts are not released:
XWhen the vehicle is stationary, move the
backrest or seat back slightly.
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and
the locking mechanism is released.
GWARNING
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
as you adjust the seat.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats when resetting
the seats. There is a risk that the seats
and/or the objects could be damaged.
More information about seat belt adjustment,
a convenience function integrated into PRE-
SAFE®, can be found in the "Seat belt
adjustment" section (Y page 58).
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-
PRO luxury head restraints
GWARNING
The function of the head restraint may be
impaired if you:
Rattach objects such as coat hangers to the
head restraints, for example
Ruse head restraint covers
If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfill
their intended protective function in the event
of an accident. In addition, objects attached
to the head restraints could endanger other
vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk
of injury.
Do not attach any objects to the head
restraints and do not use head restraint
covers.
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury
head restraints increase protection of the
driver's and front-passenger's head and
neck. In the event of a rear collision of a
certain severity, the NECK-PRO head
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
on the driver's and the front-passenger seats
are moved forwards and upwards. This
provides better head support.
If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO
luxury head restraints have been triggered in
an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
on the driver's and front-passenger seats
(Y page 55). Otherwise, the additional
54 Occupant safety
Safety
protection will not be available in the event of
another rear-end collision. NECK-PRO head
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
that have been triggered are moved forwards
and can no longer be adjusted.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO
luxury head restraints checked at a qualified
specialist workshop after a rear-end collision.
Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head
restraints
Important safety notes
GWARNING
For reasons of safety, have the NECK-PRO
head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head
restraints checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center after a rear-end
collision.
GWARNING
When pushing back the NECK-PRO head
restraint cushion, make sure your fingers do
not become caught between the head
restraint cushion and the cover. Failure to
observe this could result in injuries.
NECK-PRO head restraints
iResetting the NECK-PRO head restraints
requires a lot of strength. If you have
difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO head
restraints, have this work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
XTilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint
cushion forwards in the direction of
arrow :.
XPush the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion
down in the direction of arrow ; as far as
it will go.
XFirmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint
cushion back in the direction of arrow =
until the cushion engages.
XRepeat this procedure for the second
NECK-PRO head restraint.
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
iIf you have difficulty resetting the NECK-
PRO luxury head restraints, have this work
carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
XRemove resetting tool : from the vehicle
document wallet.
XSlide resetting tool : into guide ;
between the NECK-PRO luxury head
Occupant safety 55
Safety
Z
restraint and the rear cover of the head
restraint.
XPush resetting tool : downwards until you
hear the head restraint deployment
mechanism engage.
XPull out resetting tool :.
XFirmly press the NECK-PRO luxury head
restraint cushion back = until it engages.
XRepeat this procedure for the second
NECK-PRO luxury head restraint.
XPut resetting tool : back into the vehicle
document wallet.
Seat belts
Important safety notes
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in:
Rall 50 states
Rthe U.S. territories
Rthe District of Columbia
Rall Canadian provinces
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts
fastened when the vehicle is in motion.
iSee "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 61) for further information on
infants and children traveling in the vehicle
as well as on child restraint systems.
GWARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if the backrest is not in the
upright position. When braking or in the event
of an accident, you could slide underneath the
seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck
injuries, for example. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always make sure that the seat
is in the upright position.
GWARNING
Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if:
Rthey are damaged, extremely dirty,
bleached or dyed
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices or the
belt anchorage has been modified.
Damage caused to seat belts in an accident
may not be visible, e.g. by splinters of glass.
Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or
fail, for example in the event of an accident.
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices may
be deployed unintentionally or fail to be
deployed when required. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Never modify seat belts, Emergency
Tensioning Devices, seat belt anchorages and
inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not
damaged or worn and are clean.
Only use seat belts that have been approved
for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in:
Rall 50 states
Rthe U.S. territories
Rthe District of Columbia
Rall Canadian provinces
Even where this is not required by law, all
vehicle occupants should correctly fasten
their seat belts before starting the journey.
iSee "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 61) for further information on
infants and children traveling in the vehicle
as well as on child restraint systems.
Correct use of the seat belts
GWARNING
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
RSeat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any other
way than as described in this section, as
56 Occupant safety
Safety
that could result in serious injuries in the
event of an accident.
REach occupant should wear their seat belt
at all times, because seat belts help reduce
the likelihood of and potential severity of
injuries in accidents, including rollovers.
The integrated restraint system includes
SRS (driver front air bag, driver's side knee
bag, front-passenger front air bag, side
impact air bags, pelvis air bags, window
curtain air bags for the side windows),
Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt
force limiters, and front seat knee bolsters.
The system is designed to enhance the
protection offered to properly belted
occupants in certain frontal (front air bags,
driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side
(side impact air bags, window curtain air
bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceed
preset deployment thresholds and in
certain rollovers (window curtain air bags
and ETDs).
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, across your neck or off your shoulder.
In a frontal crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The seat
belt would also apply too much force to the
ribs or abdomen, which could severely
injure internal organs such as your liver or
spleen.
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder. It should not
touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder
portion of the seat belt under your arm. For
this purpose, you can adjust the height of
the seat belt outlet.
RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on
your hips and not across the abdomen. If
the lap belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in
a crash.
RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your clothing,
such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
these might cause injuries.
RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted
snugly. Take special care of this when
wearing loose clothing.
RNever use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
around a person and another person or
other objects at the same time.
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of
the seat belt to distribute impact forces.
The twisted seat belt against your body
could cause injuries.
RPregnant women should also always use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible on
the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
the abdomen.
RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
as upright as possible.
RCheck your seat belt during travel to make
sure it is properly positioned.
RNever place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant
restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
booster seats, always follow the child seat
manufacturer's instructions.
GWARNING
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the seat belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to seat
belts. This could impair the effectiveness of
the seat belts.
Occupant safety 57
Safety
Z
Fastening seat belts
GWARNING
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained on the rear
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
we strongly recommend that children be
placed in the rear seat whenever possible.
Regardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriately sized
child restraint system or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child. For additional information, see the
"Children in the vehicle" section.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
XAdjust the seat and move the backrest to
an almost vertical position (Y page 98).
XPull the seat belt smoothly through belt
sash guide :.
XWithout twisting it, guide the shoulder
section of the seat belt across the middle
of your shoulder and the lap section across
your pelvis.
XEngage belt tongue ; in buckle =.
XIf necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
appropriate height (Y page 58).
XIf necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
across your body.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to
securely fasten child restraint systems in the
vehicle. For further information on special
seat belt retractors, see (Y page 64).
For more information about releasing the seat
belt with release button ?, see "Releasing
seat belts" (Y page 59).
Seat belt adjustment
The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the
driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the
upper body of the occupants.
The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
Ryou engage the belt tongue in the belt
buckle and you then turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock.
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a
retraction force if any slack is detected
between the occupant and the seat belt. Do
not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is
adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt
adjustment on and off in the on-board
computer (Y page 233).
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More
information about PRE-SAFE® can be found
in the "PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
protection system)" section (Y page 54).
Belt height adjustment
You can adjust the seat belt height on the
driver's seat and the front-passenger seat.
58 Occupant safety
Safety
Adjust the height so that the upper part of the
seat belt is routed across the center of your
shoulder.
XTo raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.
The belt sash guide engages in various
positions.
XTo lower: press and hold belt sash guide
release :.
XSlide the belt sash guide downwards.
XRelease belt sash guide release : and
make sure that the belt sash guide has
engaged.
Using the rear center seat belt
If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded
down and back up again, the rear center seat
belt may lock. The seat belt can then not be
pulled out.
XTo release the rear center seat belt: pull
the seat belt out approximately 1 in
(25 mm) at the belt outlet on the backrest
and then release it again.
The seat belt is retracted and released.
Releasing seat belts
XPress release button ? on belt buckle =.
XGuide belt tongue ; to belt sash
guide :.
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue
will be trapped in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This could damage the door,
the door trim panel and the seat belt.
Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill
their protective function and must be
replaced. Visit a qualified specialist
workshop.
Belt warning for the driver and front
passenger
Regardless of whether the driver's and front-
passenger seat belts have already been
fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp
lights up for six seconds each time the engine
is started. It then goes out if the driver and
the front passenger have already fastened
their seat belts.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when
the engine is started, an additional warning
tone will sound. This warning tone stops after
a maximum of six seconds or once the
driver's seat belt is fastened.
Occupant safety 59
Safety
Z
If after six seconds the driver or front
passenger have not fastened their seat belts
and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt
warning lamp lights up:
Runtil the driver's or front passenger's seat
belt is fastened
Rif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is
exceeded, a warning tone also sounds with
increasing intensity for a maximum of
60 seconds or until the driver or front-
passenger seat belt has been fastened.
If the driver/front passenger unfasten their
seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the
7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and a
warning tone sounds again.
The warning tone ceases even if the driver or
front-passenger seat belt has still not been
fastened after 60 seconds. The 7 seat belt
warning lamp stops flashing but remains
illuminated.
After the vehicle comes to a standstill, the
warning tone is reactivated and the 7 seat
belt warning lamp flashes again if the vehicle
speed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goes
out if:
Rboth the driver and the front passenger
have fastened their seat belts.
or
Rthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.
iFor more information on the 7 seat
belt warning lamp, see "Warning and
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,
seat belts" (Y page 261).
Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat
belt force limiters
GWARNING
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices
that have been deployed are no longer
operational and are unable to perform their
intended protective function. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency
Tensioning Devices which have been
triggered immediately replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop.
! If the front-passenger seat is not
occupied, do not engage the seat belt
tongue in the buckle on the front-
passenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency
Tensioning Device could be triggered in the
event of an accident.
iVehicles with PRE-SAFE®: Emergency
Tensioning Devices that are triggered by an
electric motor can be deployed as often as
desired and do not need to be replaced.
The seat belts for the front seats and rear
outer seats are equipped with ETDs and seat
belt force limiters.
The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,
pulling them close against the body.
The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat
positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.
The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back
towards the backrest.
The ETDs can only be activated when:
Rthe ignition is switched on
Rthe restraint systems are operational; see
"SRS warning lamp "(Y page 43)
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
each of the lap-shoulder belts in the front
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied and
the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
the front-passenger side
The ETDs on the outside seats in the rear
compartment are triggered independently of
the lock status of the seat belts.
The Emergency Tensioning Devices are
triggered depending on the type and severity
of an accident, if:
Rin certain situations where the vehicle rolls
over and the system determines that it can
provide additional protection
Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end
collision, the vehicle decelerates or
60 Occupant safety
Safety
accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal
direction during the initial stages of the
impact
Rin the event of a side impact, the vehicle
decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a
lateral direction on the side opposite the
impact
If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang,
and a small amount of powder may also be
released. Only in rare cases will the bang
affect your hearing. The powder that is
released generally does not constitute a
health hazard and does not indicate that there
is a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause
some temporary breathing difficulty for
people with asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out
of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
You can also open the window to allow fresh
air to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS
warning lamp lights up.
If the seat belt is also equipped with a seat
belt force limiter and this is triggered, the
force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle
occupant is reduced.
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats
are synchronized with the front air bags,
which take on a part of the deceleration force.
This results in the force exerted on the
occupant being distributed over a greater
area.
Children in the vehicle
Child restraint systems
Important safety notes
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you always
properly secure all infants and children with
a child or infant seat restraint system for the
trip.
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in:
Rall 50 states
Rthe U.S. territories
Rthe District of Columbia
Rall Canadian provinces
Infants and children must always be seated in
an appropriate infant or child restraint system
recommended for the size and weight of the
child. The infant or child restraint system
must be properly secured in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
All infant or child restraint systems must meet
the following standards:
RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system
corresponds to the standards can be found
on an instruction label on the child restraint
system. This confirmation can also be found
in the installation instructions that are
included with the child restraint system.
Always read and follow the manufacturer's
instructions when using an infant or child
restraint system or booster seat.
Observe all warning signs in the vehicle
interior and on the infant or child restraint.
GWARNING
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
possible. Regardless of seating position,
children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight of
the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should always
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized infant
Children in the vehicle 61
Safety
Z
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when circumstances
require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to deactivate the front
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the system senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropriate
child restraint on the front passenger seat.
RFor children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the front passenger
front air bag may or may not be activated.
Always make sure the 4 5 indicator
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
even with the air bag technology installed
in your vehicle. The only means to
completely eliminate this risk is to never
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
in the front seat. We therefore strongly
recommend that you always place a child
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
RIf you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat
because circumstances require you to do
so, make sure the 4 5 indicator
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Should the 4 5 indicator lamp not
illuminate or go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation.
Periodically check the 4 5 indicator
lamp while driving to make sure the 4
5 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the
4 5 indicator lamp goes out or
remains out, do not transport a child on the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates.
RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
facing child restraint on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
use the proper child restraint
recommended for the age, size and weight
of the child, and secure child restraint with
the vehicle's seat belt according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
GWARNING
If the child restraint system is installed
incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot
protect as intended. The child cannot then be
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or sudden changes of direction. There
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
fatal.
Make sure that you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation
instructions and the notes on use. Please
ensure, that the base of the child restraint
system is always resting completely on the
seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g.
cushions, under or behind the child restraint
system. Only use child restraint systems with
the original cover designed for them. Only
replace damaged covers with genuine covers.
GWARNING
If the child restraint system is installed
incorrectly or is not secured, it can come
loose in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or a sudden change in direction. The
child restraint system could be thrown about,
striking vehicle occupants. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Always install child restraint systems
properly, even if they are not being used.
Make sure that you observe the child restraint
62 Children in the vehicle
Safety
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
GWARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing
systems which have been damaged or
subjected to a load in an accident can no
longer protect as intended. The child cannot
then be restrained in the event of an accident,
heavy braking or sudden changes of direction.
There is an increased risk of injury, possibly
even fatal.
Replace child restraint systems which have
been damaged or subjected to a load in an
accident as soon as possible. Have the
securing systems on the child restraint
system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop, before you install a child restraint
system again.
GWARNING
Infants and small children should never share
a seat belt with another occupant. In the event
of an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Children that are too large for a child restraint
must travel in seats using normal seat belts.
Position the shoulder belt across the chest
and shoulder, not the face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat
belt positioning for children over 41 lbs
(18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/
shoulder belt fits properly without a booster
seat.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove
it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat
belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an
accident.
GWARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
GWARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
GWARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot.
Children may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the
child restraint system has been exposed to
direct sunlight, let it cool down before
securing the child in it. Never leave children
unattended in the vehicle.
Children in the vehicle 63
Safety
Z
If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:
XSecure the child with a child or infant seat
restraint system appropriate to the age and
weight of the child.
XMake sure that the infant or child is
properly secured at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
Special seat belt retractor
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
equipped with a special seat belt retractor.
When activated, the special seat belt
retractor ensures that the seat belt will not
slacken once the child restraint system has
been secured.
Installing a child restraint system:
XAlways comply with the manufacturer's
installation instructions.
XPull the seat belt smoothly from the seat
belt retractor.
XEngage the seat belt tongue in the belt
buckle.
Activating the special seat belt retractor:
XPull the seat belt out fully and let the seat
belt retractor retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat
belt retractor is activated.
XPush down on the child restraint system to
take up any slack.
Removing a child restraint system/
deactivating the special seat belt retractor:
XAlways comply with the manufacturer's
installation instructions.
XPress the seat belt release button and
guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.
The special seat belt retractor is
deactivated.
GWARNING
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt
retractor will be deactivated.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors
in the rear
GWARNING
Children that are too large for a child restraint
must travel in seats using normal seat belts.
Position shoulder belt across the chest and
shoulder, not face or neck.
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where
a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
booster.
Install the child restraint system in
accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
Attach the child restraint system to both
securing rings.
An incorrectly installed child restraint system
could come loose during an accident and
seriously or even fatally injure the child.
Child restraint systems or child seat securing
rings that are malfunctioning or damaged as
the result of a collision must be replaced.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardized
securing system for specially designed child
restraint systems on the rear seats. Securing
rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint systems are installed on the left and
right of the rear seats.
Secure non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint systems using the vehicle's seat belt
system. When installing child restraint
systems, you must observe the
manufacturer's installation instructions.
! When installing the child restraint system,
make sure that the seat belt for the middle
seat does not get trapped. The seat belt
could otherwise be damaged.
64 Children in the vehicle
Safety
Installation instructions : indicate the
installation location of securing rings 2.
XInstall the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system. Comply with the
manufacturer's instructions when
installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system.
Top Tether
GWARNING
Always lock the rear seat backrests in their
upright position when the rear seats are
occupied by passengers. Lock the rear seat
backrests in their upright position before
installing the Top Tether straps or when the
cargo compartment is not in use. Make sure
that rear seat backrests are secured properly
by pushing and pulling on the seat backrests.
If the seat backrest is not locked properly, the
seat backrest could fold forward. The child
restraint system is no longer supported
properly or held in position and can no longer
fulfill its function. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries.
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between a child restraint system, secured
with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount,
and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk
of injury even further.
The Top Tether anchorages are located on the
rear side of the rear seat backrests.
XMove head restraint : upwards.
XInstall the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system with Top Tether. Comply
with the manufacturer's installation
instructions when doing so.
XRoute Top Tether belt A under head
restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
XGuide Top Tether belt A downwards
between cargo compartment cover ; and
rear seat backrest.
XHook Top Tether hook ? of Top Tether belt
A into Top Tether anchorage =.
Make sure that:
RTop Tether hook ? is hooked into Top
Tether anchorage = as shown.
RTop Tether belt A is not twisted.
RTop Tether belt A is routed between the
rear seat backrest and cargo
Children in the vehicle 65
Safety
Z
compartment cover ; if cargo
compartment cover ; is installed.
RTop Tether belt A is routed between the
rear seat backrest and the cargo net if
the cargo net is installed.
XTension Top Tether belt A. Comply with
the manufacturer's installation
instructions when doing so.
XMove head restraint : back down again
slightly if necessary (Y page 102). Make
sure that you do not interfere with the
correct routing of Top Tether belt A.
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes
GWARNING
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. The children
could:
Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
vehicle equipment that can be operated
even if the SmartKey is removed from the
ignition lock or removed from the vehicle,
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
adjustment, or the memory function
If children open a door, they could injure other
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
themselves or be injured by following traffic.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system's
metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned on these
parts.
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
GWARNING
Children could open a rear door from inside
the vehicle. This could result in serious
injuries or an accident. Therefore, when
children ride in the rear always secure the rear
doors with the child-proof locks.
You secure each door individually with the
child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door
secured with a child-proof lock cannot be
opened from inside the vehicle. When the
vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened
from the outside.
XTo activate: press the child-proof lock
lever up in the direction of arrow :.
XMake sure that the child-proof locks are
working properly.
XTo deactivate: press the child-proof lock
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
Override feature for the rear side
windows
GWARNING
When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,
activate the override switch. Otherwise, the
children could be injured, e.g. by trapping
themselves in the rear side window.
66 Children in the vehicle
Safety
XTo activate/deactivate: press button ;.
If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the
rear side windows is disabled. Operation is
only possible using the switches in the
driver's door. If indicator lamp : is off,
operation is possible using the switches in
the rear compartment.
Driving safety systems
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
RBAS (Brake Assist System)
RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus)
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
RPRE-SAFE® Brake
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style or
become distracted, the driving safety
systems can neither reduce the risk of
accident nor override the laws of physics.
Driving safety systems are merely aids
designed to assist driving. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed and for braking in
good time. Always adapt your driving style to
suit the prevailing road, weather and traffic
conditions and maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
iThe driving safety systems described only
work as effectively as possible when there
is adequate contact between the tires and
the road surface. Please pay special
attention to the notes on tires,
recommended minimum tire tread depths,
etc. (Y page 330).
In wintry driving conditions, always use
winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,
snow chains. Only in this way will the
driving safety systems described in this
section work as effectively as possible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
General information
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
This allows you to continue steering the
vehicle when braking.
The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition
is switched on. It goes out when the engine is
running.
Important safety notes
iObserve the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 67).
GWARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking
characteristics may be severely impaired.
Additionally, further driving safety systems
are deactivated. There is an increased danger
of skidding and accidents.
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked
immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
including driving safety systems, will also
become inoperative. Observe the information
Driving safety systems 67
Safety
Z
on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 263) and
display messages which may be shown in the
instrument cluster (Y page 236).
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface
conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces,
even if you only brake gently.
Braking
XIf ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
brake pedal vigorously until the braking
situation is over.
XTo make a full brake application:
depress the brake pedal with full force.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel
a pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an
indication of hazardous road conditions, and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
General information
BAS operates in emergency braking
situations. If you depress the brake pedal
quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking
force, thus shortening the stopping distance.
Important safety notes
iObserve the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 67).
GWARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is
increased. There is a risk of an accident.
In an emergency braking situation, depress
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
the wheels from locking.
Braking
XKeep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
PLUS)
General information
iObserve the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 67).
BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles
equipped with DISTRONIC PLUS.
For BAS PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor
system must be operational.
With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS
PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the
path of your vehicle for an extended period of
time.
If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning,
BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake
system is still available with complete brake
boosting effect and BAS.
BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk
of a collision with a vehicle or reduce the
effects of such a collision. If BAS PLUS
detects a danger of collision, you are assisted
when braking.
Important safety notes
GWARNING
BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify
objects and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, BAS PLUS may:
Rintervene unnecessarily
Rnot intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
68 Driving safety systems
Safety
GWARNING
BAS PLUS does not react:
Rto people or animals
Rto oncoming vehicles
Rto crossing traffic
Rwhen cornering
As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all
critical situations. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the
recognition can be impaired.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is
also impaired in the event of:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rinterference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
example in parking garages
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
relative to the center of your vehicle
Following damage to the front end of the
vehicle, have the configuration and operation
of the radar sensors checked at a qualified
specialist workshop. This also applies to
collisions at low speeds where there is no
visible damage to the front of the vehicle.
Function
To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the
brake force necessary if:
Ryou approach an obstacle, and
RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision
When driving at a speed under 20 mph
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,
BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake
pressure will be carried out at the last
possible moment.
When driving at a speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal
sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the
brake pressure to a value adapted to the
traffic situation.
BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in
hazardous situations with vehicles in front
within a speed range between 4 mph
(7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h).
At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph
(70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also react to
stationary objects. Examples of stationary
objects are stopped or parked vehicles.
iIf BAS PLUS demands particularly high
braking force, preventative passenger
protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are
activated simultaneously.
XKeep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes
function as usual again, if:
Ryou release the brake pedal
Rthere is no longer a risk of collision
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
vehicle
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
iObserve the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 67).
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,
i.e. power transmission between the tires and
the road surface.
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating
from the direction desired by the driver, one
or more wheels are braked to stabilize the
vehicle. The engine output is also modified to
keep the vehicle on the desired course within
physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when
pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®
can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.
Driving safety systems 69
Safety
Z
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
iObserve the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 67).
ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.
Traction control brakes the drive wheels
individually if they spin. This enables you to
pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces,
for example if the road surface is slippery on
one side. In addition, more drive torque is
transferred to the wheel or wheels with
traction.
Traction control remains active, even if you
deactivate ESP®.
Important safety notes
iObserve the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 67).
GWARNING
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further
driving safety systems are deactivated. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
! When testing the electric parking brake
on a braking dynamometer, switch off the
ignition. Application of the brakes by
ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake
system.
Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the notes
on ESP®(Y page 324) when towing the
vehicle with a raised rear axle.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or
performance tests may only be carried out
on a 2-axle dynamometer. Before you
operate the vehicle on such a
dynamometer, please consult a qualified
workshop. You could otherwise damage
the drive train or the brake system.
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
in the instrument cluster lights up
continuously when the engine is running.
If the ÷ warning lamp and the å
warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not
available due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 265) and display messages which
may be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 236).
iOnly use wheels with the recommended
tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function
properly.
Characteristics of ESP
General information
If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before
beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically
active.
If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
If ESP® intervenes:
XDo not deactivate ESP® under any
circumstances.
XOnly depress the accelerator pedal as far
as necessary when pulling away.
XAdapt your driving style to suit the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
ECO start/stop function
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically when the vehicle
stops moving. The engine starts
automatically when the driver wants to pull
away again. ESP® remains in its previously
selected status. Example: if ESP® was
deactivated before the engine was switched
off, ESP® remains deactivated when the
engine is switched on again.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
Important safety notes
iObserve the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 67).
70 Driving safety systems
Safety
You can select between the following
statuses of ESP:
RESP® is activated.
RESP® is deactivated.
GWARNING
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer
stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased
risk of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations
described in the following.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the
following situations:
Rwhen using snow chains
Rin deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
iActivate ESP® as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP® will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the
vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a
wheel starts to spin.
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP® deactivated.
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
XTo switch off: press button :.
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
XTo switch on: press button :.
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
the instrument cluster flashes. In such
situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP®:
RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
Rengine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a
cutting action for better traction on loose
surfaces.
Rtraction control is still activated.
RESP® still provides support when you
brake.
ESP® trailer stabilization
GWARNING
If road and weather conditions are poor,
trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent
the vehicle/trailer combination from
swerving. Trailers with a high center of gravity
can tip over before ESP® can detect this.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always adapt your driving style to the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer
combination) begins to lurch, you can only
stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination by
depressing the brake firmly.
In this situation, ESP® assists you and can
detect if the vehicle/trailer combination
begins to lurch. ESP® slows the vehicle down
by braking and limiting the engine output until
the vehicle/trailer combination has
stabilized.
Trailer stabilization is active above speeds of
about 40 mph (65 km/h).
Trailer stabilization does not work if ESP® is
deactivated because of a malfunction.
Driving safety systems 71
Safety
Z
EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
General information
EBD monitors and controls the brake
pressure on the rear wheels to improve
driving stability while braking.
Important safety notes
iObserve the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 67).
GWARNING
If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can
still lock, e.g. under full braking. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
to the different handling characteristics. Have
the brake system checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Observe information regarding indicator and
warning lamps (Y page 263) as well as
display messages (Y page 237).
PRE-SAFE® Brake
General information
iObserve the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 67).
PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
with DISTRONIC PLUS.
For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when
driving, the radar sensor system must be
operational.
With the help of the radar sensor system,
PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that
are in front of your vehicle for an extended
period of time.
PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize
the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead, and
reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-
SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision,
you will be warned visually and acoustically
as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE®
Brake cannot prevent a collision without your
intervention.
Important safety notes
GWARNING
PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your
vehicle by a partial application of the brakes
if a danger of collision is detected. There may
be a collision unless you also brake.
Automatic emergency braking cannot prevent
a collision. There is a risk of an accident.
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
take evasive action.
GWARNING
PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic
conditions.
In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
Rnot give a warning or intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake, especially if
PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
In order to maintain the appropriate distance
to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a
collision, you must apply the brakes yourself.
GWARNING
PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:
Rto people or animals
Rto oncoming vehicles
Rto crossing traffic
Rwhen cornering
As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither
give warnings nor intervene in all critical
situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
72 Driving safety systems
Safety
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the
recognition can be impaired.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is
also impaired in the event of:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rinterference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
example in parking garages
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
relative to the center of your vehicle
Following damage to the front end of the
vehicle, have the configuration and operation
of the radar sensors checked at a qualified
specialist workshop. This also applies to
collisions at low speeds where there is no
visible damage to the front of the vehicle.
Function
XTo activate/deactivate: activate or
deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-
board computer (Y page 229).
If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the
æ symbol appears in the multifunction
display.
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph
(7 km/h), this function warns you if you
rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An
intermittent warning tone will then sound and
the · distance warning lamp will light up
in the instrument cluster.
XBrake immediately to defuse the situation.
or
XTake evasive action provided it is safe to do
so.
PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle
automatically under the following conditions:
Rthe driver and front-passenger have their
seat belts fastened
and
Rthe vehicle speed is between
approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) and
124 mph (200 km/h)
At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph
(70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect
stationary objects. Examples of stationary
objects are stopped or parked vehicles.
iIf there is an increased risk of collision,
preventive passenger protection measures
(PRE-SAFE®) are activated.
If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front
remains and you do not brake, take evasive
action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle
may perform automatic emergency braking,
up to the point of full brake application.
Automatic emergency braking is not
performed until immediately prior to an
imminent accident.
You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-
SAFE® Brake at any time by:
Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.
Ractivating kickdown.
Rreleasing the brake pedal.
The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is
ended automatically if:
Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end
collision.
Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in
front of your vehicle.
Theft deterrent locking system
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct SmartKey.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The
engine can be started by anyone with a valid
SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
Theft deterrent locking system 73
Safety
Z
XTo activate with the SmartKey: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
XTo activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the
ignition off and open the driver's door.
XTo deactivate: switch on the ignition.
iThe immobilizer is always deactivated
when you start the engine.
In the event that the engine cannot be
started when the starter battery is fully
charged, the immobilizer may be faulty.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
Ra door
Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
Rthe tailgate
Rthe hood
The alarm is not switched off, even if you
close the open door that triggered it, for
example.
iIf the alarm continues for more than
30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call
system automatically notifies the
Customer Assistance Center. This is done
either by text message or data connection.
The emergency call system sends the
message or data provided that:
Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace
service.
Rthe mbrace service has been activated
properly.
Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
available.
XTo arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm
system is armed after approximately
15 seconds.
XTo disarm: unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
XTo stop the alarm using the SmartKey:
insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The alarm is switched off.
or
XPress the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
The alarm is switched off.
XTo stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The
SmartKey must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
or
XPress the Start/Stop button on the
dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside
the vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
74 Theft deterrent locking system
Safety
Useful information .............................. 76
SmartKey ............................................. 76
Doors .................................................... 81
Cargo compartment ............................ 84
Side windows ...................................... 88
Sliding sunroof .................................... 92
75
Opening and closing
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 27).
SmartKey
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
GWARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
GWARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be
unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This
could cause the engine to be switched off.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to
the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings
before inserting the SmartKey into the
ignition lock.
! Keep the SmartKey away from strong
magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote
control function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:
-with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
phone or another SmartKey
-with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
foil
-inside metallic objects e.g. a metal case
This can affect the functionality of the
SmartKey.
SmartKey functions
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
Rthe doors
Rthe tailgate
Rthe fuel filler flap
76 SmartKey
Opening and closing
:& To lock the vehicle
;F To open/close the tailgate
=% To unlock the vehicle
The turn signals flash once when unlocking
and three times when locking.
When it is dark, the surround lighting also
comes on if it is activated in the on-board
computer (Y page 231).
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
signal can be activated and deactivated using
the on-board computer (Y page 233).
XTo unlock centrally: press the %
button.
If you do not open the vehicle within
approximately 40 seconds of unlocking:
Rthe vehicle is locked again.
Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armed
again.
XTo lock centrally: press the & button.
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started
by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a
KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle.
Locking/unlocking centrally
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry
the SmartKey with you. You can combine the
functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a
conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle
by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock
it using the & button on the SmartKey.
When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,
the distance between the key and the
corresponding door handle must not be
greater than 3 ft (1 m).
KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid
SmartKey is in the vehicle by periodically
establishing a radio connection between the
vehicle and the SmartKey. This happens:
Rwhen the external door handles are
touched
Rwhen starting the engine
Rwhile the vehicle is in motion
X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner
surface of the door handle.
XTo lock the vehicle: touch sensor
surface :.
XConvenience closing feature: touch
recessed sensor surface ; for an
extended period.
Further information on the convenience
closing feature (Y page 91).
If you pull on the handle of the tailgate, only
the cargo compartment of the vehicle is
unlocked.
Changing the settings of the locking
system
You can change the settings of the locking
system. This means that only the driver's door
SmartKey 77
Opening and closing
Z
and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the
vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you
frequently travel on your own.
XTo change the setting: press and hold
down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six
seconds until the battery check lamp
(Y page 79) flashes twice.
iIf the setting of the locking system is
changed within the signal range of the
vehicle, pressing the & or % button:
Rlocks or
Runlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
XTo unlock the driver's door: press the
% button once.
XTo unlock centrally: press the %
button twice.
XTo lock centrally: press the & button.
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as
follows:
XTo unlock the driver's door: touch the
inner surface of the door handle on the
driver's door.
XTo unlock centrally: touch the inner
surface of the door handle on the front-
passenger door or the rear door.
XTo lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles
(Y page 77).
XTo restore the factory settings: press
and hold down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six
seconds until the battery check lamp
flashes twice.
Mechanical key
General notes
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
unlocked with the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-
GO key, use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered (Y page 74).
XTo end the alarm: insert the SmartKey into
the ignition lock.
iWith KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/
Stop button from the ignition lock
beforehand.
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked
automatically.
Removing the mechanical key
XPush release catch : in the direction of
the arrow and at the same time remove
mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
SmartKey battery
Important safety notes
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
GWARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive
substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can
result in severe health problems. There is a
risk of fatal injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
78 SmartKey
Opening and closing
Checking the battery
XPress the & or % button.
The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
If battery check lamp : does not light up
briefly during the test, the battery is
discharged.
iIf the SmartKey battery is checked within
the signal reception range of the vehicle,
pressing the & or % button:
Rlocks or
Runlocks the vehicle
XChange the battery (Y page 79).
iYou can get a battery at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Replacing the battery
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
XTake the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (Y page 78).
XPress mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
opening in the direction of the arrow until
battery compartment cover : opens. Do
not hold battery compartment cover :
closed while doing so.
XRemove battery compartment cover :.
XRepeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
XInsert the new battery with the positive
terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free
cloth to do so.
XMake sure that the surface of the battery is
free from lint, grease and all other forms of
contamination.
XInsert the front tabs of battery
compartment cover : into the housing
first and then press to close it.
XInsert mechanical key ; into the
SmartKey.
XCheck the function of all SmartKey buttons
on the vehicle.
SmartKey 79
Opening and closing
Z
Problems with the SmartKey
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You cannot lock or
unlock the vehicle
using the SmartKey.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
XTry again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the
driver's door handle from close range and press the % or
& button.
If this does not work:
XCheck the SmartKey battery (Y page 79) and replace it if
necessary (Y page 79).
XLock (Y page 83) or unlock (Y page 83) the vehicle using
the mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.
XLock (Y page 83) or unlock (Y page 83) the vehicle using
the mechanical key.
XHave the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock
or unlock the vehicle
using KEYLESS-GO.
KEYLESS-GO is in standby mode because the vehicle has not been
unlocked for a long time.
XPull the door handle and then turn the SmartKey to position 2
in the ignition lock.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
XLock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the % or & button.
There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO.
XLock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the % or & button.
XHave KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
If this does not work:
XCheck the SmartKey battery (Y page 79) and replace it if
necessary (Y page 79).
XLock (Y page 83) or unlock (Y page 83) the vehicle using
the mechanical key.
You have lost a
SmartKey.
XHave the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist
workshop.
XReport the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
XIf necessary, have the locks changed as well.
80 SmartKey
Opening and closing
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You have lost the
mechanical key.
XReport the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
XIf necessary, have the locks changed as well.
The engine cannot be
started using the
SmartKey.
The on-board voltage is too low.
XSwitch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
XCheck the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 316).
or
XJump-start the vehicle (Y page 320).
or
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be
started using KEYLESS-
GO. The SmartKey is in
the vehicle.
A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected as
easily.
XClose the door and try to start the vehicle again.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
XStart your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Doors
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
GWARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
You should preferably place luggage or loads
in the cargo compartment. Observe the
loading guidelines (Y page 274).
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can only open
the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they
Doors 81
Opening and closing
Z
are not secured by the child-proof locks
(Y page 66).
Only open the door when the traffic situation
permits.
If the vehicle has been locked with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a
door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system. Switch off the alarm
(Y page 74).
XTo unlock a front door: pull door
handle ;.
Locking knob : pops up.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
XTo open a front door: pull door
handle ;.
XTo unlock a rear door: pull up locking
knob :.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
XTo open a rear door: pull door handle ;.
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
from the inside.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from
the inside if the vehicle has been locked with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
XTo unlock: press button :.
XTo lock: press button ;.
If the front-passenger door is closed, the
vehicle locks.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be
locked or unlocked.
Only open the door when the traffic situation
permits.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening the
vehicle from the inside will activate the anti-
theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm
(Y page 74).
If the vehicle has been locked using the
locking button for the central locking, or has
been locked automatically, and a door is
opened from the inside:
Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had
previously been fully unlocked
Ronly the door which has been opened form
the inside is unlocked if only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked
If the vehicle has been locked centrally with
the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it is not
unlocked when the release button for the
central locking is used.
Automatic locking feature
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the vehicle's
wheels are turning at a speed in excess of
9 mph (15 km/h).
82 Doors
Opening and closing
You could therefore be locked out if:
Rthe vehicle is being pushed.
Rthe vehicle is being towed.
Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.
XTo deactivate: press and hold button :
for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
XTo activate: press and hold button ; for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
iIf you press one of the two buttons and
do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has
already been selected.
You can also switch the automatic locking
function on and off using the on-board
computer (Y page 232).
Unlocking the driver's door
(mechanical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered (Y page 74).
XTake the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (Y page 78).
XInsert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
XTurn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
to position 1.
The door is unlocked.
XTurn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
XInsert the mechanical key into the
SmartKey.
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
XOpen the driver's door.
XClose the front-passenger door, the rear
doors and the tailgate.
XPress the locking button (Y page 82).
XCheck whether the locking knobs on the
front-passenger door and the rear doors
are still visible. Press down the locking
knobs manually, if necessary (Y page 81).
XClose the driver's door.
XTake the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (Y page 78).
XInsert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
Doors 83
Opening and closing
Z
XTurn the mechanical key clockwise as far
as it will go to position 1.
XTurn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
XMake sure that the doors and the tailgate
are locked.
XInsert the mechanical key into the
SmartKey.
iIf you lock the vehicle as described above,
the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-
theft alarm system is not armed.
Cargo compartment
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
GWARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running,
particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust
fumes could enter the passenger
compartment. There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the
tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
iTailgate opening dimensions
(Y page 375).
You should preferably place luggage or loads
in the cargo compartment. Observe the
loading guidelines (Y page 274).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo
compartment. You could otherwise lock
yourself out.
Vehicles without the EASY-PACK
tailgate: the tailgate can be:
Ropened and closed manually from outside
Runlocked from inside with the mechanical
key
For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate
you can:
Ropen and close the tailgate manually from
outside
Ropen and close the tailgate automatically
from outside
Ropen and close the tailgate automatically
from inside
Rlimit the opening angle of the tailgate
Runlock the tailgate from inside with the
mechanical key
Tailgate reversing feature
The tailgate is equipped with an automatic
reversing feature. It reacts if a solid object
obstructs or restricts the tailgate during the
closing procedure. The tailgate opens again
automatically. The automatic reversing
feature is however only an aid and is not a
substitute for your attentiveness when
closing the cargo compartment.
GWARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers
Rover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing
movement
84 Cargo compartment
Opening and closing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or
Rpress the remote operating switch on the
driver’s door, or
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
tailgate, or
Rpull the handle on the tailgate
Opening/closing from outside
Opening
XPress the % button on the SmartKey.
XPull handle :.
XRaise the tailgate.
Vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate: if
you pull handle : and keep it in this position,
you can open the tailgate manually. If you
release the handle, the tailgate opens
automatically.
Closing
XPull the tailgate down using recess :.
XPush the tailgate closed from outside the
vehicle.
XIf necessary, lock the vehicle with
the & button on the SmartKey
(Y page 76) or with KEYLESS-GO
(Y page 77).
iIf a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the
cargo compartment, the tailgate will not
lock.
Opening/closing automatically from
outside
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped
during automatic closing of the tailgate.
Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be
standing in the closing area or may enter the
closing area during the closing process. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
Rpress the remote operating switch on the
driver's door.
Cargo compartment 85
Opening and closing
Z
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
tailgate.
Rpull the handle on the tailgate.
GWARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running,
particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust
fumes could enter the passenger
compartment. There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the
tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
iTailgate opening dimensions
(Y page 375).
Opening
You can open the tailgate automatically with
the SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate.
Open or close the tailgate fully using the
automatic door function if you have stopped
the tailgate in an intermediate position.
XPress and hold the F button on the
SmartKey until the tailgate opens.
or
XIf the tailgate is unlocked, pull the handle
and let it go again immediately.
iYou can also close the tailgate manually
if it is fully opened.
! If you have opened the tailgate
automatically, you should wait a moment
before closing the tailgate manually.
Closing
GWARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped
during automatic closing of the tailgate.
Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be
standing in the closing area or may enter the
closing area during the closing process. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
Rpress the remote operating switch on the
driver's door.
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
tailgate.
Rpull the handle on the tailgate.
You can close the tailgate automatically using
the SmartKey, the closing button2 or the
locking button3.
Closing and locking button (example: vehicle with
EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO)
XTo close: press closing button : on the
tailgate.
or
XPress and hold the F button on the
SmartKey until the tailgate closes.
XTo close and lock simultaneously:
Press locking button ; on the tailgate.
2For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate only.
3For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO only.
86 Cargo compartment
Opening and closing
iThe tailgate can only be opened and
closed with the SmartKey if it is not in the
ignition lock.
If the tailgate touches an object while
closing, the closing procedure is
interrupted and the tailgate reopens.
iIf you leave a KEYLESS-GO key in the
cargo compartment, the tailgate will not
lock.
The tailgate is not closed unless a
KEYLESS-GO key is detected.
Opening/closing automatically from
inside
GWARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped
during automatic closing of the tailgate.
Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be
standing in the closing area or may enter the
closing area during the closing process. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
Rpress the remote operating switch on the
driver's door.
Rpress the closing or locking button on the
tailgate.
Rpull the handle on the tailgate.
GWARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running,
particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust
fumes could enter the passenger
compartment. There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the
tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
iTailgate opening dimensions
(Y page 375).
You can open and close the tailgate from the
driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary
and unlocked.
XTo open: pull remote operating switch :
for the tailgate until the tailgate opens.
XTo close: turn the SmartKey to position 1
or 2 in the ignition lock.
XPress remote operating switch for
tailgate : until the tailgate is closed.
You hear a tone during the closing
procedure.
Limiting the opening angle of the
tailgate
Important safety notes
You can limit the opening angle of the
tailgate. This is possible in the top half of its
opening range, up to approximately 8 in
(20 cm) before the stop.
This could be useful, for example, if there is
insufficient space above the tailgate.
! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to
open the tailgate fully when setting the
opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise
be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle
outside.
Cargo compartment 87
Opening and closing
Z
Activating
XTo open the tailgate: pull the handle on
the tailgate.
XTo stop the opening procedure at the
desired position: press the closing button
(Y page 85) in the tailgate or pull the handle
on the outside of the tailgate again.
XTo store the position: press and hold the
closing button in the tailgate until you hear
a short tone.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The
tailgate will now stop in the stored position
when opening.
iTo open the tailgate fully, pull the handle
on the outside of the tailgate again after it
has stopped automatically. This does not
delete the stored position.
Deactivating
XPress and hold the closing button
(Y page 85) in the tailgate until you hear
two short tones.
Tailgate emergency release
Important safety notes
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
If the tailgate can no longer be opened from
outside the vehicle, use the emergency
release on the inside of the tailgate.
iTailgate opening dimensions
(Y page 375).
Opening
XTake the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (Y page 78).
XInsert mechanical key ; into the opening
in paneling :.
XTurn mechanical key ;90° clockwise.
XPush mechanical key ; in the direction of
the arrow and open the tailgate.
iWhen you lock the vehicle (Y page 83),
the cargo compartment is also locked.
Side windows
Important safety notes
GWARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
could become trapped between the side
window and the door frame as the side
window moves. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side
window during the opening procedure. If
somebody becomes trapped, release the
switch or pull the switch to close the side
window again.
GWARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
in the closing area could become trapped.
There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
somebody becomes trapped, release the
88 Side windows
Opening and closing
switch or press the switch down to open the
side window again.
GWARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in
the vehicle.
GWARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Side window reversing feature
The side windows are equipped with an
automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
blocks or restricts a side window during the
closing process, the side window opens again
automatically. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
attention when closing a side window.
GWARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers
Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing
movement
Rduring resetting
Rwhen closing the side window again
manually immediately after automatic
reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
someone becomes trapped, press the switch
to open the side window again.
Opening and closing the side
windows
:Front left
;Front right
=Rear right
?Rear left
The switches for all side windows are located
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on
each door for the corresponding side window.
The switches on the driver's door take
precedence.
iThe side windows cannot be operated
from the rear when the override feature for
the side windows is activated (Y page 66).
Side windows 89
Opening and closing
Z
XTurn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
XTo open: press the corresponding switch.
XTo close: pull the corresponding switch.
iIf you press the switch beyond the point
of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing process is started in the
corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by operating the
switch again.
iYou can continue to operate the side
windows after you switch off the engine or
remove the SmartKey. This function is
available for up to five minutes or until the
driver's or front-passenger door is opened.
Convenience opening
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start
driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to
carry out the following functions
simultaneously:
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen the side windows
Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel and the roller sunblinds
iThe convenience opening feature can
only be operated using the SmartKey. The
SmartKey must be close to the driver's
door handle.
XPoint the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle.
XPress and hold the % button until the
side windows and the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel are in the desired
position.
If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the
roller sunblinds are opened first.
XPress and hold the % button again until
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is in the desired position.
XTo interrupt convenience opening:
release the % button.
Convenience closing feature
General notes
When you lock the vehicle, you can
simultaneously:
Rclose the side windows
Rclose the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the
roller sunblinds.
GWARNING
When the convenience closing feature is
operating, parts of the body could become
trapped in the closing area of the side window
and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of
injury.
Observe the complete closing procedure
when the convenience closing feature is
operating. Make sure that no body parts are
in close proximity during the closing
procedure.
Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:
With the SmartKey:
Rrelease the & button.
Rpress and hold the % button until the
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel open again.
Using KEYLESS-GO:
Rrelease the sensor surface on the door
handle.
Rpull the door handle immediately and hold
it.
90 Side windows
Opening and closing
The side windows and the sliding sunroof
or the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel open.
Using the SmartKey
iThe SmartKey must be close to the
driver's door handle.
XPoint the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle.
XPress and hold the & button until the
side windows and the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
XMake sure that all the side windows and the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel are closed.
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel:
XPress and hold the & button again until
the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel close.
XTo interrupt convenience closing:
release the & button.
Using KEYLESS-GO
The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the
vehicle. All the doors must be closed.
XTouch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows and the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel are fully closed.
iMake sure you only touch recessed
sensor surface :.
XMake sure that all the side windows and the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel are closed.
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel:
XTouch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle again until the roller sunblinds
of the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel close.
XTo interrupt convenience closing:
release recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle.
Resetting the side windows
You must reset each side window if a side
window can no longer be closed fully.
XClose all the doors.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
XPull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is
completely closed (Y page 89).
XHold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:
XImmediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side
window is completely closed (Y page 89).
XHold the switch for an additional second.
XIf the corresponding side window remains
closed after the button has been released,
the side window has been reset correctly.
If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
Side windows 91
Opening and closing
Z
Problems with the side windows
Problem: a side window cannot be closed
because it is blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window guide.
XRemove the objects.
XClose the side window.
Problem: a side window cannot be closed
and you cannot see the cause.
GWARNING
If you close a side window again immediately
after it has been blocked or reset, the side
window closes with increased or maximum
force. The reversing feature is then not active.
Parts of the body could be trapped in the
closing area in the process. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the
closing area. To stop the closing process,
release the switch or push the switch again to
reopen the side window.
If a side window is obstructed during closing
and reopens again slightly:
XImmediately after the window blocks, pull
the corresponding switch again until the
side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased
force.
If a side window is obstructed again during
closing and reopens again slightly:
XImmediately after the window blocks, pull
the corresponding switch again until the
side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the anti-
entrapment feature.
Sliding sunroof
Important safety notes
In the following section, the term "sliding
sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel.
GWARNING
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof,
body parts in close proximity could become
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the opening and closing
procedures.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be
stopped.
GWARNING
If children operate the sliding sunroof they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free
of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions
may occur.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could
be damaged.
! The weather can change abruptly. It could
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the
sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the
vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be
damaged if water enters the vehicle
interior.
iResonance noises can occur in addition
to the usual airflow noises when the sliding
sunroof is open. They are caused by minor
pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
Change the position of the sliding sunroof
or open a side window slightly to reduce or
eliminate these noises.
92 Sliding sunroof
Opening and closing
Sliding sunroof reversing feature
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an
automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during
the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens
again automatically. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
attention when closing the sliding sunroof.
GWARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers
Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing
movement
Rduring resetting
Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again
manually immediately after automatic
reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The closing process is stopped.
Operating the sliding sunroof
Overhead control panel
:To raise
;To open
=To close/lower
The sliding sunroof can only be operated
when the roller sunblinds are open.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
XPress or pull the 3 switch in the
corresponding direction.
iIf you press the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing process is started in the
corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by operating the
switch again.
The automatic raising feature is available
only when the sliding sunroof is closed.
Operating the roller sunblinds for the
sliding sunroof
General notes
The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior
from sunlight. The two roller sunblinds can
only be opened and closed together when the
sliding sunroof is closed.
GWARNING
When opening or closing the roller sunblind,
parts of the body could be trapped between
Sliding sunroof 93
Opening and closing
Z
the roller sunblind and the frame or sliding
sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing make sure that no
parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller
sunblind.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be
stopped.
Roller sunblind reversing feature
The roller sunblinds are equipped with an
automatic reversing feature. If an object
blocks or restricts the roller sunblind during
the closing process, the roller sunblind opens
again automatically. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
attention when closing the roller sunblinds.
GWARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers
Rwhen closing the roller sunblind again
manually immediately after automatic
reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The closing process is stopped.
Opening and closing
Overhead control panel
:To open
;To open
=To close
XTurn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
XPress or pull the 3 switch in the
corresponding direction.
iIf you press the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing process is started in the
corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by operating the
switch again.
Resetting the sliding sunroof and the
roller sunblinds
Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller
sunblinds if the sliding sunroof or the roller
sunblinds do not move smoothly.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
XPress the 3 button to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow ; until
the sliding sunroof is open approximately
4 in (10 cm).
XPull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow =
until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.
XKeep the 3 switch pulled for an
additional second.
94 Sliding sunroof
Opening and closing
XPress the 3 button to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow ; until
the roller sunblinds are open approximately
4 in (10 cm).
XPull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow =
until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.
XKeep the 3 switch pulled for an
additional second.
XMake sure that the sliding sunroof and the
roller sunblinds can be fully opened and
closed again (Y page 93).
XIf this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
! If the sliding sunroof and the roller
sunblinds cannot be fully opened or closed
after resetting, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Problems with the sliding sunroof
Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed
and you cannot see the cause.
GWARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again
immediately after it has been blocked or
reset, the sliding sunroof closes with
increased or maximum force. The reversing
feature is then not active. Parts of the body
could be trapped in the closing area in the
process. This poses an increased risk of injury
or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the
closing area.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The closing process is stopped.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during
closing and reopens again slightly:
XImmediately after the sliding sunroof
blocks, pull the 3 switch in the
overhead control panel down to the point
of resistance and hold it until the sliding
sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased
force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again
during closing and then reopens slightly:
XImmediately after the sliding sunroof
blocks, pull the 3 switch in the
overhead control panel down to the point
of resistance and hold it until the sliding
sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the
anti-entrapment feature.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be
opened or closed as a result of a
malfunction, contact a qualified specialist
workshop.
Sliding sunroof 95
Opening and closing
Z
96
Useful information .............................. 98
Correct driver's seat position ............ 98
Seats .................................................... 99
Steering wheel .................................. 104
Mirrors ............................................... 106
Memory function .............................. 109
97
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 27).
Correct driver's seat position
XObserve the safety guidelines on seat
adjustment (Y page 99).
XMake sure that seat = is adjusted
properly.
Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 100)
When adjusting the seat, make sure that:
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag
as possible.
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.
Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.
Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost
vertical position.
Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that
your thighs are gently supported.
Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
XCheck whether the head restraint is
adjusted properly.
When doing so, make sure that you have
adjusted the head restraint so that the back
of your head is supported at eye level by
the center of the head restraint.
XObserve the safety guidelines on steering
wheel adjustment (Y page 104).
XMake sure that steering wheel : is
adjusted properly.
Adjusting the steering wheel manually
(Y page 104)
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
(Y page 105)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the
instrument cluster clearly.
XObserve the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 56).
XCheck whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 58).
The seat belt should:
Rfit snugly across your body
Rbe routed across the middle of your
shoulder
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip
joints
XBefore starting off, adjust the rear-view
mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a
way that you have a good view of road and
traffic conditions (Y page 106).
XVehicles with a memory function: save
the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror
98 Correct driver's seat position
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
settings with the memory function
(Y page 109).
Seats
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
GWARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
GWARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured. Children in particular could
accidentally press the electrical seat
adjustment buttons and become trapped.
There is a risk of injury.
While moving the seats, make sure that your
hands or other body parts do not get under
the lever assembly of the seat adjustment
system.
GWARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
GWARNING
If head restraints are not installed and
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide
protection as intended. There is an increased
risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.
in the event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints
installed. Before driving off, make sure for
every vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at about eye level.
GWARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if the backrest is not in the
upright position. When braking or in the event
of an accident, you could slide underneath the
seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck
injuries, for example. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always make sure that the seat
is in the upright position.
GWARNING
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained on the rear
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
we strongly recommend that children be
placed in the rear seat whenever possible.
Regardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriately sized
child restraint system or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child. For additional information, see the
"Children in the vehicle" section.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Seats 99
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
heating, observe the following information:
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat
heating should also not be used to dry
the seats.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
see the "Interior care" section.
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
The seats should only be occupied by
passengers, if possible.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating
materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,
seat covers, child seats or booster seats.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats when resetting
the seats. There is a risk that the seats
and/or the objects could be damaged.
iThe rear-compartment head restraints
can be removed (Y page 102).
For more information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
iFurther related subjects:
RCargo compartment enlargement
(folding down the rear bench seat)
(Y page 276)
Adjusting the seats
iVehicles without Memory function: the
seats can be adjusted within three minutes
of a front door being opened.
The time period starts over again if, within
these three minutes, you:
Ropen or close a front door
Rinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock
or remove it from the ignition lock
Rswitch the ignition on or off
If the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock, the seats can be adjusted at
any time.
Depending on the equipment, the seat
adjustment buttons are either located on the
side of the seat or on the door control panel.
:Seat cushion angle
;Seat height
=Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
?Backrest angle
:Seat cushion angle
;Seat height
=Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
?Backrest angle
AHead restraint height4
4For vehicles with memory function only.
100 Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
iYou can store the seat settings using the
memory function (Y page 109).
Adjusting the head restraints
GWARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
GWARNING
If head restraints are not installed and
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide
protection as intended. There is an increased
risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.
in the event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints
installed. Before driving off, make sure for
every vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at about eye level.
General notes
Pay attention to the important safety notes
(Y page 99).
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front
and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust
the height and angle of the head restraints to
the correct position.
Adjusting the head restraints manually
Adjusting the head restraint height5
XTo raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
XTo lower: press release catch : in the
direction of the arrow and push the head
restraint down to the desired position.
Adjusting the angle of the head restraints
XPush or pull the lower edge of the head
restraint in the direction of the arrow.
Adjusting the height of the head
restraints electrically
XTo adjust the head restraint height: slide
the switch for head restraint adjustment
(Y page 100) up or down in the direction of
the arrow.
5For vehicles without memory function only.
Seats 101
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Rear seat head restraints
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height
Once the head restraint is fully lowered, press
release catch :.
XTo raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
XTo lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
angle
Adjust the head restraints so that they are as
close as possible to your head.
You can only adjust the two outer head
restraints.
XPull or push the top of the head restraint
until it is in the desired position.
Installing/removing the rear seat head
restraints
XTo remove: pull the head restraint up to
the stop.
XPress release catch : and pull the head
restraint out of the guides.
XTo re-install: insert the head restraint so
that the notches on the bar are on the left
when viewed in the direction of travel.
XPush the head restraint down until you hear
it engage in position.
Adjusting the lumbar support
You can adjust the contour of the front seats
so as to provide optimum support for your
back.
XMove adjustment lever : in the direction
of the arrow until the desired backrest
contour is achieved.
102 Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum
support for your back.
:To raise the backrest contour
;To soften the backrest contour
=To lower the backrest contour
?To harden the backrest contour
Switching the seat heating on/off
Activating/deactivating
GWARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to excessively high
temperatures may be affected or they may
even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk
of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
repeatedly.
The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
iIf the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.
Driver's and front-passenger seat
The system automatically switches down
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
eight minutes.
The system automatically switches down
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1.
XMake sure that the SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
XTo switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
XTo switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
Seats 103
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Problems with the seat heating
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The seat heating has
switched off
prematurely or cannot
be switched on.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical
consumers are switched on.
XSwitch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
GWARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
GWARNING
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Adjusting the steering wheel
manually
GWARNING
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the
vehicle is in motion, it could change position
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Before starting off, make sure the steering
wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
:Release lever
;To adjust the steering wheel height
=To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
XPush release lever : down completely.
The steering column is unlocked.
XAdjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
XPush release lever : up completely.
The steering column is locked.
XCheck if the steering column is locked.
When doing so, try to push the steering
wheel up or down or try to move it in the
fore-and-aft direction.
104 Steering wheel
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Adjusting the steering wheel
electrically
:To adjust the steering wheel height
;To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
The steering wheel can also be adjusted when
the SmartKey is removed from the ignition
lock.
iFurther related subjects:
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
(Y page 105)
RStoring settings (Y page 109)
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Important safety notes
GWARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is
making adjustments, make sure that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the
steering wheel.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rpress one of the memory function position
buttons, or
Rmove the switch for steering wheel
adjustment in the opposite direction to that
in which the steering wheel is moving.
The adjustment process is stopped.
GWARNING
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature is making adjustments, you could lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always wait until the adjustment process is
complete before driving off.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting
in and out of your vehicle easier.
You can activate and deactivate the EASY-
ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board
computer (Y page 233).
Position of the steering wheel when the
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
The steering wheel swings upwards when
you:
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
Ropen the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO in
position 1
Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is
in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock
iThe steering wheel only moves upwards if
it has not already reached the upper end
stop.
Position of the steering wheel for
driving
The steering wheel is moved to the last
selected position when:
Rthe driver's door is closed
Ryou insert the SmartKey into the ignition
lock
or
Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
When you close the driver's door with the
ignition switched on, the steering wheel is
also automatically moved to the previously
set position.
The last position of the steering wheel is
stored when you switch off the ignition or
Steering wheel 105
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
when you store the setting with the memory
function (Y page 109).
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
triggered in an accident, the steering column
will move upwards when the driver's door is
opened. This occurs irrespective of the
position of the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and
rescue the occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY
feature is activated in the on-board computer.
Mirrors
Rear-view mirror
XAnti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever :
forwards or back.
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
GWARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the
distance from road users traveling behind,
e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an
accident.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger
field of vision.
The exterior mirrors are automatically heated
after starting the vehicle if the rear window
defroster is switched on and the outside
temperature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to
10 minutes.
iYou can also heat up the exterior mirrors
manually by switching on the rear window
defroster.
XMake sure that the SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
XPress button : for the left-hand exterior
mirror or button ; for the right-hand
exterior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding
button lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected
mirror using adjustment button = as long
as the indicator lamp is lit.
XPress adjustment button = up, down, or
to the left or right until you have adjusted
the exterior mirror to the correct position.
You should have a good overview of traffic
conditions.
106 Mirrors
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
electrically
This function is only available in vehicles for
Canada.
XMake sure that the SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
XBriefly press button :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
iMake sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
iIf you are driving faster than
9 mph(15 km/h), you can no longer fold in
the exterior mirrors.
Setting the exterior mirrors
This function is only available in vehicles for
Canada.
If the battery has been disconnected or
completely discharged, the exterior mirrors
must be reset. The exterior mirrors will
otherwise not fold in when you select the
"Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the
on-board computer (Y page 234).
XMake sure that the SmartKey is in
position 1 in the ignition lock.
XBriefly press button :.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
automatically
This function is only available in vehicles for
Canada.
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function
is activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 234):
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
soon as you lock the vehicle from the
outside.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again
automatically as soon as you unlock the
vehicle and then open the driver's or front-
passenger door.
iIf the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually, they do not fold out.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
XVehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
into the correct position manually.
XVehicles with electrically folding
exterior mirrors6: press and hold mirror-
folding button until you hear a click
followed by an impact sound.
(Y page 107)
The mirror housing is engaged again and
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 106).
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
glare mode if the following conditions are met
simultaneously:
Rthe ignition is switched on and
Rincident light from headlamps strikes the
sensor in the rear-view mirror.
6Only for Canada.
Mirrors 107
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior
lighting is switched on.
Parking position for the exterior
mirror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking position
Using reverse gear
You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
engage reverse gear. You can store this
position.
XMake sure that the vehicle is stationary and
that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XPress button ; for the exterior mirror on
the front-passenger side.
XEngage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the preset parking position.
XUse adjustment button = to adjust the
exterior mirror to a position that allows you
to see the rear wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored.
iIf you shift the transmission to another
position, the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side returns to the driving
position.
Using the memory button
You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
engage reverse gear. This setting can be
stored using memory button M ?.
XMake sure that the SmartKey is in
position 2 in the ignition lock.
XWith the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side activated, use adjustment
button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In
the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the
curb should be visible.
XPress memory button M ? and one of the
arrows on adjustment button = within
three seconds.
The parking position is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move.
XIf the mirror moves out of position, repeat
the steps.
Calling up a stored parking position
setting
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XAdjust the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side using button ;.
XEngage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves back to its original position:
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h)
Rif you press button : for the exterior
mirror on the driver's side
108 Mirrors
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Memory function
Storing settings
GWARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
GWARNING
When the memory function adjusts the seat
or steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the memory function is making
adjustments, make sure that no one has any
body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering
wheel. If somebody becomes trapped,
immediately release the memory function
position button. The adjustment process is
stopped.
GWARNING
Children could become trapped if they
activate the memory function, particularly
when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
With the memory function, you can store up
to three different settings, e.g. for three
different people.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
restraint
Rdriver's side: steering wheel position
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior
mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger
sides
XAdjust the seat (Y page 100).
XOn the driver's side, adjust the steering
wheel (Y page 105) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 106).
XBriefly press the M memory button and
then press storage position button 1, 2 or
3 within three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected
preset position. A tone sounds when the
settings have been completed.
Calling up a stored setting
! If you want to move the seat from the fully
reclined position to a stored seat position,
first raise the backrest. The seat could
otherwise be damaged.
XPress and hold the relevant storage
position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat,
steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in
the stored position.
iThe setting procedure is interrupted as
soon as you release the storage position
button.
Memory function 109
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
110
Useful information ............................ 112
Exterior lighting ................................ 112
Interior lighting ................................. 118
Replacing bulbs ................................. 119
Windshield wipers ............................ 122
111
Lights and windshield wipers
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 27).
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you drive with the lights
switched on even during the daytime. In some
countries, operation of the headlamps varies
due to legal requirements and self-imposed
obligations.
Notes on driving abroad
Conversion to symmetrical low beam
Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low
beam in countries in which traffic drives on
the opposite side of the road from the country
where the vehicle is registered. This prevents
glare to oncoming traffic. When using
symmetrical lights, the edge of the road is not
lit as widely and as far ahead as normal.
Have the headlamps converted at a qualified
specialist workshop as close to the border as
possible before driving in these countries.
Conversion to asymmetrical low beam
after returning
Have the headlamps converted back to
asymmetrical low-beam headlamps at a
qualified specialist workshop as soon as
possible after crossing the border again.
Setting the exterior lighting
Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using:
Rthe light switch
Rthe combination switch (Y page 114)
Rthe on-board computer (Y page 231)
Light switch
Operation
1WLeft-hand standing lamps
2XRight-hand standing lamps
3TParking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4ÃAutomatic headlamp mode,
controlled by the light sensor
5LLow-beam/high-beam headlamps
BRRear fog lamp
CNFog lamp (only vehicles with front fog
lamps)
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
XTurn the light switch to Ã.
The exterior lighting (except the parking/
standing lamps) switches off automatically if
you:
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey
in position 0.
112 Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
Automatic headlamp mode
GWARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's
lighting at all times.
à is the favored light switch setting. The
light setting is automatically selected
according to the brightness of the ambient
light (exception: poor visibility due to weather
conditions such as fog, snow or spray):
RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:
the parking lamps are switched on or off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
RWith the engine running: if you have
activated the daytime running lamps
function via the on-board computer, the
daytime running lamps or the low-beam
headlamps and parking lamps are switched
on or off automatically depending on the
brightness of the ambient light.
XTo switch on automatic headlamp
mode: turn the light switch to Ã.
Only for Canada:
The daytime running lamps improve the
visibility of your vehicle during the day. The
daytime running lamps function is required by
law in Canada. It cannot therefore be
deactivated.
When the engine is running and the vehicle is
stationary: if you move the selector lever from
a drive position to P, the daytime running
lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after
three minutes.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is
stationary and in bright ambient light: if you
turn the light switch to T, the daytime
running lamps and parking lamps switch on.
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to L, the manual settings take
precedence over the daytime running lamps.
USA only:
The daytime running lamps improve the
visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do
this, the daytime running lamps function must
be switched on using the on-board computer
(Y page 231).
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to T or L, the manual settings
take precedence over the daytime running
lamps.
Low-beam headlamps
GWARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
Even if the light sensor does not detect that
it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam
headlamps switch on when the ignition is
switched on and the light switch is set to the
L position. This is a particularly useful
function in the event of rain and fog.
XTo switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
position 2 or start the engine.
XTurn the light switch to L.
The green L indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
Front fog lamps
In conditions where visibility is poor due to
fog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improve
visibility as well as making it easier for other
road users to see you. They can be operated
together with the parking lamps or together
Exterior lighting 113
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
with the parking lamps and low-beam
headlamps.
XTo switch on the front fog lamps: turn
the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position
2 or start the engine.
XTurn the light switch to L or Ã.
XPress the N button.
The green N indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
XTo switch off the front fog lamps: press
the N button.
The green N indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Only vehicles with front fog lamps have the
fog lamps function.
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of
thick fog. Please take note of the country-
specific regulations for the use of rear fog
lamps.
XTo switch on the rear fog lamps: turn the
SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2
or start the engine.
XTurn the light switch to L or Ã.
XPress the R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
XTo switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Parking lamps
! If the battery has been excessively
discharged, the parking lamps or standing
lamps are automatically switched off to
enable the next engine start. Always park
your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit
according to legal standards. Avoid the
continuous use of the T parking lamps
for several hours. If possible, switch on the
X right or the W left standing lamp.
XTo switch on: turn the light switch to
T.
The green indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
Standing lamps
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is
illuminated.
XTo switch on the standing lamps: the
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is
in position 0.
XTurn the light switch to W (left-hand side
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
the vehicle).
Combination switch
Turn signal
:High-beam headlamps
;Turn signal, right
=High-beam flasher
?Turn signal, left
XTo indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
XTo indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction
of arrow ; or ?.
114 Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
High-beam headlamps
XTo switch on the high-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
position 2 or start the engine.
XTurn the light switch to L or Ã.
XPress the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of
arrow :.
In the à position, the high-beam
headlamps are only switched on when it is
dark and the engine is running.
The K indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the high-beam
headlamps are switched on.
XTo switch off the high-beam
headlamps: move the combination switch
back to its normal position.
The K indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
High-beam flasher
XTo switch on: turn the SmartKey in the
ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the
engine.
XPull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow =.
Hazard warning lamps
The hazard warning lamps automatically
switch on if:
Ran air bag is deployed.
Rthe vehicle is slowed down rapidly from a
speed of over 45 mph (70 km/h) and
comes to a halt.
XTo switch on the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on
a turn signal using the combination switch,
only the turn signal lamp on the
corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.
XTo switch off the hazard warning
lamps: press button :.
If the vehicle returns to a speed of over
6 mph (10 km/h) after a full application of the
brakes, the hazard warning lamps are
deactivated automatically.
iThe hazard warning lamps still operate if
the ignition is switched off.
Headlamp cleaning system
The headlamps are cleaned automatically if
the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is
operated five times while the lights are on and
the engine is running (Y page 122). When you
switch off the ignition, the automatic
headlamp cleaning system is reset and
counting is resumed from 0.
Active light function
Exterior lighting 115
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
The active light function is a system that
moves the headlamps according to the
steering movements of the front wheels. In
this way, relevant areas remain illuminated
while driving. This allows you to recognize
pedestrians, cyclists and animals.
Active: when the lights are switched on.
Cornering light function
The cornering light function improves the
illumination of the road over a wide angle in
the direction you are turning, enabling better
visibility in tight bends, for example. The
cornering light function can only be activated
when the low-beam headlamps are switched
on.
Active:
Rif you are driving at speeds below
25mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn
signal or turn the steering wheel.
Rif you are driving at speeds between
25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)
and turn the steering wheel.
Not active: if you are driving at speeds above
25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turn
signals or turn the steering wheel to the
straight-ahead position.
The cornering light function may remain lit for
a short time, but is automatically switched off
after no more than three minutes.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
road users:
Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist
may fail to recognize other road users that
have lights, or may recognize them too late.
In this or similar situations, the automatic
high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated
or activated regardless. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You
are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's
lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and
traffic conditions.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be restricted if there is:
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are
obscured
General notes
You can use this function to set the
headlamps to change between low beam and
high beam automatically. The system
recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either
approaching from the opposite direction or
traveling in front of your vehicle, and
consequently switches the headlamps from
high beam to low beam.
The system automatically adapts the low-
beam headlamp range depending on the
distance to the other vehicle. Once the
116 Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
system no longer detects any other vehicles,
it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control
panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
on/off
XTo activate: activate the Adaptive
Highbeam Assist function using the on-
board computer (Y page 231).
XTurn the light switch to Ã.
XPress the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :
(Y page 114).
The _ indicator lamp in the
multifunction display lights up if it is dark
and the light sensor activates the low-beam
headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above
approximately 28 mph (45 km/h):
The headlamp range is set automatically
depending on the distance between the
vehicle and other road users.
If you are driving at speeds above
approximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and no
other road users have been detected:
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below
approximately 30 mph (45 km/h) or other
road users have been detected or the roads
are adequately lit:
The high-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster goes out. The _
indicator lamp in the multifunction display
remains lit.
XTo deactivate: move the combination
switch back to its normal position.
The _ indicator lamp in the
multifunction display goes out.
Headlamps fogged up on the inside
The headlamps may fog up on the inside if
there is high atmospheric humidity.
XSwitch on the lights and drive off.
The level of moisture diminishes,
depending on the length of the journey and
the weather conditions (humidity and
temperature).
If the level of moisture does not diminish:
XHave the headlamps checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Exterior lighting 117
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
:u Switches the rear interior lighting
on/off
;| Switches the automatic interior
lighting control on/off
=p Switches the right-hand front
reading lamp on/off
?c Switches the front interior lighting
on/off
Ap Switches the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off
Rear-compartment overhead control panel
:p Switches the right-hand reading
lamp on/off
;p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
Interior lighting control
General notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
automatically deactivated after some time
unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
Automatic interior lighting control
XTo activate/deactivate: press the |
button.
When the automatic interior lighting
control is activated, the button is flush with
the overhead control panel.
The interior lighting automatically switches
on if you:
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen a door
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
The interior light is activated for a short while
when the SmartKey is removed from the
ignition lock. You can activate this delayed
switch-off using the on-board computer
(Y page 232).
Manual interior lighting control
XTo switch the front interior lighting on/
off: press the c button.
XTo switch the interior lighting on/off:
press the u button.
XTo switch the reading lamps on/off:
press the p button.
118 Interior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
Crash-responsive emergency lighting
The interior lighting is activated automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
XTo switch off the crash-responsive
emergency lighting: press the hazard
warning lamp button.
or
XLock and then unlock the vehicle using the
SmartKey.
Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes
Xenon bulbs
GDANGER
Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get
an electric shock if you remove the cover of
the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical
contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Never touch the parts or the electrical
contacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work
on the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,
you can recognize this by the following: the
cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves
from the top to the bottom and back again
when you start the engine. For this to be
observed, the lights must be switched on
before starting the engine.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Other bulbs
GWARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
There is a risk of injury.
Allow these components to cool down before
changing a bulb.
Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if
its glass tube has been scratched.
The bulb may explode if:
Ryou touch it
Rit is hot
Ryou drop it
Ryou scratch it
Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps
designed for that purpose. Only install spare
bulbs of the same type and the specified
voltage.
Marks on the glass tube reduce the service
life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube
with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the
glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and
rub it off with a lint-free cloth.
Protect bulbs from moisture during
operation. Do not allow bulbs to come into
contact with liquids.
There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs
that you cannot replace. Replace only the
bulbs listed (Y page 119). Have the bulbs that
you cannot replace yourself changed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
If you require assistance changing bulbs,
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
a qualified specialist workshop.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types
You can change the following bulbs. The bulb
type can be found in the legend.
Replacing bulbs 119
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Halogen headlamps
:Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
;High-beam headlamp/parking lamp/
standing lamp: H15 55 W/15 W
=Turn signal lamp: PWY 24 W
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps
:Cornering lamp: H7 55 W
:Backup lamp: W 16 W
Changing the front bulbs
Low-beam headlamps (halogen
headlamps)
XSwitch off the lights.
XOpen the hood.
XTurn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
XAt the bulb holder, push the bulb upwards,
disconnect it and pull it out of bulb
holder ;.
XInsert the new bulb into bulb holder ;,
push it down and secure it in place.
XAttach housing cover : and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
High-beam headlamps, standing/
parking lamps (halogen headlamps)
XSwitch off the lights.
XOpen the hood.
XTurn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
XTurn bulb counter-clockwise and pull it out.
120 Replacing bulbs
Lights and windshield wipers
XInsert the new bulb into bulb holder ; and
turn it clockwise.
XAlign housing cover : and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
Cornering light function (Bi-Xenon
headlamps)
XSwitch off the lights.
XOpen the hood.
XTurn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
XPush the lever of holder ; upwards until
holder ; is released.
XPull out bulb holder ;.
XTake the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
XInsert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
XInsert holder ; from above and press it
until it engages.
XAlign housing cover : and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
Turn signal
XSwitch off the lights.
XOpen the hood.
XTurn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
XGrip the back of lever extension ; and pull
it out in a straight line.
XTake the bulb out of lever extension ;.
XInsert the new bulb into lever
extension ;.
XRe-insert lever extension ; downwards
(swelling) with guide rail =.
Changing the rear bulbs
Opening and closing the side trim
panels
You must open the side trim panel in the
cargo compartment before you can change
the bulbs in the tail lamps.
Left-hand side trim panel
Replacing bulbs 121
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Right-hand side trim panel
XTo open: turn release knob : 90° in the
direction of the arrow and remove side trim
panel ;.
XTo close: insert side trim panel ; and turn
release knob : 90° in the opposite
direction to the arrow.
Tail lamp
XSwitch off the lights.
XOpen the cargo compartment.
XOpen the side trim panel (Y page 121).
XPull out connector :.
XTurn fender nut ; 90° counter-clockwise
and pull out the bulb holder.
XBackup lamp :: remove the bulb from
bulb holder.
XInsert the new bulb into the bulb holder.
XRe-install bulb holder.
XTurn fender nut 90° clockwise.
XInsert the connector.
XClose the side trim panel (Y page 121).
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers on/
off
! Do not operate the windshield wipers
when the windshield is dry, as this could
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
that has collected on the windshield can
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
the windshield is dry.
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on
the windshield after the vehicle has been
washed in an automatic car wash, wax or
other residues may be the reason for this.
Clean the windshield using washer fluid
after washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash.
122 Windshield wipers
Lights and windshield wipers
Combination switch
1$ Windshield wiper off
2Ä Intermittent wipe, low7
3Å Intermittent wipe, high8
4° Continuous wipe, slow
5¯ Continuous wipe, fast
Bí Single wipe/î To wipe the
windshield using washer fluid
XSwitch on the ignition.
XTurn the combination switch to the
corresponding position.
! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the
windshield becomes dirty in dry weather
conditions, the windshield wipers may be
activated inadvertently. This could then
damage the windshield wiper blades or
scratch the windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch
off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield
will no longer be wiped properly. This could
prevent you from observing the traffic
conditions. Replace the wiper blades twice a
year, ideally in spring and fall.
Switching the rear window wiper on/
off
Combination switch
:è Switch
2ô To wipe with washer fluid
3I To switch on intermittent wiping
40 To switch off intermittent wiping
5ô To wipe with washer fluid
XTurn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
XTurn switch : on the combination switch
to the corresponding position.
When the rear window wiper is switched on,
the icon appears in the instrument cluster.
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you could
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk
of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper
arm has been folded away from the
windshield/rear window.
7Rain sensor set to low sensitivity.
8Rain sensor set to high sensitivity.
Windshield wipers 123
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without
a wiper blade back onto the windshield/
rear window.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release
the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it
falls onto the windshield/rear window, the
windshield/rear window may be damaged
by the force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified
specialist workshop.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,
make sure that you touch only the wiper
arm of the wiper.
Changing the windshield wiper blades
Moving the wiper blades to a vertical
position
! Before changing the wiper blades, always
set the wiper arms to a vertical position
using the combination switch. There is
otherwise a risk of damaging the hood.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO
XTurn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
XSet the windshield wipers to
position °.
XWhen the wiper arms have reached a
vertical position, turn the SmartKey to
position 0 and remove it from the ignition
lock.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
XSwitch off the engine.
XRemove your foot from the brake pedal.
XSet the windshield wipers to
position °.
XPress the Start/Stop button repeatedly
until the windshield wipers start.
XWhen the wiper arms have reached a
vertical position, press the Start/Stop
button.
Removing the wiper blades
XFold the wiper arm away from the
windshield until it engages.
XSet the wiper blade at right angles to the
wiper arm.
XRemove the wiper blade from the retaining
pin on the wiper arm in the direction of the
arrow.
Installing the wiper blades
XPush the new wiper blade onto the
retaining pin on the wiper arm in the
opposite direction to the arrow.
Make sure that the wiper blade slides fully
onto the retaining pin on the wiper arm.
XTurn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper
arm.
XFold the wiper arm back onto the
windshield.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
Removing the wiper blades
124 Windshield wipers
Lights and windshield wipers
XRemove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
XFold wiper arm : away from the rear
window until it engages.
XPosition wiper blade ; at a right angle to
wiper arm :.
XHold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the direction of the arrow until
it releases.
XRemove wiper blade ;.
Installing the wiper blade
XPlace new wiper blade ; onto wiper
arm :.
XHold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the opposite direction to the
arrow until it engages.
XMake sure that wiper blade ; is seated
correctly.
XPosition wiper blade ; parallel to wiper
arm :.
XFold wiper arm : back onto the rear
window.
Windshield wipers 125
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Problems with the windshield wipers
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The windshield wipers
are jammed.
Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield
wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
XFor safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock.
or
XSwitch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
XRemove the cause of the obstruction.
XSwitch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers
fail completely.
The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.
XSelect another wiper speed on the combination switch.
XHave the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The windshield washer
fluid from the spray
nozzles no longer hits
the center of the
windshield.
The spray nozzles are misaligned.
XHave the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist
workshop.
126 Windshield wipers
Lights and windshield wipers
Useful information ............................ 128
Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 128
Operating the climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 133
Setting the air vents ......................... 140
127
Climate control
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 27).
Overview of climate control systems
Important safety notes
Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. The windows could
otherwise fog up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
Rswitch off climate control only briefly
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only
briefly
Rswitch on the cooling with air
dehumidification function
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature
and the humidity in the vehicle interior and
filters undesirable substances out of the air.
Climate control can only be operated when
the engine is running. Optimum operation is
only achieved with the side windows and roof
closed.
The residual heat function can only be
activated or deactivated with the ignition
switched off (Y page 139).
iVentilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the
convenience opening feature (Y page 90).
This will speed up the cooling process and
the desired vehicle interior temperature
will be reached more quickly.
iThe integrated filter filters out most
particles of dust and soot and completely
filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous
pollutants and odors. A clogged filter
reduces the amount of air supplied to the
vehicle interior. For this reason, you should
always observe the interval for replacing
the filter, which is specified in the
Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on
environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air
pollution, the interval may be shorter than
stated in the Maintenance Booklet.
iIt is possible that the dehumidification
function of the climate control system may
be activated automatically an hour after the
SmartKey has been removed. The vehicle
is then ventilated for 30 minutes.
128 Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Canada only
:To set the temperature, left (Y page 136)
;To defrost the windshield (Y page 137)
=To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 137)
?To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 133)
ATo switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 138)
BTo set the temperature, right (Y page 136)
CTo activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 139)
DTo set the air distribution (Y page 136)
ETo increase the airflow (Y page 137)
FTo reduce the airflow (Y page 137)
GTo switch climate control on/off (Y page 133)
HTo set climate control to automatic (Y page 135)
Overview of climate control systems 129
Climate control
USA only
:To set the temperature, left (Y page 136)
;To defrost the windshield (Y page 137)
=To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 138)
?To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 133)
ATo switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 138)
BTo set the temperature, right (Y page 136)
CTo activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 139)
DTo set the air distribution (Y page 136)
ETo increase the airflow (Y page 137)
FTo reduce the airflow (Y page 137)
GTo switch climate control on/off (Y page 133)
HTo set climate control to automatic (Y page 135)
Notes on using climate control
Automatic climate control
The following contains notes and
recommendations on optimum use of dual-
zone automatic climate control.
RActivate climate control using the à and
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the
à and ¿ buttons light up.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
ROnly use the "windshield defrosting"
function briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could
otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the
temperature settings on the driver's side
for the front-passenger side as well. The
indicator lamp in the á button goes out.
ECO start/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off, the ECO
start/stop function only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full
130 Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
climate control output, you can switch off the
ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
button (Y page 150).
Overview of climate control systems 131
Climate control
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control
Canada only
Front control panel
:To set the temperature, left (Y page 136)
;To defrost the windshield (Y page 137)
=To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 139)
?To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 133)
ATo switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 138)
BTo set the temperature, right (Y page 136)
CTo switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 137)
DTo switch climate control on/off (Y page 133)
ETo set the air distribution (Y page 136)
FTo increase the airflow (Y page 137)
GTo reduce the airflow (Y page 137)
HTo adjust airflow (Y page 135)
ITo activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 139)
JTo set climate control to automatic (Y page 135)
Rear control panel
KTo increase the airflow (Y page 137)
LTo reduce the airflow (Y page 137)
MDisplay
NTo reduce the temperature (Y page 136)
OTo increase the temperature (Y page 136)
132 Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
Notes on using 3-zone automatic
climate control
Automatic climate control
The following contains instructions and
recommendations to enable you to get the
most out of your automatic climate control.
RActivate climate control using the à and
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the
à and ¿ buttons light up.
RIn automatic mode, you can also use the
ñ button to adjust airflow (FOCUS/
MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is
recommended.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
ROnly use the "windshield defrosting"
function briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could
otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the
temperature settings on the driver's side
for the front-passenger side and the rear
compartment as well. The indicator lamp in
the á button goes out.
RUse the residual heat function if you want
to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior
when the ignition is switched off. The
residual heat function can only be activated
or deactivated with the ignition switched
off.
ECO start/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off, the ECO
start/stop function only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full
climate control output, you can switch off the
ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
button (Y page 150).
Operating the climate control
systems
Switching climate control on/off
General notes
When the climate control is switched off, the
air supply and air circulation are also
switched off. The windows could fog up.
Therefore, switch off climate control only
briefly
iSwitch on climate control primarily using
the à button (Y page 135).
Activating/deactivating
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 145).
XTo activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or
XPress the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored.
XTo deactivate: press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
up.
Activating/deactivating cooling with
air dehumidification
General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-
dehumidification" function, the air inside the
vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the
vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The
windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
deactivate the cooling with air-
dehumidification function only briefly.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function is only available when the engine is
running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled
Operating the climate control systems 133
Climate control
and dehumidified according to the
temperature selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
normal and not a sign that there is a
malfunction.
Activating/deactivating
XTo activate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights
up.
iWhen the "Cooling with air
dehumidification" function is activated,
one of the indicator lamps on the auxiliary
heating button will light up on vehicles with
auxiliary heating.
XTo deactivate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes
out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function has a delayed switch-off feature.
134 Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The indicator lamp in
the ¿ button
flashes three times or
remains off. The
"Cooling with air
dehumidification"
function cannot be
switched on.
Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a
malfunction.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Setting climate control to automatic
General notes
In automatic mode, the set temperature is
maintained automatically at a constant level.
The system automatically regulates the
temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow
and the air distribution.
The automatic mode functions optimally
when the "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function is activated. If necessary, cooling
with air dehumidification can be deactivated.
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-
dehumidification" function, the air inside the
vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the
vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The
windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
deactivate the cooling with air-
dehumidification function only briefly.
Activating/switching
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 145).
XSet the desired temperature.
XTo activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow
are activated.
3-zone automatic climate control: when
automatic mode is activated, you can adjust
airflow (Y page 135).
XTo select manually: press the _
button.
or
XPress the K or I button.
The indicator lamp in the à button goes
out. Automatic air distribution and airflow
are deactivated.
Adjusting airflow
This function is only available with 3-zone
automatic climate control.
In automatic mode you can select the
following airflow settings:
FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly
cooler
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly
warmer and with less draft
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 145).
XPress the à button.
XPress the ñ button repeatedly until the
required airflow setting appears in the
display.
Operating the climate control systems 135
Climate control
Setting the temperature
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Different temperatures can be set for the
driver's and front-passenger sides.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 145).
XTo increase/reduce: turn control : or
B clockwise or counter-clockwise
(Y page 129).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
3-zone automatic climate control9
Automatic climate control zones
You can select different temperature settings
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as
well as for the rear compartment.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 145).
XTo increase/reduce the temperature in
the front: turn control : or B clockwise
or counter-clockwise (Y page 132).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
XTo increase/reduce the temperature in
the rear compartment using the front
control panel: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out.
XTurn control : clockwise or counter-
clockwise (Y page 132).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
XTo increase/reduce the temperature in
the rear compartment using the rear
control panel: press the 9 or :
button on the rear control panel.
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
iIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer
than 30 minutes, the temperature setting
for the rear compartment then switches
back to 72 ‡ (22 †).
Setting the air distribution
Air distribution settings
Dual-zone climate control: the air distribution
can be set individually for the driver's and
front-passenger sides.
¯Directs air through the defroster vents
PDirects air through the center and side
air vents
ODirects air through the footwell air
vents
SDirects the airflow through the center
and side air vents as well as the
footwell air vents10
_Directs the airflow to the entire vehicle
interior11
bDirects air through the defroster,
center and side air vents11
aDirects air through the defroster and
footwell vents
iRegardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side
air vents. The side air vents can only be
closed when the controls on the side air
vents are turned downwards.
9Canada only.
10 Only for USA.
11 Canada only.
136 Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
Adjusting
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 145).
XPress the _ button repeatedly until the
desired symbol appears in the display.
The indicator lamp in the à button goes
out. Automatic control is deactivated and
the air distribution is controlled according
to the selected setting.
Setting the airflow
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 145).
XTo increase/reduce: press the K or
I button.
iYou can use 3-zone automatic climate
control to set the airflow in the rear
compartment separately.
If the battery is not sufficiently charged,
blower output may be reduced. As soon as
the battery is sufficiently charged, full blower
output will be available.
Switching the ZONE function on/off
This function is only available in vehicles for
Canada.
XTo activate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button lights
up.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the
temperature setting for the driver's side is
not adopted for the front-passenger side.
3-zone automatic climate control: the
temperature setting for the driver's side is
not adopted for the front-passenger side
and the rear compartment.
When the buttons for temperature, airflow or
air distribution are pressed, the temperature
setting on the driver's side is not adopted for
the other climate control zones.
XTo deactivate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the
temperature setting for the driver's side is
adopted for the front-passenger side.
3-zone automatic climate control: the
temperature setting for the driver's side is
adopted for the front-passenger side and
the rear compartment.
Defrosting the windshield
You can use this function to defrost the
windshield or to defrost the inside of the
windshield and the side windows.
iYou should only select the "windshield
defrosting" function until the windshield is
clear again.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 145).
XTo activate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
up.
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
Rhigh airflow
Rhigh temperature
Rair distribution to the windshield and
front side windows
Rair-recirculation mode off
If the battery is not sufficiently charged,
blower output may be reduced. As soon as
the battery is sufficiently charged, full blower
output will be available.
XTo deactivate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains
deactivated.
or
Operating the climate control systems 137
Climate control
XPress the à button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or
XTurn temperature control : or B
clockwise or counter-clockwise
(Y page 129), (Y page 132).
or
XPress the K or I button.
MAX COOL maximum cooling
The MAX COOL function is only available in
vehicles for the USA.
MAX COOL is only operational when the
engine is running.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate
control switches to the following functions:
Rmaximum cooling
Rmaximum airflow
Rair-recirculation mode on
XTo activate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
XTo activate: press the Ù button again.
The indicator lamp goes out. The previously
selected settings are restored.
Defrosting the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
XActivate the ¿ cooling with air
dehumidification function.
XActivate automatic mode Ã.
XAdjust the side air vents so that the warmed
air is directed to the side windows.
XIf the windows continue to fog up, activate
the ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
iYou should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outside
XActivate the windshield wipers.
XPress the _ button repeatedly until the
O or P symbol appears in the
display.
XAdjust the side air vents so that no air is
directed to the side windows.
Rear window defroster
General notes
The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,
the rear window defroster switches off
automatically after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear
window defroster may switch off.
Activating/deactivating
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 145).
XPress the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.
138 Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
Problems with the rear window defroster
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The rear window
defroster has
deactivated
prematurely or cannot
be activated.
The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
XSwitch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
defroster can be activated again.
Activating/deactivating air-
recirculation mode
General notes
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle
from outside. The air already inside the
vehicle will then be recirculated.
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the
windows can fog up more quickly, in
particular at low temperatures. Only use air-
recirculation mode briefly to prevent the
windows from fogging up.
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the
same for all control panels.
Activating/deactivating
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 145).
XTo activate: press the g button.
The indicator lamp in the g button lights
up.
iIn the event of high pollution levels12 or at
high outside temperatures, air-
recirculation mode is automatically
activated. When air-recirculation mode is
activated automatically, the indicator lamp
in the g button is not lit.
Outside air is added after about
30 minutes.
XTo deactivate: press the g button.
The indicator lamp in the g button goes
out.
iAir-recirculation mode deactivates
automatically:
Rafter approximately five minutes at
outside temperatures below
approximately 41 ‡ (5 †)
Rafter approximately five minutes if
cooling with air dehumidification is
deactivated
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at
outside temperatures above
approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling
with air dehumidification" function is
activated
Activating/deactivating the residual
heat function
General notes
The residual heat function is only available in
vehicles for Canada with automatic climate
control.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat
of the engine to continue heating the vehicle
for approximately 30 minutes after the engine
has been switched off. The heating time
depends on the temperature that has been
set.
iThe blower will run at a low speed
regardless of the airflow setting.
12 3-zone automatic climate control only.
Operating the climate control systems 139
Climate control
iIf you activate the residual heat function
at high temperatures, only the ventilation
will be activated. The blower runs at
medium speed.
Activating/deactivating
XTurn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock (Y page 145) or remove it.
XTo activate: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
up.
iIf the residual heat function is activated,
the windows may fog up on the inside.
XTo deactivate: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes
out.
iResidual heat is deactivated
automatically:
Rafter approximately 30 minutes
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
Rif the battery voltage drops
Setting the air vents
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air
outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield
and the hood free of blockages, such as ice,
snow or leaves.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles
in the vehicle interior.
iFor virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust
the sliders of the air vents to the center
position.
Setting the center air vents
XTo open the center air vent: turn the
adjuster in one of center air vents :
counter-clockwise.
XTo close the center air vent: turn the
adjuster in one of center air vents :
clockwise until it engages.
Setting the side air vents
:Side window defroster vent
;Side air vent
XTo open a side air vent: turn the adjuster
in side air vent ; counter-clockwise.
XTo close a side air vent: turn the adjuster
in side air vent ; clockwise until it
engages.
140 Setting the air vents
Climate control
Setting the glove box air vent
When automatic climate control is activated,
the glove box can be ventilated, for instance
to cool its contents. The level of airflow
depends on the airflow and air distribution
settings.
! Close the air vent when heating the
vehicle.
At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air
dehumidification" function. Otherwise,
temperature-sensitive items stored in the
glove box could be damaged.
:Air vent thumbwheel
;Air vent
XTo open/close: turn thumbwheel :
clockwise or counter-clockwise.
Setting the rear-compartment air
vents
:Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
;Rear-compartment air vent, right
=Rear control panel, only with 3-zone
automatic climate control13
?Rear-compartment air vent, left
XTo open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or
down.
13 Canada only.
Setting the air vents 141
Climate control
Z
142
Useful information ............................ 144
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 144
Driving ............................................... 144
Automatic transmission ................... 152
Refueling ............................................ 158
Parking ............................................... 164
Driving tips ........................................ 166
Driving systems ................................ 173
Towing a trailer ................................. 212
143
Driving and parking
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 27).
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
Important safety notes
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after
several hundred kilometers of driving.
Compensate for this by applying greater force
to the brake pedal.
The first 1000 miles(1500 km)
The more you look after the engine when it is
new, the more satisfied you will be with its
performance in the future.
RYou should therefore drive at varying
vehicle and engine speeds for the first
1000 miles (1500 km).
RIdeally, for the first 1000 miles (1500 km),
drive in program E.
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full
throttle, during this period.
RChange gear in good time, before the
tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the
red area of the tachometer.
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to
brake the vehicle.
RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator
pedal past the point of resistance
(kickdown).
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase
the engine speed gradually and accelerate
the vehicle to full speed.
iYou should also observe these notes on
breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive
train on your vehicle have been replaced.
iAlways observe the respective speed
limits.
Driving
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle
is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
GWARNING
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
of the pedals, e.g.:
Rshoes with thick soles
Rshoes with high heels
Rslippers
There is a risk of an accident.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of the pedals.
GWARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
144 Driving
Driving and parking
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
GWARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully
released when driving, the parking brake can:
Roverheat and cause a fire
Rlose its hold function.
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
the parking brake fully before driving off.
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use
the engine's full performance until it has
reached operating temperature.
Only shift the automatic transmission to
the desired drive position when the vehicle
is stationary.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery
roads. You could otherwise damage the
drive train.
Key positions
SmartKey
gTo remove the SmartKey
(shift the transmission to position P)
1Power supply for some consumers, such
as the windshield wipers
2Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position
3To start the engine
The steering is locked when you remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
iThe SmartKey can be turned in the
ignition lock even if it is not the correct
SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not
switched on. The engine cannot be started.
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:
-with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
phone or another SmartKey
-with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
foil
-inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
This can impair the functionality of the
KEYLESS-GO key.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
a SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-
GO function and a detachable Start/Stop
button.
The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times
in succession corresponds to the different
key positions in the ignition lock. This is only
the case if you are not depressing the brake
pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts
immediately.
The Start/Stop button can be removed from
the ignition lock. Then, you can insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
iYou do not have to remove the Start/Stop
button from the ignition lock when you
leave the vehicle. You should, however,
always take the SmartKey with you when
leaving the vehicle. The vehicle can be
started with the Start/Stop button if the
SmartKey is in the vehicle. Electrically
powered equipment can be operated.
Driving 145
Driving and parking
Z
:Start/Stop button
;Ignition lock
XInsert Start/Stop button : into ignition
lock ;.
iWhen you insert Start/Stop button :
into ignition lock ;, the system needs
approximately 2 seconds recognition time.
You can then use Start/Stop button :.
Start/Stop button
=USA only
?Canada only
XPosition 0: if Start/Stop button : has not
yet been pressed, this corresponds to the
key being removed from the ignition.
XPosition 1: press Start/Stop button :.
You can now activate the windshield
wipers, for example.
iIf you then open the driver's door when in
this position, the power supply is
deactivated.
XPosition 2: (ignition): press Start/Stop
button : twice.
iThe power supply is switched off again if:
Rthe driver's door is opened and
Ryou press Start/Stop button : once
when in this position
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after
starting the engine or lights up while driving,
see (Y page 263).
Starting the engine
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of
parking position P.
Rstarting the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
GWARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces
without sufficient ventilation.
146 Driving
Driving and parking
GWARNING
Flammable materials introduced through
environmental influence or by animals can
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials in
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine.
General notes
iVehicles with a gasoline engine: the
catalytic converter is preheated for up to
30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of
the engine may change during this time.
Automatic transmission
XShift the transmission to position P.
The transmission position display in the
multifunction display shows P.
iYou can also start the engine when the
transmission is in position N.
Starting procedure with the SmartKey
iTo start the engine using the SmartKey
instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/
Stop button out of the ignition lock.
XTo start a gasoline engine: turn the
SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock
(Y page 145) and release it as soon as the
engine is running.
XTo start a diesel engine: turn the
SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock
(Y page 145).
The % preglow indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
XWhen the % preglow indicator lamp
goes out, turn the SmartKey to position
3(Y page 145) and release it as soon as the
engine is running.
iYou can start the engine without preglow
if the engine is warm.
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine
You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey
with the integrated KEYLESS-GO function is
in the vehicle. Always take the SmartKey with
you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only
leave it for a short time. Pay attention to the
important safety notes.
iThe Start/Stop button can be used to
start the vehicle without inserting the
SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/
Stop button must be inserted in the ignition
lock and the SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
XDepress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
XPress the Start/Stop button once
(Y page 145).
The engine starts.
Pulling away
Automatic transmission
GWARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or
R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There
is a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
iIt is only possible to shift the transmission
from position P to the desired position if
you depress the brake pedal. Only then is
the parking lock released. If you do not
depress the brake pedal, you can move the
DIRECT SELECT lever but the parking lock
remains engaged.
Driving 147
Driving and parking
Z
XDepress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
XShift the transmission to position D or R.
XRelease the parking brake (Y page 165).
XRelease the brake pedal.
XCarefully depress the accelerator pedal.
! If a warning tone sounds and the
Release Park. Brake message appears
in the multifunction display, the parking
brake is still applied. Release the parking
brake.
iThe vehicle locks centrally once you have
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
drop down.
You can open the doors from the inside at
any time.
You can also deactivate the automatic
locking feature (Y page 232).
iUpshifts take place at higher engine
speeds after a cold start. This helps the
catalytic converter to reach its operating
temperature more quickly.
Hill start assist
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.
It holds the vehicle for a short time after you
have removed your foot from the brake pedal.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and to depress it before the vehicle begins to
roll.
GWARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no
longer brake your vehicle and it could roll
away. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
assist.
XTake your foot off the brake pedal.
The vehicle is then held for about a second.
XPull away.
Hill start assist is not active if:
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on
a downhill gradient.
Rthe transmission is in position N.
Rthe parking brake is applied.
RESP® is malfunctioning.
ECO start/stop function
Introduction
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle is
stopped under certain conditions.
The engine starts automatically when the
driver wants to pull away again. The ECO
start/stop function thereby helps you to
reduce the fuel consumption and emissions
of your vehicle.
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If the engine is switched off automatically and
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
There is a risk of accident and injury.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the ignition and secure the vehicle against
rolling away.
General notes
If the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the
multifunction display, the ECO start/stop
function switches the engine off
automatically if the vehicle stops moving.
Every time you switch on the engine using the
SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO
start/stop function is activated.
If the ECO start/stop function has been
manually deactivated (Y page 150) or a
148 Driving
Driving and parking
malfunction has caused the system to be
deactivated, the ¤ symbol is not
displayed.
Automatic engine switch-off
General notes
The ECO start/stop function is operational
and the ¤ symbol is displayed in green in
the multifunction display, if:
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
green.
Rthe outside temperature is within the range
that is suitable for the system.
Rthe engine is at normal operating
temperature.
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached.
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
Rthe system detects that the windshield is
not fogged up when the air-conditioning
system is switched on.
Rthe hood is closed.
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastened.
If not all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is
shown in yellow.
iAll of the vehicle's systems remain active
when the engine has been stopped
automatically.
iThe engine can be switched off
automatically a maximum of four times
(first stop and three subsequent stops) in
succession. The ¤ symbol is shown in
yellow in the multifunction display after the
engine has been started automatically for
the fourth time. When the ¤ symbol is
shown in green in the multifunction display,
automatic engine switch-off is again
possible.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or
N, the ECO start/stop function switches off
the engine automatically.
iThe HOLD function can be activated if the
engine has been switched off
automatically. It is then not necessary to
continue applying the brakes during the
automatic stop phase. When you depress
the accelerator pedal, the engine starts
automatically and the braking effect of the
HOLD function is deactivated.
Automatic engine start
General notes
The engine starts automatically if:
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button.
Ryou engage reverse gear R.
Rthe vehicle starts to roll.
Rthe brake system requires this.
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior
deviates from the set range.
Rthe system detects moisture on the
windshield when the air-conditioning
system is switched on.
Rthe condition of charge of the battery is too
low.
Rthe driver's seat belt is removed or the
driver's door is opened.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
The engine is started automatically if you:
Rrelease the brake pedal when HOLD is not
activated and the transmission is in
position D or N.
Rdepress the accelerator pedal.
Rmove the transmission out of position P.
iShifting the transmission to position P
does not start the engine.
iIf you shift the transmission from R to D,
the ECO start/stop function is available
Driving 149
Driving and parking
Z
again once the ¤ symbol reappears in
green in the multifunction display.
Deactivating/activating the ECO start/
stop function
ECO button
XTo switch off: press button :.
Indicator lamp ; on button : and the
¤ symbol in the multifunction display go
out.
XTo switch on: press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 149) are fulfilled, the
¤ symbol is shown in green in the
multifunction display.
If not all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 149) are fulfilled, the
¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the
multifunction display. If this is the case, the
ECO start/stop function is not available.
iIf indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/
stop function has been deactivated
manually or as the result of a malfunction.
The engine will then not be switched off
automatically when the vehicle stops.
150 Driving
Driving and parking
Problems with the engine
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine does not
start. The starter motor
can be heard.
RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
XTurn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock before
attempting to start the engine again.
or
XPress the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps
in the instrument cluster go out.
XTry to start the engine again (Y page 146). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not
start. You cannot hear
the starter motor.
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak
or discharged.
XJump-start the vehicle (Y page 320).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
XAllow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
XTry to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving 151
Driving and parking
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine is not
running smoothly and
is misfiring.
There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
component of the engine management system.
XOnly depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
XHave the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic
converter and damage it.
The coolant
temperature gauge
shows a value above
248 ‡ (120 †).
The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
XStop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
to cool down.
XCheck the coolant level (Y page 304). Observe the warning
notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or
R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There
is a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
GWARNING
The automatic transmission switches to
neutral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a
risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked
vehicle from rolling away by applying the
parking brake.
DIRECT SELECT lever
Overview of transmission positions
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
steering column.
jPark position with parking lock
kReverse gear
iNeutral
hDrive
iThe DIRECT SELECT lever always returns
to its original position. The current
transmission position P, R, N or D appears
in the transmission position display
(Y page 153) in the multifunction display.
152 Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Transmission position and drive
program display
:Transmission position display
;Drive program display
iThe arrows in the transmission position
display show how and into which
transmission positions you can change
using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
! If the transmission position display in the
multifunction display is not working, you
should pull away carefully to check whether
the desired transmission position is
engaged. Ideally, you should select
transmission position D and drive program
E or S.
The current transmission position and drive
program appear in the multifunction display.
Engaging park position P
XPush the DIRECT SELECT lever in the
direction of arrow P.
iThe automatic transmission shifts into
park position P automatically:
Rif you open the driver's door while the
vehicle is stationary in transmission
position D or R
Rif you open the door while traveling at
very low speeds in transmission position
D or R
! If the engine speed is too high or the
vehicle is moving, do not shift the
automatic transmission directly from D to
R, from R to D or directly to P. The
automatic transmission could otherwise be
damaged.
Engaging park position P automatically
Park position P is automatically engaged if:
Ryou switch off the engine using the
SmartKey and remove the SmartKey.
Ryou switch off the engine using the Start/
Stop button and open one of the front
doors.
Rthe HOLD (Y page 183) or DISTRONIC
PLUS (Y page 175) function brake your
vehicle until it is stationary and at least one
of the following conditions is fulfilled:
-there is a system malfunction.
-the vehicle is on a steep uphill or downhill
gradient. The electric parking brake is
then also applied.
Engaging reverse gear R
! Only shift the automatic transmission to
R when the vehicle is stationary.
XWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal.
XPush the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
first point of resistance.
Shifting to neutral N
XWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal.
XPush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
to the first point of resistance.
If the engine has been switched off, the
automatic transmission automatically shifts
to N.
Remaining in neutral N
If the automatic transmission is to remain in
neutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in car
washes with a towing device, please observe
the following instructions:
Automatic transmission 153
Driving and parking
Z
GWARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Using the SmartKey:
RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.
RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal and keep it depressed.
RShift to neutral N.
RRelease the brake pedal.
RIf the electric parking brake is applied,
release it.
RSwitch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Using KEYLESS-GO:
RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.
RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal and keep it depressed.
REngage park position P.
RRelease the brake pedal.
RRemove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock.
RInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
RSwitch on the ignition.
RDepress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
RShift to neutral N.
RRelease the brake pedal.
RIf the electric parking brake is applied,
release it.
RSwitch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Engaging drive position D
XWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal.
XPush the DIRECT SELECT lever down past
the first point of resistance.
Transmission positions
BPark position
Do not shift the transmission into
position P(Y page 164) unless the
vehicle is stationary. The parking
lock should not be used as a brake
when parking. Always apply the
parking brake in addition to the
parking lock in order to secure the
vehicle.
If the vehicle electronics are
malfunctioning, the transmission
may be locked in position P. Have
the vehicle electronics checked
immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.
The automatic transmission shifts
to P automatically if you:
Rremove the SmartKey
Rswitch off the engine when in R
or D and open one of the front
doors
CReverse gear
Only shift the transmission to R
when the vehicle is stationary.
154 Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
ANeutral
Do not shift the transmission to N
while driving. The transmission
could otherwise be damaged.
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brakes will allow you
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
push it or tow it.
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:
only shift the transmission to
position N if the vehicle is in danger
of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
! Rolling in neutral N can damage
the drive train.
7Drive
The automatic transmission
changes gear automatically. All
forward gears are available.
Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts to the
individual gears automatically when it is in
transmission position D. This automatic
gearshifting behavior is determined by:
Rthe selected drive program
E/S(Y page 155)
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed
Driving tips
Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
XDepress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a
lower gear depending on the engine speed.
XEase off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Towing a trailer
XWhen traveling downhill, switch to a lower
gear if the automatic transmission
constantly switches between two gears.
XEngaging a lower gear and reducing the
speed reduces the risk of the engine
overheating.
Program selector button
General notes
The program selector button allows you to
choose between different driving
characteristics.
Program selector button
E Economy Comfortable, economical
driving
S Sport Sporty driving style
XPress program selector button :
repeatedly until the letter for the desired
drive program appears in the multifunction
display.
Automatic transmission 155
Driving and parking
Z
Steering wheel paddle shifters
:Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter
;Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter
In the manual drive program, you can change
gear yourself by using the steering wheel
paddle shifters (Y page 156).
iYou can only change gear with the
steering wheel paddle shifters when the
transmission is in position D.
Automatic drive program
Drive program E is characterized by the
following:
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from
the automatic transmission shifting up
sooner
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
forward and reverse gears, unless the
accelerator pedal is depressed fully
Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving
stability on slippery road surfaces, for
example
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being
driven at lower engine speeds and the
wheels being less likely to spin
Drive program S is characterized by the
following:
Rsporty engine and automatic transmission
settings
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
later
Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic
transmission shift points
Manual drive program M
General notes
In this drive program, you can briefly change
gear yourself by using the steering wheel
paddle shifters. The transmission must be in
position D.
You can activate manual drive program M in
the E and S automatic drive programs.
Activating
XShift the transmission to position D.
XPull the left or right steering wheel paddle
shifter (Y page 156).
Manual drive program M is temporarily
activated. The selected gear and M appear
in the multifunction display.
Shifting gears
If you pull on the left or right steering wheel
paddle shifter, the automatic transmission
switches to manual drive program M for a
limited amount of time. Depending on which
paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic
transmission immediately shifts into the next
gear down or up, if permitted.
XTo shift up: pull the right-hand steering
wheel paddle shifter (Y page 156).
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
iIf the maximum engine speed on the
currently engaged gear is reached and you
continue to accelerate, the automatic
transmission automatically shifts up in
order to prevent engine damage.
XTo shift down: pull on the left-hand
steering wheel paddle shifter
(Y page 156).
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
156 Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
iIf the engine exceeds the maximum
engine speed when shifting down, the
automatic transmission protects against
engine damage by not shifting down.
iAutomatic down shifting occurs when
coasting.
Shift recommendation
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The
recommended gear is shown in the
multifunction display.
XShift to recommended gear ; according
to gearshift recommendation : when
shown in the multifunction display of the
instrument cluster.
Deactivating
If you have activated manual drive program
M, it will remain active for a certain amount
of time. Under certain conditions the
minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in
the case of lateral acceleration, during an
overrun phase or when driving on steep
terrain.
If manual drive program M has been
deactivated, the automatic transmission
shifts into the automatic drive program that
was last selected, i.e. E or S.
You can also deactivate manual drive
program M yourself:
XPull on the right-hand steering wheel
paddle shifter and hold it in place
(Y page 156).
or
XUse the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
transmission position.
or
XUse the program selector button to change
the drive program (Y page 155).
Manual drive program M is deactivated.
The automatic transmission switches into
the automatic drive program that was last
selected, i.e. E or S.
Automatic transmission 157
Driving and parking
Z
Problems with the transmission
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The transmission has
problems shifting gear.
The transmission is losing oil.
XHave the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
The acceleration ability
is deteriorating.
The transmission no
longer changes gear.
The transmission is in emergency mode.
It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
XStop the vehicle.
XShift the transmission to position P.
XSwitch off the engine.
XWait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
XShift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
XHave the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Transfer case
This section is only valid for vehicles with 4-
wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always
transmitted to both axles.
! Performance tests may only be carried
out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake
system or transfer case could otherwise be
damaged. Contact a qualified specialist
workshop for a performance test.
! To prevent ESP® from intervening, the
ignition must be switched off (SmartKey in
position 0 or 1) if:
Rthe parking brake is being tested on a
brake dynamometer.
Rthe vehicle is being towed with only one
axle raised (not permitted for vehicles
with 4MATIC).
The brake system could otherwise be
damaged.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised,
as doing so will damage the transmission.
Refueling
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and
explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
GWARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
158 Refueling
Driving and parking
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
RWash away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance
without delay.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical
assistance without delay. Do not induce
vomiting.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
GWARNING
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged.
GWARNING
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
When the engine is running, exhaust system
components could overheat without being
noticed. There is a risk of fire.
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline
with diesel fuel.
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with
a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel
vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not
switch on the ignition if you accidentally
refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the
fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small
amounts of the wrong fuel could result in
damage to the fuel system and the engine.
The repair costs are high. Notify a qualified
specialist workshop and have the fuel tank
and fuel lines drained completely.
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.
Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection
system could be blocked by particles from
the fuel can.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray
out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
(Y page 367).
Refueling
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
:To open the fuel filler flap
;To insert the fuel filler cap
=Tire pressure table
?Fuel type to be used
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked
automatically when you open or close the
vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-
GO.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow
next to the filling pump indicates the side of
the vehicle.
Refueling 159
Driving and parking
Z
To open
XSwitch the engine off.
XRemove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
XKEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door.
This corresponds to key position 0: "key
removed".
The driver’s door can be closed again.
XPress the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
XOpen the fuel filler flap fully.
XTurn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise
and remove it.
XInsert the fuel filler cap into the holder
bracket on the inside of filler flap ;.
XCompletely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place
and refuel.
XOnly fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
iDo not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise,
fuel may leak out.
To close
XReplace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
XClose the fuel filler flap.
iClose the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle.
iIf you are driving with the fuel filler cap
open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp
flashes. A message appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 249).
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
lamp may light up (Y page 268).
For further information on warning and
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,
see (Y page 268).
160 Refueling
Driving and parking
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Fuel is leaking from the
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
GWARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove
it immediately (Y page 145).
XDo not restart the engine under any circumstances.
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not
start.
The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run
completely dry.
XRefuel the vehicle with at least 5.3 US qt (5 liters) of diesel.
XTurn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds
(Y page 145).
XStart the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs
smoothly.
If the engine does not start:
XTurn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds
(Y page 145).
XStart the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds until
it runs smoothly.
If the engine does not start after three attempts:
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap
cannot be opened.
The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
or
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
XUnlock the vehicle (Y page 76).
or
XUnlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 78).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is
jammed.
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
Refueling 161
Driving and parking
Z
DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only)
Important notes on use
To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas
aftertreatment must be operated with the
reducing agent DEF. Adding DEF is one of the
tasks performed during maintenance. Under
normal operating conditions, a tank of DEF
lasts until the next service due date.
When the supply of DEF is almost used up,
the Check Additive See Operator's
Manual message is shown in the
multifunction display.
When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, the
Remaining Starts: 16 message is shown
in the multifunction display.
If the Remaining Starts: 16 message
appears in the multifunction display, you can
start the engine another 16 times. If DEF is
not refilled, you will subsequently be unable
to start the engine. Refill the DEF tank with
around 1 gal (3.8 l) of DEF or have the DEF
tank refilled at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Use the special DEF refill bottle when adding
DEF between maintenance intervals. Contact
a qualified specialist workshop with any
questions or, if necessary, contact Roadside
Assistance (Y page 24).
If the outside temperature is below 12 ‡
(Ò11 †) it may be difficult to top up. If DEF is
frozen and there is an active warning
indicator, it may not be possible to add DEF.
Park the vehicle in a warmer place, e.g. in a
garage, until DEF has become fluid again. It
will then be possible to add DEF again.
Alternatively, have the DEF tank refilled at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Further information about BlueTEC exhaust
gas aftertreatment and DEF is available at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Important safety notes on the refilling
procedure
DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust
gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:
Rnot poisonous
Rcolorless and odorless
Rnot flammable
When you open the DEF container, small
amounts of ammonia vapor may be released.
Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are
particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous
membranes and to the eyes. You may
experience a burning sensation in your eyes,
nose and throat. Coughing and watering of
the eyes are possible.
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF
tank only in well-ventilated areas.
DEF must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes or clothing and must not be
swallowed. Keep DEF away from children.
If you or other persons come into contact with
DEF, observe the following:
RRinse DEF from your skin immediately with
soap and water.
RIf DEF comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance
without delay.
RIf DEF has been swallowed, rinse your
mouth out immediately. Drink plenty of
water. Seek medical assistance without
delay.
RChange out of clothing contaminated with
DEF immediately.
! Only use DEF in accordance with
ISO 22241. Do not mix any additives with
DEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. This
may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas
aftertreatment system.
! Rinse surfaces that have come into
contact with DEF immediately with water or
remove DEF using a damp cloth and cold
water. If the DEF has already crystallized,
use a sponge and cold water to clean it. DEF
162 Refueling
Driving and parking
residues crystallize after time and
contaminate the affected surfaces.
! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be
added to the fuel tank. If DEF is added to
the fuel tank, this can lead to engine
damage.
! Only screw on the DEF refill bottle hand-
tight. It could otherwise be damaged.
The DEF filler neck is under the cargo
compartment floor.
XSwitch the ignition off.
XOpen the tailgate.
XLift up the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 314).
XTurn DEF cap : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
XTurn DEF filler cap ; counter-clockwise
and open it.
Filler cap ; is secured with a plastic strip.
XUnscrew the protective cap from DEF refill
bottle =.
XSet DEF refill bottle = as shown on the
filler neck and screw it on hand-tight.
XPress DEF refill bottle = downward.
The DEF tank is filled. This may take up to
one minute.
iTo top up between service intervals, fill
the DEF tank with approximately 1 gal
(3.8 l) of DEF. 1 gal (3.8 l) DEF is equivalent
to approximately 2 DEF refill bottles. Then
have the DEF supply checked at a qualified
specialist workshop and completely refilled
if necessary.
XRelease DEF refill bottle =.
When DEF refill bottle = is no longer
pressed down, filling stops. DEF refill bottle
= can be removed when it has been only
partially emptied.
XTurn DEF refill bottle = counter-clockwise
and remove it.
XPlace DEF filler cap ; on the filler neck and
turn it clockwise.
Refueling 163
Driving and parking
Z
XReplace DEF cover : as shown and turn it
clockwise as far as it will go.
XFold the cargo compartment floor down.
XClose the tailgate.
XDrive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h).
The Check Additive See Operator's
Manual message goes out after
approximately one minute.
iIf the Check Additive See
Operator's Manual message remains
shown in the multifunction display, add an
additional bottle of DEF.
For further information on DEF, see
(Y page 370).
Parking
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable
materials come into contact with parts of the
vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not
to park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.
GWARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
GWARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
example:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle
equipment and become trapped. There is a
risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
! Always secure the vehicle correctly
against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle
or its drivetrain could be damaged.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally:
Rthe parking brake must be applied.
Rthe transmission must be in position P and
the SmartKey must be removed from the
ignition lock.
Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front
wheels must be turned towards the curb.
Switching off the engine
Important safety notes
GWARNING
The automatic transmission switches to
neutral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a
risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked
vehicle from rolling away by applying the
parking brake.
164 Parking
Driving and parking
Vehicles with automatic transmission
XApply the parking brake firmly.
XShift the transmission to position P.
Using the SmartKey
XTurn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
iThe SmartKey can only be removed if the
transmission is in position P.
Using KEYLESS-GO
XPress the Start/Stop button (Y page 145).
The engine stops and all the indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
iWhen the driver's door is closed, this
corresponds to key position 1. When the
driver's door is open, this corresponds to
key position 0: "key removed".
iIn the event of an emergency, the engine
can be turned off while the vehicle is in
motion by pressing and holding the Start/
Stop button for three seconds.
Parking brake
GWARNING
If you must brake the vehicle with the parking
brake, the braking distance is considerably
longer and the wheels could lock. There is an
increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Only use the parking brake to brake the
vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do
not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the
wheels lock, release the parking brake until
the wheels begin turning again.
GWARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
example:
Rreleasing the parking brake
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
the parking position P
Rstarting the engine.
They could also operate the vehicle's
equipment. There is a risk of an accident and
injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
If you brake the vehicle with the parking
brake, the brake lamps will not light up.
XTo apply: depress parking brake ; firmly.
When the engine is running, the $ (USA
only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp
lights up in the instrument cluster.
XTo release: depress the brake pedal and
keep it depressed.
XPull release handle :.
When the ignition is switched on or the
engine is running, the $ (USA only) or
J (Canada only) indicator lamp goes out
in the instrument cluster.
Parking the vehicle for a long period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
exhaustive discharging.
Parking 165
Driving and parking
Z
XConnecting a trickle charger.
iYou can obtain information about trickle
chargers from a qualified specialist
workshop.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as
a result of lack of use.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop and
seek advice.
Driving tips
General driving tips
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
GWARNING
If you operate mobile communication
equipment while driving, you will be
distracted from traffic conditions. You could
also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk
of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are driving. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
If you make a call while driving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
before operating the telephone.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers
a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per
second.
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
XThe tires should always be inflated to the
recommended tire pressure.
XRemove unnecessary loads.
XRemove roof racks when they are not
needed.
XWarm up the engine at low engine speeds.
XAvoid frequent acceleration or braking.
XHave all maintenance work carried out as
indicated by the service intervals in the
Maintenance Booklet or by the service
interval display.
Fuel consumption also increases when
driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic
and in hilly terrain.
Drinking and driving
GWARNING
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect your reflexes, perceptions and
judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal
accident is greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Emission control
GWARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces
without sufficient ventilation.
166 Driving tips
Driving and parking
Certain engine systems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
These systems only work at peak efficiency if
they are serviced exactly in accordance with
the manufacturer's specifications. For this
reason, all work on the engine must be carried
out by qualified and authorized Mercedes-
Benz technicians.
The engine settings must not be changed
under any circumstances. Furthermore, all
specific service work must be carried out at
regular intervals and in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details
can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
ECO display
The ECO display gives you information on how
economical your driving style is. The ECO
display assists you in achieving the optimum
driving style in terms of consumption, taking
the actual and selected conditions into
consideration. Your driving style can
significantly influence the vehicle's
consumption.
Example: ECO display
The ECO display consists of three bars:
RAcceleration
RConstant
RCoasting
The percent value is the average value of the
three bars. The three bars and the mean value
begin at the value of 50%. A higher
percentage indicates a more economical
driving style.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual
fuel consumption and a fixed percentage
count in the ECO display does not indicate a
fixed consumption figure.
Apart from driving style, consumption is
dependent on many factors such as, e.g.:
Rload
Rtire pressure
Rcold start
Rchoice of route
Relectrical consumers switched on
These factors are not taken into
consideration by the ECO display.
The evaluation of your driving style is carried
out using the following three categories:
RAcceleration (evaluation of all
acceleration processes):
-The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,
especially at higher speeds
-The bar empties: sporty acceleration
RConstant (assessment of driving behavior
at all times):
-The bar fills up: constant speed and
avoidance of unnecessary acceleration
and deceleration
-The bar empties: fluctuations in speed
RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration
processes):
-The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,
keeping your distance and early release
of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast
without use of the brakes.
-The bar empties: frequent braking
iAn economical driving style specially
requires driving at moderate engine
speeds.
To achieve a higher value in the categories
Acceleration and Constant:
Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
Rdrive in drive program E.
iOn long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.
on the highway, only the bar for Constant
will change.
Driving tips 167
Driving and parking
Z
iThe ECO display summaries the driving
characteristics from the start of the journey
to its completion. For this reason, the bars
change dynamically at the beginning of the
journey. On longer journeys, there are
fewer changes. For more dynamic changes,
carry out a manual reset.
Further information on the ECO display
(Y page 224).
Braking
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface.
Downhill gradients
! On long and steep gradients, you must
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting
early to a lower gear. This allows you to take
advantage of the engine braking effect and
helps avoid overheating and excessive
wear of the brakes.
When you take advantage of the engine
braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn
for some time, e.g. on a slippery road
surface. This could cause damage to the
drive train. This type of damage is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
Heavy and light loads
GWARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, the braking system can overheat. This
increases the stopping distance and can even
cause the braking system to fail. There is a
risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal at the same time.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately.
Drive on for a short while. This allows the
airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.
Wet roads
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
without braking, there may be a delayed
reaction from the brakes when braking for the
first time. This may also occur after the
vehicle has been washed.
You have to depress the brake pedal more
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the
vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying
attention to the traffic conditions. This will
warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them
more quickly and protecting them against
corrosion.
Limited braking performance on salt-
treated roads
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt
residue may form on the brake discs and
brake pads. This can result in a significantly
longer braking distance.
RBrake occasionally to remove any possible
salt residue. Make sure that you do not
endanger other road users when doing so.
RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the
beginning and end of a journey.
RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead.
168 Driving tips
Driving and parking
Servicing the brakes
! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster and you hear a
warning tone while the engine is running,
the brake fluid level may be too low.
Observe additional warning messages in
the multifunction display.
The brake fluid level may be too low due to
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
Have the brake system checked
immediately. This work should be carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
All checks and maintenance work on the
brake system must be carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop. Consult a
qualified specialist workshop to arrange this.
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or
performance tests may only be carried out
on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you are
planning to have the vehicle tested on such
a dynamometer, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to obtain further
information first. Otherwise, you could
damage the drive train or the brake system.
! As the ESP® system operates
automatically, the engine and the ignition
must be switched off (SmartKey in position
0 or 1 in the ignition lock) when:
Rtesting the parking brake on a brake
dynamometer.
Ryou intend to have the vehicle towed with
the front or rear axle raised (not
permitted for vehicles with 4MATIC).
Braking maneuvers triggered automatically
by ESP® may seriously damage the brake
system.
If the brake system has only been subject to
moderate loads, you should test the
functionality of your brakes at regular
intervals. To do so, press firmly on the brake
pedal when driving at a high speed. This
improves the grip of the brake pads.
You can find a description of Brake Assist
(BAS) on (Y page 68).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
have brake pads/linings installed on your
vehicle which have been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond
to an equivalent quality standard. Brake
pads/linings which have not been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not
of an equivalent quality could affect your
vehicle's operating safety.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use brake fluid that has been specially
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,
or which corresponds to an equivalent quality
standard. Brake fluid which has not been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or
which is not of an equivalent quality could
affect your vehicle's operating safety.
Parking brake
GWARNING
If you must brake the vehicle with the parking
brake, the braking distance is considerably
longer and the wheels could lock. There is an
increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Only use the parking brake to brake the
vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do
not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the
wheels lock, release the parking brake until
the wheels begin turning again.
If you brake the vehicle with the parking
brake, the brake lamps will not light up.
If you drive on wet roads or dirt-covered
surfaces, road salt and/or dirt could get into
the parking brake.
In order to prevent corrosion and a reduction
in the braking power of the parking brake,
observe the following:
Rgently depress the parking brake from time
to time before beginning the journey.
Rdrive for approximately 110 yds (100 m) at
a maximum speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Driving tips 169
Driving and parking
Z
Driving on wet roads
Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth
on the road surface, there is a danger of
hydroplaning occurring, even if:
Ryou drive at low speeds.
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or
in conditions in which hydroplaning may
occur, you must drive in the following
manner:
Rlower your speed.
Ravoid ruts.
Rbrake carefully.
Driving on flooded roads
! Do not drive through flooded areas.
Check the depth of any water before driving
through it. Drive slowly through standing
water. Otherwise, water may enter the
vehicle interior or the engine compartment.
This can damage the electronic
components in the engine or the automatic
transmission. Water can also be drawn in
by the engine's air suction nozzles and this
can cause engine damage.
Prevent water from entering the vehicle
interior or the engine compartment. If you
must drive through standing water, bear in
mind that:
Rthe maximum permissible fording depth in
still water is 12 in (30 cm)
Ryou should drive no faster than at walking
pace
Off-road fording
! Under no circumstances should you
accelerate before entering the water. The
bow wave could cause water to enter and
damage the engine and other assemblies.
! Do not open any of the vehicle's doors
while fording. Otherwise, water could get
into the vehicle interior and damage the
vehicle's electronics and interior
equipment.
REstablish how deep the water is and the
characteristics of the body of water before
fording.
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand
steering wheel paddle shifter.
RAvoid high engine speeds.
REnter and exit the water at a flat place and
at a steady walking pace.
RDrive slowly and at an even speed through
the water.
RDo not stop.
RWater offers a high degree of resistance,
and the ground is slippery and in some
cases unstable. Therefore, it is difficult and
dangerous to pull away in the water.
REnsure that a bow wave does not form as
you drive.
RClean any mud from the tire tread after
fording.
RApply the brakes to dry them after fording.
Always observe the fording depth values
(Y page 375).
Winter driving
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface.
GDANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
170 Driving tips
Driving and parking
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open
a window on the side of the vehicle that is not
facing into the wind.
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
section (Y page 332).
Driving with summer tires
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
section (Y page 332).
Slippery road surfaces
GWARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road
surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering
and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise
control or DISTRONIC PLUS.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
XShift the transmission to position N.
iFor more information on driving with
snow chains, see (Y page 333).
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Changes in the outside temperature are
displayed after a short delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The
vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your
driving style. Always adapt your driving style
and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing
weather conditions.
You should pay special attention to road
conditions when temperatures are around
freezing point.
Off-road driving
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or
turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle
could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is
a risk of an accident.
Always drive on a steep incline in the line of
fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the
vehicle.
When driving off-road, sand, mud and water,
possibly mixed with oil, for example, could get
into the brakes. This could result in a reduced
braking effect or in total brake failure and also
in increased wear and tear. The braking
characteristics change depending on the
material ingressing the brakes. Clean the
brakes after driving off-road. If you detect a
reduced braking effect or grinding noises,
have the brake system checked in a qualified
specialist workshop as soon as possible.
Adapt your driving style to the different
braking characteristics.
Driving off-road increases the likelihood of
damage to the vehicle, which, in turn, can lead
to failure of the mechanical assembly or
systems. Adapt your driving style to suit the
terrain conditions. Drive carefully. Have
damage to the vehicle rectified immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not switch to transmission position N
when driving off-road. If you try to brake the
vehicle using the service brake, you could
lose control of the vehicle. If the gradient is
Driving tips 171
Driving and parking
Z
too steep for your vehicle, drive back down in
reverse gear.
General notes
HEnvironmental note
Protection of the environment is of primary
importance. Treat nature with respect.
Observe all prohibiting signs.
Read this section carefully before driving your
vehicle off-road. Practice by driving over more
gentle off-road terrain first.
Familiarize yourself with the characteristics
of your vehicle and the gear shift operation
before driving through difficult terrain.
Checklist before driving off-road
! If the engine oil warning lamp lights up
while the vehicle is in motion, stop the
vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible.
Check the engine oil level. The engine oil
warning lamp warning must not be ignored.
Continuing the journey while the symbol is
displayed could lead to engine damage.
Checklist after driving off-road
Driving over rough terrain places greater
demands on your vehicle than driving on
normal roads. After driving off-road, check
the vehicle. This allows you to detect damage
promptly and reduce the risk of an accident
to yourself and other road users.
Driving on sand
Observe the following rules when driving on
sand:
Ruse the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter to shift to a lower gear appropriate
to the terrain.
Rdrive quickly to overcome the rolling
resistance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels
could become stuck in loose ground.
Rdrive in the tracks of other vehicles if
possible. Make sure that:
-the tire ruts are not too deep.
-the sand is sufficiently firm.
-the ground clearance of the vehicle is
sufficient.
Tire ruts and gravel roads
Observe the following rules when driving
along ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with
loose gravel:
! Check that the ruts are not too deep and
that your vehicle has sufficient clearance.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged
or bottom out and get stuck.
Driving over obstacles
! Obstacles could damage the floor of the
vehicle or components of the chassis. Ask
passengers for guidance when driving over
large obstacles. The passenger should
always keep a safe distance from the
vehicle when doing so in order to avoid
injury as a result of unexpected vehicle
movements. After driving off-road or over
obstacles, check the vehicle for possible
damage, especially to the underbody and
the components of the chassis.
Observe the following rules when driving over
tree stumps, large stones and other
obstacles:
Ravoid high engine speeds.
Rshift to a lower gear using the left-hand
steering wheel paddle shifter.
172 Driving tips
Driving and parking
Rdrive very slowly.
Rtry to drive straight over the center of
obstacles: front wheel first, then rear
wheel.
Traveling uphill
Approach/departure angle
GWARNING
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or
turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle
could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is
a risk of an accident.
Always drive on a steep incline in the line of
fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the
vehicle.
RObserve the rules on off-road driving.
RDo not drive at an angle on slopes, inclines
or gradients, but instead follow the direct
line of fall.
RDrive slowly.
RAvoid high engine speeds. Drive at
appropriate engine speeds (maximum
3,000 rpm).
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand
paddle shifter before tackling steep
downhill gradients.
RWhen driving down an incline, make use of
the engine's braking effect. Observe the
engine speed; do not overrev the engine.
RCheck the brakes after prolonged off-road
driving.
iHill start assist will aid you when pulling
away on a hill. For further information about
hill start assist, see (Y page 148).
Do not switch to transmission position N
when driving off-road. If you try to brake the
vehicle using the service brake, you could
lose control of the vehicle. If the gradient is
too steep for your vehicle, drive back down in
reverse gear.
Always observe the approach/departure
angle values (Y page 376).
Maximum gradient-climbing capability
Always observe the maximum gradient
climbing ability values (Y page 376).
Hilltops
When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly
reduce pressure on the accelerator
immediately before reaching the brow of the
hill. Make use of the vehicle's own impetus to
travel over the brow.
This style of driving prevents:
Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on the
brow of a hill
Rthe vehicle from traveling too quickly down
the other side
Driving downhill
RDrive slowly.
RDo not drive at an angle down steep
inclines. Steer into the line of fall and drive
with the front wheels aligned straight.
Otherwise, the vehicle could slip sideways,
tip and rollover.
RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand
paddle shifter before tackling steep
downhill gradients.
RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake
gently. When doing so, make sure that the
vehicle is facing in the direction of the line
of fall.
RCheck that the brakes are working normally
after a long downhill stretch.
Driving systems
Cruise control
Important safety notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
to avoid exceeding the set speed. You must
select a low gear in good time on long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the
vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing
Driving systems 173
Driving and parking
Z
so, you will make use of the braking effect of
the engine. This relieves the load on the brake
system and prevents the brakes from
overheating and wearing too quickly.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic
conditions make it appropriate to maintain a
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h).
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise
control can neither reduce the risk of an
accident nor override the laws of physics.
Cruise control cannot take into account the
road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise
control is only an aid. You are responsible for
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for
staying in your lane.
Do not use cruise control:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or
accelerating could cause the drive wheels
to lose traction and the vehicle could then
skid
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
iCruise control should not be activated
when driving off-road.
Cruise control lever
:To activate or increase speed
;To activate or reduce speed
=To deactivate cruise control
?To activate at the current speed/last
stored speed
When you activate cruise control, the stored
speed is shown in the multifunction display
for five seconds. In the multifunction display,
the segments between the stored speed and
the maximum speed light up.
Storing and maintaining the current
speed
You can store the current speed if you are
driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
XAccelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
XBriefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ;.
XRemove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
automatically maintains the stored speed.
iCruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by
automatically applying the brakes.
174 Driving systems
Driving and parking
Storing the current speed or calling up
the last stored speed
GWARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle
accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know
the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate
or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an
accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic
conditions before calling up the stored speed.
If you do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
XBriefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
XRemove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously
stored speed.
Setting a speed
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
the speed set.
XPress the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
XTo adjust the set speed in 1 mph
increments (1 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
XTo adjust the set speed in 5 mph
increments (10 km/h increments):
briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ; beyond the pressure
point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
iCruise control is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. For
example, if you accelerate briefly to
overtake, cruise control adjusts the
vehicle's speed to the last speed stored
after you have finished overtaking.
Deactivating cruise control
There are several ways to deactivate cruise
control:
XBriefly press the cruise control lever
forwards =.
or
XBrake.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
Ryou depress the parking brake.
Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®.
Ryou shift the transmission to position N
while driving.
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear
a warning tone. You will see the Cruise
Control Off message in the multifunction
display for approximately five seconds.
iWhen you switch off the engine, the last
speed stored is cleared.
DISTRONIC PLUS
Important safety notes
DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and
automatically helps you maintain the
distance to the vehicle detected in front.
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so
that the set speed is not exceeded.
You must select a low gear in good time on
long and steep downhill gradients, especially
if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By
doing so, you will make use of the braking
effect of the engine. This relieves the load on
the brake system and prevents the brakes
from overheating and wearing too quickly.
Driving systems 175
Driving and parking
Z
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-moving
vehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in order
to maintain the preset distance to the vehicle
in front.
GWARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:
Rpeople or animals
Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g.
stopped or parked vehicles
Roncoming and crossing traffic
As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give
warnings nor intervene in such situations.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
GWARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly
identify other road users and complex traffic
situations.
In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
Rneither give a warning nor intervene
Raccelerate unexpectedly
There is a risk of an accident.
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
brake, in particular when warned to do so by
DISTRONIC PLUS.
GWARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up
to 40% of the maximum braking force. If this
braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS
warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk
of an accident.
In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and
try to take evasive action.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes
automatically in certain situations. To
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or other similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
If you fail to adapt your driving style,
DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk
of accident nor override the laws of physics.
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account
the road, traffic and weather conditions.
DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or
accelerating could cause the drive wheels
to lose traction and the vehicle could then
skid
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow
vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or
vehicles driving on a different line.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rsnow or heavy rain
Rinterference by other radar sources
Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in
parking garages
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a
vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may
unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the
stored speed.
176 Driving systems
Driving and parking
This speed may:
Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane
or an exit lane
Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand
lane that you overtake vehicles in the left-
hand lane
Rbe so high when driving in the left-hand lane
that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand
lane
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
control in the speed range between 20 mph
(Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:
200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front of
you, it operates in the speed range between
0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:
200 km/h).
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on
roads with steep gradients.
As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves,
it can resemble the radar detectors of the
responsible authorities. You can refer to the
relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if
questions are asked about this.
iUSA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removing, tampering
with, or altering the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
iCanada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the
device will void any warranties, and is not
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Cruise control lever
:To store the current speed or a higher
speed
;To store the current speed or a lower
speed
=To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
?To store the current speed or call up the
last stored speed
ATo set the specified minimum distance
Switching on DISTRONIC PLUS, storing
and maintaining the current speed
Activation conditions
In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the
following conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up
to two minutes after pulling away before
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational.
Rthe parking brake must be released.
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
RActive Parking Assist must not be
activated.
Driving systems 177
Driving and parking
Z
Rthe transmission must be in position D.
Rthe hood must be closed.
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be
fastened.
Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors
must be closed.
Rthe vehicle must not skid.
Activating while driving
When driving at speeds below 20 mph
(30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONIC
PLUS if the vehicle in front has been detected
and is shown in the multifunction display. If
the vehicle in front is no longer detected and
displayed, DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and
a tone sounds.
XBriefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?, or press it up : or down ;.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
XPress the cruise control lever repeatedly
up : or down ; until the desired speed
is set.
XRemove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed.
iIf you do not fully release the accelerator
pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Override
message appears in the multifunction
display. The set distance to a slower-
moving vehicle in front will then not be
maintained. You will be driving at the speed
you determine by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
Activating when driving towards a
stationary vehicle
If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you
can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your
vehicle is stationary as well.
XBriefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?, or press it up : or down ;.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
iDISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at
under 20 mph (30 km/h) if a vehicle in front
has been detected. For this reason, it is
helpful if you have the DISTRONIC PLUS
distance display shown in the instrument
cluster (Y page 228).
XPress the cruise control lever repeatedly
up : or down ; until the desired speed
is set.
iYou can use the cruise control lever to set
the stored speed and the control on the
cruise control lever to set the specified
minimum distance (Y page 180).
Pulling away
XIf the vehicle in front pulls away: remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
XBriefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
or
XAccelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its
speed to that of the vehicle in front.
Driving
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
control.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
in front has slowed down, it brakes your
vehicle. In this way, the distance you have
selected is maintained.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
in front is driving faster, it accelerates your
vehicle, but only up to the speed you have
stored.
Changing lanes
If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC
PLUS supports you when:
Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph
(60 km/h)
RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the
distance to a vehicle in front
178 Driving systems
Driving and parking
Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal
RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger
of collision
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle
is accelerated. Acceleration will be
interrupted if changing lanes takes too long
or if the distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front becomes too small.
iWhen changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS
monitors the left lane on left-hand drive
vehicles and the right lane on right-hand
drive vehicles.
Stopping
GWARNING
When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked
only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated
with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a
vehicle occupant or from outside the
vehicle.
Rthe electrical system in the engine
compartment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected.
Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,
e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 181).
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until
it is stationary.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains
stationary and you do not need to depress the
brake.
iDepending on the specified minimum
distance, your vehicle will come to a
standstill at a sufficient distance behind the
vehicle in front. The specified minimum
distance is set using the control on the
cruise control lever.
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the
transmission is shifted automatically to
position P if:
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
seat belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is
automatically switched off by the ECO
start/stop function.
Rthe hood is opened.
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
Setting a speed
XPress the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
XTo adjust the set speed in 1 mph
increments (1 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
XTo adjust the set speed in 5 mph
increments (10 km/h increments):
briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ; beyond the pressure
point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ;, the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
iDISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. If you
accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS
adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored after you have finished
overtaking.
Driving systems 179
Driving and parking
Z
Storing the current speed or calling up
a stored speed
XBriefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
XRemove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
time it is activated, the current speed is
stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
speed to the previously stored value.
Setting the specified minimum distance
You can set the specified minimum distance
for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this
function, you can set the minimum distance
that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
see this distance in the multifunction display
(Y page 180).
iMake sure that you maintain a sufficient
distance to the vehicle in front and comply
with the minimum distance as required by
law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in
front if necessary.
XTo increase: turn control ; in direction
=.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
XTo decrease: turn control ; in
direction :.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the
speedometer
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or
two segments ; in the set speed range light
up.
iFor design reasons, the speed displayed
in the speedometer may differ slightly from
the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,
segments ; between speed of the vehicle in
front : and stored speed = light up.
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the
multifunction display
General notes
In the Assistance menu (Y page 228) of the
on-board computer, you can select the
assistance display.
180 Driving systems
Driving and parking
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is
deactivated
XSelect the Assist. Graphic function
using the on-board computer
(Y page 228).
When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you
will see the following in the multifunction
display:
:Vehicle in front, if detected
;Distance indicator, current distance to
the vehicle in front
=Specified minimum distance to the
vehicle in front; adjustable
?Own vehicle
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is
activated
XSelect the Assist. Graphic function
using the on-board computer
(Y page 228).
You will see the stored speed for about five
seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
After this time, you will see the following in
the multifunction display while DISTRONIC
PLUS is activated:
:Vehicle in front, if detected
;Specified minimum distance to the
vehicle in front; adjustable
=Own vehicle
?DISTRONIC PLUS activated
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
There are several ways to deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS:
XBriefly press the cruise control lever
forwards :.
or
XBrake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you
will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message
in the multifunction display for approximately
five seconds.
iThe last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine.
Driving systems 181
Driving and parking
Z
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically
deactivated if:
Ryou engage the parking brake
Ryou are driving slower than 15 mph
(25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front,
or if the vehicle in front is no longer
detected
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards
you in order to pull away and the front-
passenger door or one of the rear doors is
open
Rthe vehicle has skidded
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will
hear a warning tone. You will see the
DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the
multifunction display for approximately five
seconds.
If the vehicle has been stopped by DISTRONIC
PLUS and a malfunction occurs in the system,
the Brake Immediately message appears in
the multifunction display. Depress the brake
pedal immediately so that the vehicle does
not roll away. DISTRONIC PLUS is then
deactivated, and the message disappears.
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
General notes
The following contains descriptions of certain
road and traffic conditions in which you must
be particularly attentive. In such situations,
brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then
deactivated.
Cornering, going into and coming out of a
bend
The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect
vehicles when cornering is limited. Your
vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.
Vehicles traveling on a different line
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles
traveling on a different line. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Other vehicles changing lanes
182 Driving systems
Driving and parking
DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the
vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this
vehicle will be too short.
Narrow vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the
vehicle in front on the edge of the road,
because of its narrow width. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for
obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for
example, the detected vehicle turns a corner
and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,
DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.
Crossing vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect
vehicles that are crossing your lane.
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights
with crossing traffic, for example, could cause
your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.
HOLD function
General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
following situations:
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep
slopes
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
Rwhen waiting in traffic
The vehicle is kept stationary without the
driver having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
iDo not use the HOLD function when
driving off-road, on steep uphill or downhill
gradients or on slippery or loose surfaces.
The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle
on such surfaces.
Driving systems 183
Driving and parking
Z
Important safety notes
GWARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
Rthe electrical system in the engine
compartment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected
There is a risk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes
automatically in certain situations. To
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or other similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
Deactivating the HOLD function
(Y page 184).
Activation conditions
You can activate the HOLD function if:
Rthe vehicle is stationary
Rthe engine is running or if it has been
automatically switched off by the ECO
start/stop function
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt
is fastened
Rthe parking brake is released
Rthe hood is closed.
Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
Activating the HOLD function
XMake sure that the activation conditions
are met.
XDepress the brake pedal.
XQuickly depress the brake pedal further
until ë appears in the multifunction
display.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
release the brake pedal.
iIf depressing the brake pedal the first
time does not activate the HOLD function,
wait briefly and then try again.
Deactivating the HOLD function
The HOLD function is deactivated
automatically if:
Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in
position D or R.
Rthe transmission is in position P.
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a
certain amount of pressure until ë
disappears from the multifunction display.
Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
When the HOLD function is activated in
vehicles with an automatic transmission, the
transmission is shifted automatically to
position P if:
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
seat belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is
automatically switched off by the ECO
start/stop function.
Rthe hood is opened.
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
The horn will also sound at regular intervals if
the HOLD function is activated and you:
Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's
door and remove your seat belt.
Ropen the hood.
The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact
that the vehicle has been parked while the
184 Driving systems
Driving and parking
HOLD function is still activated. If you attempt
to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.
The vehicle is not locked until the HOLD
function is deactivated.
iIf the engine has been switched off, it
cannot be started again until the HOLD
function has been deactivated.
If there is a malfunction in the system or
power supply while the HOLD function is
activated, the Brake Immediately message
is shown in the multifunction display.
Immediately depress the brake firmly until
the warning message in the multifunction
display goes out.
You can also shift the transmission to position
P. This deactivates the HOLD function.
PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area
around your vehicle using six sensors in the
front bumper and four sensors in the rear
bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and
audibly the distance between your vehicle
and an object.
PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking
and exiting a parking space. When
maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a
parking space, make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objects in the area in
which you are maneuvering.
! When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such
as flower pots or trailer drawbars.
PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
when they are in the immediate vicinity of
the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle
or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a
truck or a pneumatic drill could cause
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
uneven terrain.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
you:
Rswitch on the ignition
Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N
Rrelease the parking brake
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
:Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand
side (example)
Range of the sensors
General notes
PARKTRONIC does not take objects into
consideration that are:
Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people,
animals or objects
Rabove the detection range, e.g.
overhanging loads, truck overhangs or
loading ramps
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or
slush. They can otherwise not function
correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them
(Y page 309).
Driving systems 185
Driving and parking
Z
Side view
Top view
Front sensors
Center Approx. 40 in (approx.
100 cm)
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.
60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center Approx. 48 in (approx.
120 cm)
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.
80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center Approx. 8 in (approx.
20 cm)
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx.
15 cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, the
relevant warning displays light up and a
warning tone sounds. If the distance falls
below the minimum, the distance may no
longer be shown.
Warning displays
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located
on the dashboard above the center air vents.
The warning display for the rear area is
located on the headliner in the rear
compartment.
Warning display for the front area
:Segments on the left-hand side of the
vehicle
;Segments on the right-hand side of the
vehicle
=Segments showing operational readiness
The warning display for each side of the
vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red
segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if
yellow segments showing operational
readiness = light up.
The selected transmission position and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling
determine which warning display is active
when the engine is running.
186 Driving systems
Driving and parking
Transmission
position
Warning display
DFront area activated
R, N or the vehicle
is rolling
backwards
Rear and front areas
activated
PNo areas activated
One or more segments light up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an
intermittent warning tone for
approximately two seconds.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two
seconds. This indicates that you have now
reached the minimum distance.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
:Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
;Indicator lamp
If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is
deactivated.
iPARKTRONIC is automatically activated
when you turn the SmartKey to position 2
in the ignition lock.
Towing a trailer
! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow
hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC
measures the minimum detection range to
an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball
coupling.
PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area
when you establish an electrical connection
between your vehicle and a trailer.
Driving systems 187
Driving and parking
Z
Problems with PARKTRONIC
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Only the red segments
in the PARKTRONIC
warning displays are lit.
You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after
approximately five
seconds, and the
indicator lamp in the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
XIf problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Only the red segments
in the PARKTRONIC
warning displays are lit.
PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after
approximately five
seconds.
The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
XClean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 309).
XSwitch the ignition back on.
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
ultrasound waves.
XSee if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Active Parking Assist
Important safety notes
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking
aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to
measure the road on both sides of the vehicle.
A suitable parking space is indicated by the
parking symbol. Active steering intervention
can assist you during parking. You may also
use PARKTRONIC (Y page 185). When
PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking
Assist is also unavailable.
GWARNING
The vehicle swings out when parking and in
doing so could cross into the opposite lane.
This could result in a collision with another
road user. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to other road users when
parking. Stop the vehicle if necessary or
cancel the Active Parking Assist parking
procedure.
! If unavoidable, you should drive over
obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at
a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage
the wheels or tires.
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not
a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking
and exiting a parking space. When
maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a
parking space, make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objects in the area in
which you are maneuvering.
188 Driving systems
Driving and parking
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends
Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.
not on the pavement
Parking tips:
ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the
parking space as possible.
RParking spaces that are littered, overgrown
or partially occupied by trailer drawbars
might be identified incorrectly or not at all.
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately.
RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC
(Y page 186) warning messages during the
parking procedure.
RYou can intervene in the steering procedure
to correct it at any time. Active Parking
Assist will then be canceled.
RWhen transporting a load which protrudes
from your vehicle, you should not use
Active Parking Assist.
Rwhen snow chains or an emergency spare
wheel are mounted, you should not use
Active Parking Assist here either.
RMake sure that the tire pressures are
always correct. This has a direct influence
on the parking characteristics of the
vehicle.
Detecting parking spaces
Objects located above the height range of
Active Parking Assist will not be detected
when the parking space is measured. These
are not taken into account when the parking
procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods
vehicles. In some circumstances, Active
Parking Assist may therefore guide you into
the parking space too early.
GWARNING
If there are objects above the detection range,
Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely.
You may cause a collision as a result. There is
a risk of an accident.
If there are objects above the detection range,
stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.
Active Parking Assist is switched on
automatically when driving forwards. The
system is operational at speeds of up to
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in
operation, the system independently locates
and measures parking spaces on both sides
of the vehicle. When driving at speeds below
19 mph (30 km/h), you will see the parking
symbol as a status indicator in the instrument
cluster. By default, Active Parking Assist only
displays parking spaces on the front-
passenger side. Parking spaces on the
driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn
signal on the driver's side is activated. To park
on the driver's side, you must leave the
driver's side turn signal switched on. This
must remain switched on until you
acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist
by pressing the a button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
When a parking space has been detected, an
arrow towards the right or the left also
appears.
Example: detected parking space
:Detected parking space on the left
;Parking symbol
=Detected parking space on the right
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking
spaces:
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
Rthat are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
Rthat are at least 51 in (1.3 m) longer than
your vehicle
Driving systems 189
Driving and parking
Z
A parking space is displayed while you are
driving past it, and until you are
approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.
Parking
GWARNING
Active Parking Assist merely aids you by
intervening actively in the steering. If you do
not brake there is a risk of an accident.
Always apply the brakes yourself when
maneuvering and parking.
iWhen PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,
Active Parking Assist brakes automatically
during the parking process. You are
responsible for braking in good time.
Active Parking Assist does not support you
with parking spaces parallel to the direction
of travel if:
Rthe parking space is on a curb
Rthe system reads the parking space as
being blocked, for example by foliage or
grass paving blocks
Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to
maneuver into
Rthe parking space is bordered by an
obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
XStop the vehicle when the parking space
symbol shows the desired parking space in
the instrument cluster.
XShift the transmission to position R.
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
% message appears in the multifunction
display.
XTo cancel the procedure: press the
% button on the multifunction steering
wheel or pull away.
or
XTo park using Active Parking Assist:
press the a button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings
message appears in the multifunction
display.
XLet go of the multifunction steering wheel.
XBack up the vehicle, being ready to brake
at all times. When backing up, drive at a
speed below approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h). Otherwise Active Parking Assist
will be canceled.
iIn tight parking spaces, you will achieve
the best parking results by backing up as
far as possible. When doing so, also
observe the PARKTRONIC messages.
XStop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
continuous warning tone, if not before.
Maneuvering may be required in tight
parking spaces.
The Park Assist Active Select D
Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
XShift the transmission to position D while
the vehicle is stationary.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings
message appears in the multifunction
display.
iYou will achieve the best results by
waiting for the steering procedure to
complete before pulling away.
XDrive forwards and be ready to brake at all
times.
XStop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
continuous warning tone, if not before.
The Park Assist Active Select R
Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
XFurther transmission shifts may be
necessary.
As soon as the parking procedure is
complete, the Park Assist Disabled
message appears and a warning tone sounds.
Active Parking Assist no longer supports you
with steering interventions. When Active
190 Driving systems
Driving and parking
Parking Assist is finished, you must steer
again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available.
XManeuver if necessary.
XAlways observe the warning messages
displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 186).
Parking tips:
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the
parking space after parking is dependent
on various factors. These include the
position and shape of the vehicles parked
in front and behind it and the conditions of
the location. It may be the case that Active
Parking Assist guides you too far into a
parking space, or not far enough into it. In
some cases, it may also lead you across or
onto the curb. If necessary, you should
cancel the parking procedure with Active
Parking Assist.
RYou can also engage forward gear
prematurely. The vehicle redirects and
does not drive as far into the parking space.
Should a gear be changed too early, the
parking procedure will be canceled. A
sensible parking position can no longer be
achieved from this position.
Exiting a parking space
In order that Active Parking Assist can
support you when you exit the parking space:
Rthe border of the parking space must be
high enough at the front and the rear. A
curb is too small, for example.
Rthe border of the parking space must not
be too wide, as the position of the vehicle
must not exceed an angle of 45° to the
starting position as it is maneuvering into
the parking space.
Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft
(1.0 m) must be available.
XStart the engine.
XSwitch on the turn signal on the side facing
the street.
XShift the transmission to position D or R.
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
% message appears in the multifunction
display.
XTo cancel the procedure: press the
% button on the multifunction steering
wheel or pull away.
or
XTo exit a parking space using Active
Parking Assist: press the a button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings
message appears in the multifunction
display.
XLet go of the multifunction steering wheel.
XReverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being
ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed
a maximum speed of approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking
space. Otherwise Active Parking Assist will
be canceled.
XStop when PARKTRONIC sounds the
continuous warning tone, if not before.
XShift the transmission to position D or R as
required while the vehicle is stationary.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction. The Park Assist
Active Accelerate and Brake
Observe Surroundings message appears
in the multifunction display.
iYou will achieve the best results by
waiting for the steering procedure to
complete before pulling away.
If you back up after activation, the steering
wheel is moved to the straight-ahead
position.
XDrive forwards or back up the vehicle, being
ready to brake at all times.
XStop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
continuous warning tone, if not before.
XDrive forwards and back up as prompted by
the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several
times if necessary.
Driving systems 191
Driving and parking
Z
Once you have exited the parking space
completely, the steering wheel is moved to
the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone
and the Park Assist Finished message
appears in the multifunction display. You will
then have to steer and merge into traffic on
your own. PARKTRONIC is still available.
Canceling Active Parking Assist
You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any
time.
XStop the movement of the multifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Active Parking Assist will be canceled at
once. The Park Assist Canceled
message appears in the multifunction
display.
or
XPress the PARKTRONIC button on the
center console (Y page 187).
PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active
Parking Assist is immediately canceled.
The Park Assist Canceled message
appears in the multifunction display.
Active Parking Assist is canceled
automatically if:
Rthe electric parking brake is engaged
Rtransmission position P is selected
Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no
longer possible
Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph
(10 km/h)
Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The
÷ warning lamp lights up in the
instrument cluster.
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol
disappears and the multifunction display
shows the Park Assist Canceled
message.
If Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must
steer again yourself.
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is
braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the
accelerator again.
Towing a trailer
For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the
minimum length for parking spaces is slightly
increased.
If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle,
you should not use Active Parking Assist.
Once the electrical connection is established
between your vehicle and the trailer, Active
Parking Assist is no longer available.
PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area.
Rear view camera
General notes
:Rear view camera
Rear view camera : is located in the handle
strip of the tailgate.
Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
maneuvering aid. It uses guide lines to show
the area behind your vehicle in the Audio/
COMAND display.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
iThe text of messages shown in the
COMAND display depends on the language
setting. The following are examples of rear
view camera messages in the COMAND
display.
Important safety notes
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not
a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
192 Driving systems
Driving and parking
responsible for safe maneuvering and
parking. When maneuvering or parking, make
sure that there are no persons, animals or
objects in the area in which you are
maneuvering.
Under the following circumstances, the rear
view camera will not function, or will function
in a limited manner:
Rthe tailgate is open
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
Rat night or in very dark places
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in
winter
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In
this event, have the camera position and
setting checked at a qualified specialist
workshop
The field of vision and other functions of the
rear view camera may be restricted due to
additional accessories on the rear of the
vehicle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle
rack).
Activating/deactivating the rear view
camera
XTo activate: make sure that the SmartKey
is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
XMake sure that the "Activation by R gear"
setting is active in COMAND, see the
separate COMAND operating instructions.
XEngage reverse gear.
The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
COMAND display with guide lines.
XTo change the function mode for
vehicles with trailer tow hitch: using the
COMAND controller, select symbol : for
the "Reverse parking" function or
symbol ; for "Coupling up a trailer" (see
the separate COMAND operating
instructions).
The symbol of the selected function is
highlighted.
To deactivate: the rear view camera
deactivates in vehicles with an automatic
transmission if you shift the transmission to
P or after driving forwards a short distance.
Displays in the Audio/COMAND display
The rear view camera may show a distorted
view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
not at all. The rear view camera does not show
objects in the following positions:
Rvery close to the rear bumper
Runder the rear bumper
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
handle
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear section of an HGV
Ra slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the
bottom-most guideline.
Driving systems 193
Driving and parking
Z
:White guide line without turning the
steering wheel, vehicle width including
the exterior mirrors (static)
;Yellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle
=Red guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
?Yellow lane marking tires at current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
AYellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle
BVehicle center axle (marker assistance)
CBumper
DRed guide line at a distance of
approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the
rear of the vehicle
The guide lines are shown when the
transmission is in position R.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Additional messages for vehicles with
PARKTRONIC
:Front warning display
;Additional PARKTRONIC measurement
operational readiness indicator
=Rear warning display
Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: if
PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 186), an
additional operational readiness indicator will
appear in COMAND display ;. If the
PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or
light up, warning displays : and = are also
active or light up correspondingly in the
COMAND display.
"Reverse parking" function
XMake sure that the rear view camera is
activated and the "Reverse parking"
function is selected; see the separate
operating instructions for the audio
system/COMAND.
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
194 Driving systems
Driving and parking
Backing up straight into a parking space
without turning the steering wheel
:White guide line without turning the
steering wheel, vehicle width including
the exterior mirrors (static)
;Red guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
=Yellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle
?Red guide line at a distance of
approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the
rear of the vehicle
XMake sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 193).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
XWith the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
XUsing white guide line : as a guide,
carefully back up until you reach the end
position.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost
parallel in the parking space.
Reverse perpendicular parking with the
steering wheel at an angle
Turning the steering wheel
:Red guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
;Parking space marking
XMake sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 193).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
XDrive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
XWhile the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the
parking space until yellow guide line :
reaches parking space marking ;.
XKeep the steering wheel in that position
and back up carefully.
Backing up with the steering wheel turned
:Red guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
Driving systems 195
Driving and parking
Z
XStop the vehicle when it is almost exactly
in front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as
possible.
Driving to the final position
:White guide line at current steering wheel
angle
;Parking space marking
XTurn the steering wheel to the center
position while the vehicle is stationary.
:Red guide line at a distance of
approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the
rear of the vehicle
;White guide line without turning the
steering wheel
=End of parking space
XBack up carefully until you have reached
the final position.
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in
the parking space.
"Coupling up a trailer" function
This function is only available on vehicles with
a trailer tow hitch and COMAND.
! The following distance specifications
refer to trailer tow hitches with ball
coupling that have been approved for this
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Distances may
differ if you use other ball couplings. In this
case, take into account that actual
distances will not match the following
distance specifications. Otherwise you
could damage the trailer and vehicle.
:Vehicle center point on the yellow guide
line at a distance of approximately 3 ft
(1 m) from the rear of the vehicle
;Trailer drawbar
=Ball coupling
This function is only available on vehicles with
a trailer tow hitch.
XSet the height of trailer drawbar ; so that
it is slightly higher than ball coupling =.
XPosition the vehicle centrally in front of
trailer drawbar ;.
196 Driving systems
Driving and parking
:Ball coupling
;Red guide line at a distance of
approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the ball
coupling
=Trailer drawbar marker assistant
?Trailer drawbar
ASymbol for the "Coupling up a trailer"
function
XSelect symbol A using the COMAND
controller, see COMAND.
The "Coupling up a trailer" function is
selected. The distance specifications now
only apply to objects that are at the same
level as the ball coupling.
XReverse carefully, making sure that trailer
drawbar marker assistant = points
approximately in the direction of trailer
drawbar ?.
XReverse carefully until the trailer
drawbar ? reaches red guide line ;.
XCouple up the trailer (Y page 212).
360° camera
General notes
The 360° camera is a system consisting of
four cameras.
The system analyzes images from the
following cameras:
RRear view camera
RFront camera
RTwo cameras in the exterior rear view
mirrors
The cameras capture the immediate
surroundings of the vehicle. The system
supports you, e.g. when parking or if vision is
restricted at an exit.
The 360° camera images can be shown in full
screen mode or in seven different split-screen
views on the COMAND display. A split-screen
view also includes a top view of the vehicle.
This view is calculated from the data supplied
by the installed cameras (virtual camera).
The seven split-screen views are:
Rtop view and picture from the rear view
camera (130° viewing angle)
Rtop view and picture from the front camera
(without displaying the maximum steering
wheel angle)
Rtop view and enlarged rear view
Rtop view and enlarged front view
Rtop view and trailer view (vehicles with
trailer tow hitch)
Rtop view and pictures from the rearward
facing mirror cameras (rear wheel view)
Rtop view and pictures from the forward
facing mirror cameras (front wheel view)
iThe top view and trailer view are available
for vehicles equipped with a trailer tow
hitch.
When the function is active and you shift the
transmission from position D or R to N, you
see the previous view in the COMAND
display. The dynamic guidelines are hidden.
When you change between transmission
positions D and R, you see the previously
selected front or rear view.
Important safety notes
The 360° camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering and
parking. When maneuvering or parking, make
sure that there are no persons, animals or
objects in the area in which you are
maneuvering.
Driving systems 197
Driving and parking
Z
The 360° camera may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at
all. It cannot show objects in the following
areas:
Runder the front bumper
Rvery close to the front bumper
Rvery close to the rear bumper
Runder the rear bumper
Rin close range above the handle on the
trunk lid
Rvery close to the exterior mirrors
You are always responsible for safety, and
must always pay attention to your
surroundings when parking and
maneuvering. This applies to the areas
behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. You
could otherwise endanger yourself and
others.
The 360° camera will not function or will
function in a limited manner:
Rif the doors are open
Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in
Rthe tailgate is open
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
Rat night or in very dark places
Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright
light
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
Rif you exit a heated garage in winter,
resulting in a rapid change in temperature
Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered
Rif the vehicle components in which the
cameras are installed are damaged. In this
event, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You
can otherwise injure others or cause damage
to objects or the vehicle.
Activation conditions
The 360° camera image can be displayed if:
Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360°
camera
RCOMAND is switched on, see the separate
COMAND operating instructions
Rthe 360° Camera function is activated
Activating the 360° camera using the
SYS button
XPress and hold the W button for longer
than 2 seconds, see the separate COMAND
operating instructions.
Depending on whether position D or R is
engaged, the following is shown:
Rfull screen display with the image from
the front camera
Rfull screen display with the image from
the rear camera
Activating the 360° camera with
COMAND
XPress the W button, see the separate
COMAND operating instructions.
XSelect System by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
XSelect 360° Camera and press W to
confirm.
Depending on whether position D or R is
engaged, the following is shown:
Ra split screen with top view and the
image from the front camera or
Ra split screen with top view and the
image from the rear view camera
For further information about the COMAND
controller, see the separate COMAND
operating instructions.
198 Driving systems
Driving and parking
Activating the 360° camera using
reverse gear
The 360° camera images can be
automatically displayed by engaging reverse
gear.
XMake sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock.
XMake sure that the Activation by R
gear setting is active in COMAND, see the
separate COMAND operating instructions.
XTo show the 360° camera image: engage
reverse gear.
The COMAND display shows the area
behind the vehicle in split screen:
Rvehicle with guide lines
Rtop view of the vehicle
Selecting the split-screen and full
screen displays
XTo switch between split screen views:
switch to the line with the vehicle icons by
sliding ZV the COMAND controller.
XTurn cVd the COMAND controller and
select one of the vehicle symbols.
XTo switch to full screen mode: select
Full Screen by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
Displays in the COMAND display
Important safety notes
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear section of an HGV
Ra slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the
bottom-most guideline.
Top view with picture from the rear view
camera
:Symbol for the split screen setting with
top view and rear view camera image
;Yellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle
=Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
?Yellow lane marking tires at current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
AYellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle
BVehicle center axle (marker assistance)
CRed guide line at a distance of
approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the
rear of the vehicle
DBumper
The guide lines are shown when the
transmission is in position R.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Driving systems 199
Driving and parking
Z
Top view with picture from the front
camera
:Symbol for the split screen setting with
top view and front camera image
;Yellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front
of the vehicle
=Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
?Yellow lane marking tires at current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
AYellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front
of the vehicle
BRed guide line at a distance of
approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the
front of the vehicle
Top view and enlarged rear view
:Symbol for the split screen setting with
top view and rear view camera image
enlarged
;Red guide line at a distance of
approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the
rear of the vehicle
This view assists you in estimating the
distance to the vehicle behind you.
iThis setting can also be selected as an
enlarged front view.
Top view with picture from the mirror
camera
:Symbol for the top view and forward-
facing mirror camera setting
;Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors (right side
of vehicle)
=Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors (left side of
vehicle)
200 Driving systems
Driving and parking
Top view with trailer view
:Symbol for the trailer view setting
;Trailer drawbar marker assistant
=Red guide line at a distance of
approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the ball
coupling
Display with the PARKTRONIC display
Example: full screen mode with PARKTRONIC
display
:Symbol for the full screen setting with rear
view camera image
If the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONIC
and the function is active (Y page 187),
warning displays ; in the COMAND display
are also active or light up accordingly.
PARKTRONIC appears:
Rin split screen view as red or yellow
brackets around the vehicle icon in the top
view, or
Rin the full screen view, on the right-hand
side at the bottom as red or yellow brackets
around the vehicle icon
iThe full screen display can also be
selected as front view.
Exiting 360° camera display mode
As soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of
19 mph (30 km/h) with the function
activated, the function switches off. The
COMAND display switches back to the
previously selected view. You can also switch
the display by selecting the & symbol in the
display and pressing W the COMAND
controller.
ATTENTION ASSIST
Important safety notes
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the
driver. It might not always recognize fatigue
or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to
recognize them at all. The system is not a
substitute for a well-rested and attentive
driver.
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways.
It is active in the range between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical
indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in
concentration on the part of the driver, it
suggests you take a break.
ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of
fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking
the following criteria into account:
Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering
characteristics
Rjourney details, e.g. time of day and length
of journey
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or
not occur at all:
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the
surface is uneven or if there are potholes
Rif there is a strong side wind
Driving systems 201
Driving and parking
Z
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style
with high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration
Rif you are predominantly driving slower
than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than
112 mph (180 km/h)
Rif you are currently using COMAND or
making a telephone call with it
Rif the time has been set incorrectly
Rin active driving situations, such as when
you change lanes or change your speed
Warning and display messages in the
multifunction display
XActivate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
board computer (Y page 229).
If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be
warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your
journey has begun. You then hear an
intermittent warning tone twice and the
Attention Assist: Drowsiness
detected message appears in the
multifunction display.
XIf necessary, take a break.
XPress the a button to confirm the
message.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you
do not take a break, you will be warned again
after 15 minutes at the earliest. The
precondition for this is that
ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical
indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in
concentration.
ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you
continue your journey and starts assessing
your tiredness again if:
Ryou switch off the engine.
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the
driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or
to take a break.
The assistance graphic shows the é
symbol when ATTENTION ASSIST is
deactivated (Y page 228).
Lane Tracking package
General notes
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Spot Assist (Y page 202) and Lane Keeping
Assist (Y page 204).
Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system
to monitor the areas on both sides of your
vehicle. It supports you from a speed of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning
display in the exterior mirrors draws your
attention to vehicles detected in the
monitored area. If you then switch on the
corresponding turn signal to change lanes,
you will also receive a visual and audible
collision warning. Blind Spot Assist uses
sensors in the rear bumper for monitoring
purposes.
For Blind Spot Assist to assist you, the radar
sensor system must be operational.
Important safety notes
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
sufficient distance to the side for other road
users and obstacles.
GWARNING
Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions
carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
iUSA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
202 Driving systems
Driving and parking
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removing, tampering
with, or altering the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Monitoring range of the sensors
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,
snow or spray
Rnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or
bicycles
Rthe road has very wide lanes
Rthe road has narrow lanes
Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane
Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to
10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directly
next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
driving in the middle of their lane. This may
be the case if there are vehicles driving at the
inner edge of their lanes.
Due to the nature of the system:
Rwarnings may be issued in error when
driving close to crash barriers or similar
solid lane borders.
Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
extended period next to long vehicles, such
as trucks.
The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist
are integrated into the sides of the rear
bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of
dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.
The sensors must not be covered, for
example by cycle racks or overhanging loads.
Following a severe impact or in the event of
damage to the bumpers, have the function of
the sensors checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise
not work properly.
Indicator and warning display
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
:Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up
yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h).
At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the
Driving systems 203
Driving and parking
Z
indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist
is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the
corresponding side lights up red. This warning
is always emitted when a vehicle enters the
blind spot monitoring range from behind or
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
the warning only occurs if the difference in
speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot
Assist is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning
lamps is adjusted automatically according to
the ambient light.
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the
corresponding turn signal, a double warning
tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If
the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected
are indicated by the flashing of red warning
lamp :. There are no further warning tones.
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
XMake sure that Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 229) is activated in the on-board
computer.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
light up red for approximately
1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
Towing a trailer
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
correctly established the electrical
connection. This can be accomplished by
checking the trailer lighting. In this event,
Blind Spot Assist is deactivated. The indicator
lamp lights up yellow in the exterior mirrors
and the Blind Spot Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual
message appears in the multifunction
display.
iYou can deactivate the indicator lamps in
the exterior mirrors.
To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist when:
Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock
Rthe engine is not running
Rthe electrical connection to the trailer
has been established
Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle with camera :, which is
mounted at the top of the windshield. Lane
Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the
road and warns you before you leave your
lane unintentionally.
:Active Lane Keeping Assist camera
If you select km on the on-board computer in
the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer
function (Y page 230), Lane Keeping Assist
is active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the
miles display unit is selected, the assistance
range begins at 40 mph.
A warning may be given if a front wheel
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you
by means of intermittent vibration in the
steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
204 Driving systems
Driving and parking
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of
an accident nor override the laws of physics.
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account
the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane
Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
GWARNING
Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly
recognize lane markings.
In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:
Rgive an unnecessary warning
Rnot give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and stay in lane, in particular if
warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
GWARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There
is a risk of an accident.
You should always steer, brake or accelerate
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane
Keeping Assist.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the
vehicle in the lane.
The system may be impaired or may not
function if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to
insufficient illumination of the road, or due
to snow, rain, fog or spray
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
surface is wet)
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vicinity of the camera
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane
markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road
construction work
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
XSwitch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard or Adaptive(Y page 229).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display
(Y page 228) are shown in green. Lane
Keeping Assist is ready for use.
Standard
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Adaptive
When Adaptive is selected, no warning
vibration occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Ryou brake hard.
Driving systems 205
Driving and parking
Z
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when
necessary and in good time if you cross the
lane marking, the system recognizes certain
conditions and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a
highway.
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthe road has narrow lanes.
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
Towing a trailer
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
correctly established the electrical
connection. This can be accomplished by
checking the trailer lighting.
Active Driving Assistance package
General notes
The Active Driving Assistance package
consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 175),
Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 206) and
Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 209).
Active Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor
system to monitor the side areas of your
vehicle which are behind the driver. A warning
display in the exterior mirrors draws your
attention to vehicles detected in the
monitored area. If you then switch on the
corresponding turn signal to change lane, you
will also receive an optical and audible
warning. If a risk of lateral collision is
detected, corrective braking may help you
avoid a collision. To support the course-
correcting brake application, Active Blind
Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar
sensor system. The free space is then
evaluated in the direction of travel and to the
side before a course-correcting brake
application is initiated.
Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you
when driving, the radar sensor system must
be operational.
Important safety notes
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It does
not detect all traffic situations and road users
and is no substitute for attentive driving.
Always ensure that there is sufficient
distance to the side for other road users and
obstacles.
GWARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may
neither give warnings nor intervene in such
situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions
carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
iUSA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removing, tampering
with, or altering the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
206 Driving systems
Driving and parking
iCanada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the
device will void any warranties, and is not
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Monitoring range of the sensors
GWARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all
traffic situations and road users. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always make sure that there is sufficient
distance on the side for other traffic or
obstacles.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or
spray
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect
narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or
bicycles, or may only detect them too late.
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up
to 10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directly
next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.
For this purpose, Active Blind Spot Assist
uses radar sensors in the rear bumper.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
driving in the middle of their lane. This may
be the case if there are vehicles driving at the
inner edge of their lanes.
Due to the nature of the system:
Rwarnings may be issued in error when
driving close to crash barriers or similar
solid lane borders.
Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
extended period next to long vehicles, such
as trucks.
Two Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors
are integrated into the front and rear bumpers
respectively. An additional radar sensor is
located behind the cover in the radiator grill.
Make sure that the sensors and areas around
them are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear
sensors must not be covered, for example by
cycle racks or overhanging cargo. Following
a severe impact or in the event of damage to
the bumpers, have the function of the sensors
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving systems 207
Driving and parking
Z
Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work
properly.
Indicator and warning display
Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at
speeds below approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range
are then not indicated.
:Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,
indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights
up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph
(30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and
Active Blind Spot Assist is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the
corresponding side lights up red. This warning
is always emitted when a vehicle enters the
blind spot monitoring range from behind or
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
the warning only occurs if the difference in
speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. In this event, Active Blind
Spot Assist is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning
lamps is adjusted automatically according to
the ambient light.
Visual and acoustic collision warning
When you switch on the turn signals to
change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the
side monitoring range, you receive a visual
and acoustic collision warning. You then hear
a double warning tone and red warning
lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on,
detected vehicles are indicated by the
flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no
further warning tones.
Course-correcting brake application
GWARNING
A course-correcting brake application cannot
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns
you or makes a course-correcting brake
application. Always maintain a safe distance
at the sides.
In very rare cases, the system may make an
inappropriate brake application. An
inappropriate brake application may be
interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in
the opposite direction or accelerate.
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a
lateral collision in the monitoring range, a
course-correcting brake application is carried
out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a
collision.
The course-correcting brake application is
available in the speed range between
20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
If a course-correcting brake application
occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the
exterior mirror and the following is shown in
the multifunction display, for example:
208 Driving systems
Driving and parking
Either a very slight course-correcting brake
application, or none at all, may occur if:
Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
barriers, located on both sides of your
vehicle.
Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the
side.
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
RESP® is switched off.
Rthe off-road program is activated.
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
detected.
Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
XMake sure that Active Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 229) is activated in the on-board
computer.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
light up red for approximately
1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
Towing a trailer
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
correctly established the electrical
connection. This can be accomplished by
checking the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot
Assist is then deactivated. The indicator lamp
lights up yellow in the exterior mirrors and the
Active Blind Spot Assist Currently
Unavailable See Operator's Manual
message appears in the multifunction
display.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area
in front of your vehicle by means of a
camera : mounted at the top of the
windshield. Active Lane Keeping Assist
detects lane markings on the road and warns
you before you leave your lane
unintentionally. If you do not react to the
warning, a lane-correcting application of the
brakes can bring the vehicle back into the
original lane.
:Active Lane Keeping Assist camera
If you select km on the on-board computer in
the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer
function (Y page 230), Active Lane Keeping
Assist is activated starting at a speed of
60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected,
the assistance range begins at 40 mph.
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active
Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the
risk of accident nor override the laws of
physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into
account the road, traffic and weather
conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for
braking in good time and for staying in your
lane.
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot
continuously keep your vehicle in its lane.
GWARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always
clearly detect lane markings.
Driving systems 209
Driving and parking
Z
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist
can:
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
make a course-correcting brake application
to the vehicle
Rnot give a warning or intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.
Terminate the intervention in a non-critical
driving situation.
The system may be impaired or may not
function if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to
insufficient illumination of the road, or due
to snow, rain, fog or spray
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
surface is wet)
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vicinity of the camera
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane
markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road
construction work
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are highly variable shade conditions
on the roadway
Rno vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane
and there are broken lane markings
Warning vibration in the steering wheel
A warning may be given if a front wheel
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you
by means of intermittent vibration in the
steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
In order that you are warned only when
necessary and in good time if you cross the
lane marking, the system recognizes certain
conditions and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a
highway.
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthe road has narrow lanes.
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
Lane-correcting brake application
GWARNING
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
always bring the vehicle back into the original
lane. There is a risk of an accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns
you or makes a lane-correcting brake
application.
GWARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
traffic conditions or road users. In very rare
cases, the system may make an inappropriate
brake application, e.g. after intentionally
driving over a solid lane marking. There is a
risk of an accident.
An inappropriate brake application may be
interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in
the opposite direction. Always make sure that
there is sufficient distance on the side for
other traffic or obstacles.
If you leave your lane, under certain
circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly
on one side. This is meant to assist you in
bringing the vehicle back to the original lane.
210 Driving systems
Driving and parking
This function is available in the range between
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and
200 km/h).
A lane-correcting brake application can only
be made after driving over a solid,
recognizable lane marking. Before this, a
warning must be given by means of
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel.
In addition, a lane with lane markings on both
sides must be recognized. The brake
application also slightly reduces vehicle
speed.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
the following, for example, appears in the
multifunction display:
iA further lane-correcting brake
application can only occur after your
vehicle has returned to the original lane.
No lane-correcting brake application occurs
if:
Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or
accelerate.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Ryou switch on the turn signals.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind
Spot Assist.
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration.
Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the
electrical connection to the trailer has been
correctly established.
RESP® is switched off.
Rthe transmission is not in position D.
Rthe off-road program is activated.
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has
been detected and displayed.
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
traffic situations or road users. An
inappropriate brake application may be
interrupted at any time if you:
Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction
Ruse a turn signal
Rclearly brake or accelerate
A lane-correcting brake application is
interrupted automatically if:
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind
Spot Assist.
Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.
Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist
XSwitch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard or Adaptive(Y page 229).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display
(Y page 228) are shown in green. Lane
Keeping Assist is ready for use.
If Standard is selected, no warning
vibration occurs if:
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
this event, the warnings are suppressed
for a certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such
as ABS, BAS or ESP®.
When Adaptive is selected, no warning
vibration occurs if:
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
this event, the warnings are suppressed
for a certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Ryou brake hard.
Driving systems 211
Driving and parking
Z
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid
an obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Towing a trailer
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
correctly established the electrical
connection. This can be accomplished by
checking the trailer lighting.
Towing a trailer
Notes on towing a trailer
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, the braking system can overheat. This
increases the stopping distance and can even
cause the braking system to fail. There is a
risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal at the same time.
GWARNING
When the vehicle/trailer combination begins
to lurch, you could lose control of it. The
vehicle/trailer combination could even
rollover. There is a risk of an accident.
On no account should you attempt to
straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination
by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle
speed and do not countersteer. Apply the
brake as necessary.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
Please observe the manufacturer's operating
instructions for the trailer coupling if a
detachable trailer coupling is used.
Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If
you do not couple the trailer to the towing
vehicle correctly, the trailer could become
detached.
Make sure that the following values are not
exceeded:
Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight
Rthe permissible trailer load
Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing
vehicle
Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight of both the towing vehicle and the
trailer
The applicable permissible values, which
must not be exceeded, can be found:
Rin the vehicle documents
Ron the identification plates of the trailer tow
hitch, the trailer and the vehicle
If the values differ, the lowest value applies.
You will find the values approved by the
manufacturer on the vehicle identification
plates and those for the towing vehicle under
"Technical data" (Y page 376).
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
characteristics will be different in comparison
with when driving without a trailer.
The vehicle/trailer combination:
Ris heavier
Ris restricted in its acceleration and
gradient-climbing capability
Rhas an increased braking distance
Ris affected more by strong crosswinds
Rdemands more sensitive steering
Rhas a larger turning radius
This could impair the handling
characteristics.
When towing a trailer, always adjust your
speed to the current road and weather
conditions. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible speed for your vehicle/trailer
combination.
212 Towing a trailer
Driving and parking
General notes
RDo not exceed the legally prescribed
maximum speed for vehicle/trailer
combinations in the relevant country.
This lowers the risk of an accident.
ROnly install an approved trailer coupling on
your vehicle.
Further information on availability and on
installation is available from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not
suitable for installing detachable trailer
couplings.
RDo not install hired trailer couplings or
other detachable trailer couplings on the
bumpers of your vehicle.
RTo reduce the risk of damage to the ball
coupling, remove it from the ball coupling
recess when not in use.
iWhen towing a trailer, set the tire
pressure on the rear axle of the towing
vehicle for a maximum load; see the tire
pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 351).
Please note that when towing a trailer,
PARKTRONIC (Y page 185) is only available
with limitations or not at all.
iOn vehicles without level control, the
height of the ball coupling will alter
according to the load placed on the vehicle.
If necessary, use a trailer with a height-
adjustable drawbar.
You will find installing dimensions and loads
under "Technical data" (Y page 376).
Driving tips
iObserve the notes on ESP® trailer
stabilization (Y page 71).
The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/
trailer combinations depends on the type of
trailer. Before beginning the journey, check
the trailer's documents to see what the
maximum permissible speed is. Observe the
legally prescribed maximum speed in the
relevant country.
For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the
maximum permissible rear axle load is
increased when towing a trailer. Refer to the
"Technical data" section to find out whether
this applies to your vehicle.
If you utilize any of the added maximum rear
axle load when towing a trailer, the vehicle/
trailer combination may not exceed a
maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) for
reasons concerning the operating permit.
This also applies in countries in which the
permissible maximum speed for vehicle/
trailer combinations is above 60 mph
(100 km/h).
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
characteristics will be different in comparison
with when driving without a trailer.
Use the left-hand paddle shifter to shift into
a lower gear in good time on long and steep
downhill gradients.
iThis also applies if you have activated
cruise control.
This will use the braking effect of the engine,
so that less braking will be required to
maintain the speed. This relieves the load on
the brake system and prevents the brakes
from overheating and wearing too quickly. If
you need additional braking, depress the
brake pedal repeatedly rather than
continuously.
Driving tips
RMaintain a greater distance from the
vehicle in front than when driving without a
trailer.
RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake
gently at first to allow the trailer to run on.
Then, increase the braking force rapidly.
RThe values given for gradient-climbing
capabilities from a standstill refer to sea
level. When driving in mountainous areas,
note that the power output of the engine
and, consequently, the vehicle's gradient-
Towing a trailer 213
Driving and parking
Z
climbing capability, decreases with
increasing altitude.
If the trailer swings from side to side:
XDo not accelerate.
XDo not counter-steer.
XBrake if necessary.
Installing the ball coupling
GWARNING
If the ball coupling is not installed and secured
correctly the trailer may come loose. There is
a risk of an accident.
Install and secure the ball coupling as
described in the ball coupling installation
instructions. Make sure that the ball coupling
is installed and secured correctly before every
journey.
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use ball couplings that have been
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
This helps to avoid damage to the vehicle.
Cover cap
XPull protective cap : in the direction of the
arrow, out of ball coupling recess ;.
XStore protective cap : in a safe place.
XObserve the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
GWARNING
If the ball coupling is not installed and secured
correctly it can become detached while the
vehicle is in motion and fall onto the road.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Install and secure the ball coupling as
described in the ball coupling installation
instructions. Make sure that the ball coupling
is installed and secured correctly before every
journey.
Coupling up a trailer
Observe the maximum permissible trailer
dimensions (width and length).
Most U.S. states and all Canadian provinces
require by law:
Rsafety chains between the towing vehicle
and the trailer. The chains should be cross-
wound under the trailer drawbar. They must
be fastened to the vehicle's trailer
coupling, not to the bumper or the axle.
Leave enough play in the chains to make
tight cornering possible.
Ra separate brake system for certain types
of trailer.
Ra safety switch for braked trailers. Check
the specific legal requirements applicable
to your state.
If the trailer detaches from the towing
vehicle, the safety switch applies the
trailer's brakes.
! Do not connect the trailer's brake system
(if featured) to the hydraulic brake system
of the towing vehicle, as the latter is
equipped with an anti-lock brake system.
Doing so will result in a loss of function of
the brake systems of both the vehicle and
the trailer.
iThe vehicle's wiring harness features a
connection to the brake indicator lamp.
XMake sure that the automatic transmission
is set to position P.
XApply the vehicle's parking brake.
XClose all doors and the tailgate.
214 Towing a trailer
Driving and parking
XCouple up the trailer.
XEstablish all electrical connections.
Towing a trailer
There are numerous legal requirements
concerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speed
restrictions. Make sure that your car/trailer
combination complies with the local
regulations:
Rin your place of residence
Rin the location to which you are driving
The police and local authorities can provide
reliable information.
Observe the following when towing a trailer:
RTo gain driving experience and to become
accustomed to the new handling
characteristics, you should practice the
following in a traffic-free location:
-cornering
-stopping
-backing up
RBefore driving, check:
-the trailer tow hitch
-the safety switch for braked trailers
-the safety chains
-electrical connections
-the lights
-the wheels
RAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide an
unobstructed view of the rear section of the
trailer.
RIf the trailer has electronically controlled
brakes, pull away carefully. Brake manually
using the brake controller and check
whether the brakes function correctly.
RSecure any objects on the trailer to prevent
the cargo from slipping when the vehicle is
in motion.
RWhen you couple up a trailer, check at
regular intervals that the load is firmly
secured. If the trailer is equipped with
trailer lights and brakes, check the trailer
to ensure that these are working.
RBear in mind that the handling will be less
stable when towing a trailer than when
driving without one. Avoid sudden steering
movements.
RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier,
accelerates more slowly, has a decreased
gradient climbing capability and a longer
braking distance.
It is more susceptible to side winds and
requires more careful steering.
RIf possible, avoid abrupt braking. Depress
the brake pedal moderately at first, so that
the trailer can activate its own brakes. Then
increase the pressure on the brake pedal.
RIf the automatic transmission repeatedly
shifts between gears on uphill or downhill
gradients, shift to a lower gear using the
left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.
A lower gear and lower speed reduce the
risk of engine failure.
RWhen driving downhill, shift to a lower gear
to utilize the engine's braking effect.
Avoid continuous brake application as this
may overheat the vehicle brakes and, if
installed, the trailer brakes.
RIf the coolant temperature increases
dramatically while the air-conditioning
system is switched on, switch off the air-
conditioning system.
Coolant heat can additionally be dissipated
by opening the windows and by setting the
blower fan and the interior temperature to
maximum.
RWhen overtaking, pay particular attention
to the extended length of your vehicle/
trailer combination.
Due to the length of the vehicle/trailer
combination, you require additional road
space in relation to the vehicle you are
overtaking, before you can change back to
the original lane.
Towing a trailer 215
Driving and parking
Z
Decoupling a trailer
GWARNING
If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun
brake engaged, you could trap your hand
between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.
There is a risk of injury.
Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brake
is engaged.
! Do not disconnect a trailer with an
engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your
vehicle could be damaged by the
rebounding of the overrun brake.
XMake sure that the automatic transmission
is set to position P.
XApply the vehicle's parking brake.
XClose all doors and the tailgate.
XApply the trailer's parking brake.
XRemove the trailer cable and decouple the
trailer.
Permissible trailer loads and drawbar
loads
Weight specifications
The gross trailer weight is calculated by
adding the weight of the trailer to the weight
of the load and equipment on the trailer.
You will find installing dimensions and loads
under "Technical data" (Y page 376).
Loading a trailer
RWhen loading the trailer, make sure that
neither the permissible gross weight of the
trailer nor the gross vehicle weight is
exceeded. The permissible gross vehicle
weight is indicated on the identification
plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of
the vehicle.
You can find the maximum permissible
values on the type plates of your vehicle
and the trailer. When calculating how much
weight the vehicle and trailer may carry,
pay attention to the respective lowest
values.
RThe trailer drawbar load on the ball coupling
must be added to the rear axle load to avoid
exceeding the permissible gross axle
weight. The permissible gross vehicle
weight is indicated on the identification
plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of
the vehicle.
iMercedes-Benz recommends a trailer
load where the trailer drawbar noseweight
accounts for 8% to 15% of the trailer's
permissible gross weight.
iThe weight of other accessories,
passengers and loads reduces:
Rthe permissible trailer load
Rthe permissible noseweight that your
vehicle can tow
Checking the vehicle and trailer weight
RTo ensure compliance of the weight of the
towing vehicle and the trailer with the
maximum permissible values, have the
vehicle/trailer combination (towing vehicle
including driver, passenger, load and fully
laden trailer) weighed on a calibrated
weighbridge.
RCheck the gross axle weight rating of the
front and rear axles, the gross weight of the
trailer and trailer drawbar load.
Removing the ball coupling
XObserve the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
XPress the protective cap into the ball
coupling recess.
XMake sure that the protective cap is firmly
in place.
216 Towing a trailer
Driving and parking
Storing the ball coupling
GWARNING
Do not carry the ball coupling in the vehicle
interior if it is not secured.
Otherwise, you and others could be injured by
the ball coupling being thrown around if you:
Rbrake sharply
Rchange direction suddenly
Rare involved in an accident
XObserve the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Trailer power supply
The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped
at the factory with a permanent power supply.
The permanent power supply is supplied via
trailer socket pin 4.
! You can connect accessories with a
maximum power consumption of 240 W to
the permanent power supply.
You must not charge a trailer battery using
the power supply.
The trailer's permanent power supply is
switched off in the event of low vehicle supply
voltage and after six hours at the latest.
A qualified specialist workshop can provide
more information about installing the trailer
electrics.
Towing a trailer 217
Driving and parking
Z
218
Useful information ............................ 220
Important safety notes .................... 220
Displays and operation .................... 220
Menus and submenus ...................... 223
Display messages ............................. 235
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 261
219
On-board computer and displays
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 27).
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If you operate information systems and
communication equipment integrated in the
vehicle while driving, you will be distracted
from traffic conditions. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the
equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
GWARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or
malfunctioned, you may not recognize
function restrictions in systems relevant to
safety. The operating safety of your vehicle
may be impaired. There is a risk of an
accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked
at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the on-board computer.
The on-board computer only shows messages
or warnings from certain systems in the
multifunction display. You should therefore
make sure your vehicle is operating safely at
all times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not
operating safely may cause an accident.
For an overview, see the instrument panel
illustration (Y page 33).
Displays and operation
Coolant temperature display
GWARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is
overheated or when there is a fire in the
engine compartment could expose you to hot
gases or other service products. There is a
risk of injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
The coolant temperature gauge is in the
instrument cluster on the left-hand side.
Under normal operating conditions and with
the specified coolant level, the coolant
temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
! A display message is shown if the coolant
temperature is too high.
If the coolant temperature is over
248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The
engine will otherwise be damaged.
Tachometer
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as
this could damage the engine.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
220 Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
Outside temperature display
You should pay special attention to road
conditions when temperatures are around
freezing point.
The outside temperature display is in the
multifunction display (Y page 222).
Changes in the outside temperature are
displayed after a short delay.
Speedometer with segments
The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
RCruise control activated (Y page 173):
The segments light up from the stored
speed to the maximum speed.
RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 175):
One or two segments in the set speed
range light up.
RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:
The segments between the speed of the
vehicle in front and the stored speed light
up.
Operating the on-board computer
Overview
The on-board computer is activated as soon
as you turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
ignition lock.
You can control the multifunction display and
the settings in the on-board computer using
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel.
:Multifunction display
;Switches on the Voice Control System;
see the separate operating instructions
=Right control panel
?Left control panel
ABack button
Left control panel
=
;
RCalls up the menu and menu bar
9
:
Press briefly:
RScrolls in lists
RSelects a submenu or function
RIn the Audio menu: selects a
stored station, an audio track or
a video scene
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
switches to the phone book and
selects a name or telephone
number
Displays and operation 221
On-board computer and displays
Z
9
:
Press and hold:
RIn the Audio menu: selects the
previous/next station or selects
an audio track or a video scene
using rapid scrolling
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling of the
phone book if it is open
aRConfirms a selection/display
message
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
RIn the Audio menu: stops the
station search function at the
desired station
Right control panel
~RRejects or ends a call
RExits phone book/redial
memory
6RMakes or accepts a call
RSwitches to the redial memory
W
X
RAdjusts the volume
8RMute
Back button
%Press briefly:
RBack
RSwitches off the Voice Control
System; see the separate
operating instructions
RHides display messages/calls
up the last Trip menu function
used
RExits the telephone book/redial
memory
%Press and hold:
RCalls up the standard display in
the Trip menu
Multifunction display
Values and settings as well as display
messages are shown in the multifunction
display.
:Text field
;Menu bar
=Drive program (Y page 153)
?Transmission position (Y page 153)
ATime
BPermanent display: outside temperature
or speed (Y page 231)
XTo show menu bar;: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
Menu bar ; disappears after a few seconds.
222 Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
Text field : shows the selected menu or
submenu as well as display messages.
iYou can set the time using the audio
system or COMAND, see the separate
operating instructions.
The following messages may appear in the
multifunction display:
ZShift recommendation
(Y page 156)
CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 173)
_Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 116)
¤ECO start/stop function
(Y page 148)
ëHOLD function (Y page 183)
Menus and submenus
Menu overview
Operating the on-board computer
(Y page 221).
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
RTrip menu (Y page 223)
RNavi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 225)
RAudio menu (Y page 226)
RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 227)
RDriveAssist menu (assistance)
(Y page 228)
RServ menu (Y page 230)
RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 230)
The Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly
in vehicles with an audio system and in
vehicles with COMAND. The examples given
in this Operator's Manual apply to vehicles
equipped with COMAND.
Trip menu
Standard display
XPress and hold the % button on the
steering wheel until the Trip menu with
trip odometer : and odometer ; is
shown.
Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Reset"
Example: trip computer "From Start"
:Distance
;Time
=Average speed
?Average fuel consumption
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select
From Start or From Reset.
The values in the From Start submenu are
calculated from the start of a journey,
whereas the values in the From Reset
submenu are calculated from the last time the
submenu was reset (Y page 224).
The From Start trip computer is
automatically reset if:
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
Menus and submenus 223
On-board computer and displays
Z
The From Reset trip computer is
automatically reset if the value exceeds
9,999 hours or 99,999 miles.
Displaying the range and current fuel
consumption
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select the
current fuel consumption and approximate
range.
The approximate range that can be covered
depends on the fuel level and your current
driving style. If there is only a small amount
of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows
a vehicle being refueled C instead of the
range.
ECO display
Example: ECO display
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select
ECO DISPLAY.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO display will be
automatically reset.
Further information on the ECO display
(Y page 167).
Digital speedometer
:Shift recommendation (Y page 156)
;Digital speedometer
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select the
digital speedometer.
Resetting values
Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
XPress the a button.
XPress the : button to select Yes and
press the a button to confirm.
You can reset the values of the following
functions:
RTrip odometer
R"From Start" trip computer
R"From Reset" trip computer
RECO display
iWhen you reset the values in the "ECO
display", the values in the trip computer
"From Start" are likewise reset. When you
reset the values in the trip computer "From
Start", the values in the "ECO display"are
likewise reset.
224 Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Navigation system menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions. For more
information, see the separate operating
instructions.
XSwitch on the audio system with Becker®
MAP PILOT or COMAND; see the separate
operating instructions.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Navi menu.
Route guidance not active
:Direction of travel
;Current road
Route guidance active
No change of direction announced
:Distance to the destination
;Distance to the next change of direction
=Current road
?"Follow the road's course" symbol
Change of direction announced without a
lane recommendation
:Road into which the change of direction
leads
;Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
=Change-of-direction symbol
When a change of direction is announced, you
will see symbol = for the change of direction
and distance graphic ;. The distance
indicator shortens towards the top of the
display as you approach the point of the
announced change of direction.
Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation
:Road into which the change of direction
leads
;Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
=New lane during a change of direction
?Uninterrupted lane
ALane recommendation
BChange-of-direction symbol
On multilane roads, the system can display
lane recommendation A for the next change
of direction. During the change of direction,
additional lanes may be displayed.
Lane recommendations are only displayed if
the relevant data is available on the digital
map.
Menus and submenus 225
On-board computer and displays
Z
Other status indicators of the
navigation system
RO: you have reached the destination or an
intermediate destination.
RNew Route... or Calculating Route:
calculating a new route
ROff Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicle
position is outside the area of the digital
map (off-map position).
RNo Route: no route could be calculated to
the selected destination.
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
:Waveband
;Station frequency with memory position
iStation ; is displayed with the station
frequency or station name. The memory
position is only displayed along with
station ; if this has been stored.
XSwitch on the audio system or COMAND
and select Radio (see the separate
operating instructions).
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
XTo select a stored station: briefly press
the 9 or : button.
XTo select a station from the station
list: press and briefly hold the 9
or : button.
If no station list is received:
XTo select a station using the station
search: press and briefly hold the 9
or : button.
iSIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
normal radio.
For more information on satellite radio
operation, see the separate operating
instructions.
iFor information on switching waveband
and storing stations; see the separate
operating instructions.
Operating an audio player or audio
media
Example: CD/DVD changer display
:Current title
Audio data from various audio devices or
media can be played, depending on the
equipment installed in the vehicle.
XSwitch on the audio system or COMAND
and select the audio player or medium, see
the separate operating instructions.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
XTo select the next/previous track:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
XTo select a track from the track list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the
9 or : button until desired track has
been reached.
If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapid
scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio
drives or data carriers support this function.
If track information is stored on the audio
device or medium, the multifunction display
will show the number and name of the track.
The current track does not appear in audio
AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
audio source connected).
226 Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Video DVD operation
Example: CD/DVD changer display
:Current scene
XSwitch on COMAND and select video DVD;
see the separate operating instructions.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
XTo select the next/previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
XTo select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the
9 or : button until desired scene
has been reached.
Telephone menu
Introduction
GWARNING
If you operate information systems and
communication equipment integrated in the
vehicle while driving, you will be distracted
from traffic conditions. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the
equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
When telephoning, you must observe the
legal requirements for the country in which
you are currently driving.
XSwitch on your mobile phone and audio
system or COMAND, see the separate
operating instructions.
XEstablish a Bluetooth® connection to the
audio system or COMAND; see the
separate operating instructions.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
You will see one of the following display
messages in the multifunction display:
RPhone READY or the name of the network
provider: the mobile phone has found a
network and is ready to receive.
RPhone No Service: there is no network
available or the mobile phone is searching
for a network.
Accepting a call
If someone calls you when you are in the
Tel menu, a display message appears in the
multifunction display, for example:
Example: incoming call
XPress the 6 button on the steering
wheel to accept an incoming call.
You can accept a call even if you are not in
the Tel menu.
Rejecting or ending a call
XPress the ~ button on the steering
wheel.
You can end or reject a call even if you are not
in the Tel menu.
Menus and submenus 227
On-board computer and displays
Z
Dialing an entry from the phone book
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
XPress the 9, : or a button to
switch to the phone book.
XPress the 9 or : button to select the
desired name.
or
XTo begin rapid scrolling: press and hold
the 9 or : button for longer than
one second.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
XIf only one telephone number is stored
for a name: press the 6 or a button
to start dialing.
or
XIf there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
XPress the 9 or : button to select the
number you want to dial.
XPress the 6 or a button to start
dialing.
or
XTo exit the telephone book: press the
~ or % button.
Redialing
The on-board computer saves the last names
or numbers dialed in the redial memory.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
XPress the 6 button to switch to the
redial memory.
XPress the 9 or : button to select the
desired name or number.
XPress the 6 or a button to start
dialing.
or
XIf you do not want to make a call: press
the ~ or % button.
Assistance menu
Introduction
In the DriveAssist menu, you have the
following options:
RDisplaying the assistance graphic
(Y page 228)
RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake
(Y page 229)
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION
ASSIST (Y page 229)
RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 229)
RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist
(Y page 229)
Displaying the assistance graphic
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
XPress 9 or : to select Assistance
Graphic.
XPress the a button.
The multifunction display shows the
DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the
assistance graphic (Y page 180).
The assistance graphic can display the status
of and information from other driving systems
or driving safety systems.
The assistance graphic shows:
Rthe é symbol when ATTENTION ASSIST
(Y page 201) is deactivated.
Rthe lane markings as bright lines when Lane
Keeping Assist (Y page 204) or Active Lane
Keeping Assist (Y page 209) is activated.
228 Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Rthe æ symbol when PRE-SAFE® Brake
(Y page 72) is deactivated.
Rthe è symbol, when the rear window
wiper (Y page 123) is activated.
Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®
Brake
PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
with DISTRONIC PLUS.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select
PRE-SAFE Brake.
XPress the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
XTo activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the
assistance graphic shows the æ symbol
in the multifunction display.
If the PRE-SAFE Brake: Sensors
Deactivated message appears, the radar
sensor system is deactivated.
XSwitch on the radar sensor system
(Y page 233).
For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake,
see (Y page 72).
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION
ASSIST
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select
Attention Assist.
XPress the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
XTo activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated,
the é symbol appears in the
multifunction display in the assistance
graphics display.
For further information about ATTENTION
ASSIST, see (Y page 201).
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot
Assist
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select
Blind Spot Assist.
XPress the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
XTo activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
If the Blind Spot Assist Sensors
Deactivated or Act. Blind Spot Asst.
Sensors Deactivated message appears,
the radar sensor system is deactivated.
XSwitch on the radar sensor system
(Y page 233).
For further information about Blind Spot
Assist, see (Y page 202).
For further information about Active Blind
Spot Assist, see (Y page 206).
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select
Lane Keep. Asst.
XPress the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to set Off,
Standard or Adaptive.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane
Keeping Assist is activated, the
multifunction display shows the lane
Menus and submenus 229
On-board computer and displays
Z
markings as bright lines in the assistance
graphic.
For further information about Lane Keeping
Assist, see (Y page 204).
For further information about Active Lane
Keeping Assist, see (Y page 209).
Maintenance menu
In the Service menu, you have the following
options:
RCalling up display messages
(Y page 235)
RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning
system (Canada only) (Y page 337)
RChecking the tire pressure electronically
(USA only) (Y page 338)
RCalling up the service due date
(Y page 300)
Settings menu
Introduction
In the Settings menu, you have the following
options:
RChanging the instrument cluster settings
(Y page 230)
RChanging the light settings (Y page 231)
RChanging the vehicle settings
(Y page 232)
RChanging the convenience settings
(Y page 233)
RRestoring the factory settings
(Y page 234)
Instrument cluster
Selecting the unit of measurement for
distance
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
function allows you to choose whether
certain displays appear in kilometers or miles
in the multifunction display.
You can determine whether the multifunction
display shows some messages in miles or
kilometers.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Instr. Cluster submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
function.
You will see the selected setting: km or
miles.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
The selected unit of measurement for
distance applies to:
Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu
Rthe odometer and the trip odometer
Rthe trip computer
Rcurrent consumption and the range
Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi
menu
Rcruise control
RDISTRONIC PLUS
RASSYST PLUS service interval display
230 Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Selecting the permanent display function
You can determine whether the multifunction
display permanently shows your speed or the
outside temperature.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Settings
menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument Cluster submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Permanent Display: function.
You will see the selected setting Outside
Temperature or Additional
Speedometer [km/h]/Additional
Speedometer [mph].
XPress the a button to save the setting.
Lights
Switching the daytime running lamps on/
off
Daytime running lamps are required by law
(Canada only). You cannot set the "daytime
running lamps" function via the on-board
computer.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Day Lights function.
If the Day Lights function has been
switched on, the cone of light and the
W symbol in the multifunction display
are shown in orange.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
Further information on daytime running
lamps (Y page 113).
Setting the brightness of the display/
switch
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Brightness Display/Switches:
function.
You will see the selected setting.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to adjust the
brightness to any level from Level 1 to
Level 5 (bright).
XPress the a or % button to save the
setting.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/
off
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Adapt. Highbeam function.
If the Adapt. Highbeam function has been
switched on, the cone of light and the
_ symbol in the multifunction display
are shown in orange.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
For further information about Adaptive
Highbeam Assist, see (Y page 116).
Activating/deactivating surround
lighting and exterior lighting delayed
switch-off
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Settings
menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
Menus and submenus 231
On-board computer and displays
Z
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Surround Lighting function.
When the Surround Lighting function is
activated, the light cone and the area
around the vehicle are displayed in orange
in the multifunction display.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the
exterior lighting temporarily:
XBefore leaving the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is
deactivated.
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is
reactivated the next time you start the
engine.
If you have activated the Surround
Lighting function and the light switch is set
to Ã, the following functions are activated
when it is dark:
Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting
remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking
with the SmartKey. If you start the engine,
the surround lighting is switched off and
automatic headlamp mode is activated
(Y page 113).
Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
exterior lighting remains lit for
60 seconds after the engine is switched off.
If you close all the doors and the tailgate,
the exterior lighting goes off after
5 seconds.
iDepending on your vehicle's equipment,
when the surround lighting and delayed
switch-off exterior lighting are on, the
following light up:
RParking lamps
RFront fog lamps
RLow-beam headlamps
RDaytime running lamps
RSide marker lamps
RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors
Activating/deactivating the interior
lighting delayed switch-off
If you activate the Interior Lighting
Delay function, the interior lighting remains
on for 20 seconds after you remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Interior Lighting Delay function.
If the Interior Lighting Delay function
has been switched on, the vehicle interior
is displayed in orange in the multifunction
display.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
Vehicle
Activating/deactivating the automatic
door locking mechanism
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Auto. Door Locks function.
When the Auto. Door Locks function is
activated, the vehicle doors are displayed
in orange in the multifunction display.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
If you activate the Auto. Door Locks
function, the vehicle is centrally locked above
a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).
For further information on the automatic
locking feature, see (Y page 82).
232 Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
locking verification signal
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function,
an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the
vehicle.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Acoustic Lock function.
If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,
the & symbol in the multifunction
display lights up orange.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
Activating/deactivating the radar sensor
system
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the 9 or : button to select
Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):.
You will see the selected setting: Enabled
or Disabled.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
The following systems are switched off when
the radar sensor system is deactivated:
RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 175)
RBAS PLUS (Y page 68)
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 72)
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 202)
RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 206)
Convenience
Activating/deactivating the EASY-
ENTRY/EXIT feature
GWARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is
making adjustments, make sure that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the
steering wheel.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rpress one of the memory function position
buttons, or
Rmove the switch for steering wheel
adjustment in the opposite direction to that
in which the steering wheel is moving.
The adjustment process is stopped.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Easy Entry/Exit function.
If the Easy Entry/Exit function is
activated, the vehicle steering wheel is
displayed in orange in the multifunction
display.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature (Y page 105).
Switching the belt adjustment on/off
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
Menus and submenus 233
On-board computer and displays
Z
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Belt Adjustment function.
When the Belt Adjustment function is
activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed
in orange in the multifunction display.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
For further information on belt adjustment,
see (Y page 58).
Switching the fold-in mirrors with the
locking feature on/off
This function is only available on vehicles with
the memory function (Y page 109).
This function is only available in Canada.
When you activate the Auto. Mirror
Folding function, the exterior mirrors are
folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you
unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the
exterior mirrors fold out again.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Auto. Mirror Folding function.
If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is
activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is
displayed in orange in the multifunction
display.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
If you have switched the Auto. Mirror
Folding function on and you fold the exterior
mirrors in using the button on the door
(Y page 107), they will not fold out
automatically. The exterior mirrors can then
only be folded out using the button on the
door.
Restoring the factory settings
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Factory Setting submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
The Reset All Settings? message
appears.
XPress the : or 9 button to select
No or Yes.
XPress the a button to confirm the
selection.
If you have selected Yes, the multifunction
display shows a confirmation message.
For safety reasons, the Day Lights function
in the Lights submenu is only reset if the
vehicle is stationary.
234 Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's
Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in
this Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function
(Y page 183) and parking (Y page 164).
Hiding display messages
XPress the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority
display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the
messages have been remedied.
Message memory
The message memory allows you to call up previous display messages.
XPress the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, for example.
XPress the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
Display messages 235
On-board computer and displays
Z
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!÷
Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability
Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill
start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are temporarily
unavailable.
BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.
Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XCarefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering
movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
÷
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and
ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.
BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
236 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XCarefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering
movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
T!
÷
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-
SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer
stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.
BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
F(USA
only)J(Canada
only)
Please Release
Parking Brake
You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also
sounds.
XRelease the parking brake.
Display messages 237
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
$(USA
only)J(Canada
only)
Check Brake Fluid
Level
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning
lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone
sounds.
GWARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
XDo not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
#
Check Brake Pad
Wear
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
G
Inoperative
One or more main features of the mbrace system are
malfunctioning.
XHave the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant
safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
238 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
PRE-SAFE
Functions
Currently Limited
See Operator's
Manual
PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display
message disappears.
PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XClean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper
(Y page 309).
XRestart the engine.
PRE-SAFE
Functions Limited
See Operator's
Manual
PRE-SAFE® Brake is inoperative due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS
or the distance warning signal may also have failed.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
6
SRS Malfunction
Service Required
There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument
cluster.
GWARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
For further information about SRS, see (Y page 43).
Display messages 239
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
Front Left
Malfunction
Service
Required or Front
Right Malfunction
Service Required
SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6
warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
GWARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
6
Rear Left
Malfunction
Service
Required or Rear
Right Malfunction
Service Required
GWARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6
warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
6
Rear Center
Malfunction
Service Required
GWARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
SRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6 warning lamp
also lights up in the instrument cluster.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
6
Left Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction
Service
Required or Right
Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction
Service Required
There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window
curtain air bag.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
GWARNING
The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
240 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled
See Operator's
Manual
The front-passenger air bag is disabled during the journey, even
though:
Ran adult
or
Ra person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-
passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may
interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
GWARNING
The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.
There is an increased risk of injury.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XSwitch the ignition off.
XHave the occupant get out of the vehicle.
XKeep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
XObserve the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the
following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and
remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-
passenger air bag (Y page 49).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See
Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in
the multifunction display.
XWait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary
system checks have been completed.
XMake sure that the display messages do not appear in the
multifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating
correctly.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages 241
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
For further information about the Occupant Classification System,
see (Y page 49).
Front Passenger
Airbag Enabled
See Operator's
Manual
The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even
though:
Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the
system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger
seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional
weight on the seat.
GWARNING
The air bag may deploy unintentionally.
There is an increased risk of injury.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XSwitch the ignition off.
XOpen the front-passenger door.
XRemove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
XMake sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and
interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually
is.
XKeep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
XObserve the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the
following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and
remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant
Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag
(Y page 49).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See
Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in
the multifunction display.
242 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
XWait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary
system checks have been completed.
XMake sure that the display messages do not appear in the
multifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating
correctly.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System,
see (Y page 49).
Lights
iDisplay messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
Check Left
Cornering
LightorCheck Right
Cornering Light
The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 119).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Low
BeamorCheck Right
Low Beam
The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 119).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Trailer Left
Tail LamporCheck
Trailer Right Tail
Lamp
The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty.
XObserve the separate operating instructions provided by the
trailer manufacturer.
Display messages 243
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
Check Trailer Left
Turn SignalorCheck
Trailer Right Turn
Signal
The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is defective.
XObserve the separate operating instructions provided by the
trailer manufacturer.
b
Check Trailer
Brake Lamp
The trailer brake lamp is defective.
XObserve the separate operating instructions provided by the
trailer manufacturer.
b
Check Rear Left
Turn SignalorCheck
Rear Right Turn
Signal
The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Front Left
Turn SignalorCheck
Front Right Turn
Signal
The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 119).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Mirror
Turn SignalorCheck
Right Mirror Turn
Signal
The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is
defective.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Center Brake
Lamp
The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Tail
and Brake
LampsorCheck Right
Tail and Brake
Lamps
The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
244 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
Check Left High
Beam or Check Right
High Beam
The left or right-hand high beam is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 119).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left License
Plate Lamp or Check
Right License
Plate Lamp
The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Fog
Lamp or Check Right
Fog Lamp
The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Rear Fog Lamp
The rear fog lamp is defective.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Front Left
Parking
Lamp or Check Front
Right Parking Lamp
The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 119).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Reverse
Lamp or Check Right
Reverse Lamp
The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 119).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Front Left
Sidemarker
Lamp or Check Front
Right Sidemarker
Lamp
The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 245
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
Check Rear Left
Sidemarker
Lamp or Check Rear
Right Sidemarker
Lamp
The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Daytime
Running
Light or Check
Right Daytime
Running Light
The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Active Headlamps
Inoperative
The active light function is defective.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
The exterior lighting is defective.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
The exterior lighting is defective.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
The light sensor is defective.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Switch Off Lights
The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
XTurn the light switch to Ã.
246 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Inoperative
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily
inoperative. Possible causes are:
Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
XClean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,
the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available again
message is displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Engine
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
+
Check Coolant
Level See
Operator's Manual
The coolant level is too low.
! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
XAdd coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 304).
XIf coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
?The fan motor is faulty.
XAt coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †) drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
XAvoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
Display messages 247
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn
Engine Off
The coolant is too hot.
A warning tone also sounds.
GWARNING
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XWait until the engine has cooled down.
XMake sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
XDo not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †).
Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
XPay attention to the coolant temperature display.
XIf the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
248 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#The battery is not being charged.
A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes are:
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XOpen the hood.
XCheck whether the poly-V-belt is torn.
If the poly-V-belt is torn:
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
4
Check Engine Oil
At Next Refueling
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
A warning tone also sounds.
XCheck the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
(Y page 303).
XIf necessary, add engine oil (Y page 303).
XHave the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
8
Fuel Level Low
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
XRefuel at the nearest gas station.
CThere is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.
XRefuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
Display messages 249
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
8
Gas Cap Loose
The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
XCheck that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
XClose the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
¸
Replace Air Filter
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must
be replaced.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
!
Check Fuel Filter
Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The
water must be drained off.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
¯
Refill AdBlue At
Workshop See
Operator's Manual
The DEF level has fallen below the reserve range. A warning tone
also sounds.
XHave DEF refilled as soon as possible at a qualified specialist
workshop.
¯
Refill AdBlue At
Workshop No Start
in .. km
The DEF level is only sufficient for the indicated distance. A
warning tone also sounds.
XHave DEF refilled as soon as possible at a qualified specialist
workshop.
¯
Refill AdBlue At
Workshop Eng.
Start Not Possible
The DEF tank is empty. A warning tone also sounds. You can no
longer start the engine.
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
¯
Check AdBlue See
Operator's Manual
The DEF system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
250 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
¯
Eng. Start Not
Possible in ..km
The DEF system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
¯
Eng. Start Not
Possible
The DEF system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.
You can no longer start the engine.
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Driving systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
À
Attention Assist:
Take a Break!
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue
or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
also sounds.
XIf necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À
Attention Assist
Inoperative
ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
ë
Off
The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.
A warning tone also sounds.
XReactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 183).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly
depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
A warning tone also sounds.
XCheck the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 183).
Radar Sensors
Deactivated See
Operator's Manual
The radar sensor system is deactivated.
XSwitch on the radar sensor system (Y page 233).
Display messages 251
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Lane Keeping
Assist Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's
Manual or Active
Lane Keeping
Assist Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated
and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display
message disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XClean the windshield.
Lane Keeping
Assist
Inoperative or Activ
e Lane Keeping
Assist Inoperative
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
252 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Blind Spot Assist
Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's
Manual or Active
Blind Spot Assist
Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily
inoperative. Possible causes are:
Rthe sensors are dirty.
Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
mirrors.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display
message disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XClean the sensors (Y page 309).
XRestart the engine.
Blind Spot Assist
Inoperative or Activ
e Blind Spot
Assist Inoperative
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
mirrors.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Park Assist
Canceled
The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been
fastened.
XRepeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel
while steering intervention was active.
XWhile steering intervention is active, make sure that the
multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.
XUse Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 188).
Display messages 253
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Park Assist
Inoperative
You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking
maneuvers.
Active Parking Assist will become available again after
approximately ten minutes (Y page 188).
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSwitch off and restart the engine.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
PARKTRONIC is defective.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Park Assist
Finished
The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.
The display message disappears automatically.
DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 175). If it was
deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS Now
Available
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been
temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 175).
DISTRONIC PLUS
Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display
message disappears.
DISTRONIC is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XClean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper
(Y page 309).
XRestart the engine.
254 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
DISTRONIC PLUS
Inoperative
DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake
may also have failed.
A warning tone also sounds.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
DISTRONIC PLUS
Passive
You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
XRemove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS
- - - mph
An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.
XCheck the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 175).
Cruise Control
Inoperative
Cruise control is defective.
A warning tone also sounds.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control
- - - mph
A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for
example.
XIf conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
store the speed.
XCheck the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 173).
Display messages 255
On-board computer and displays
Z
Tires
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Check
Tire Pressure Soon
Canada only:
The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
loss in pressure.
A warning tone also sounds.
GWARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
XStop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XCheck the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 314).
XCheck the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire
pressure.
XRestart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire
pressure is correct (Y page 337).
Check Tire Pressure
Then Restart Run
Flat Indicator
Canada only:
The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display
message and has not been restarted since.
XSet the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
XRestart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 337).
Run Flat Indicator
Inoperative
Canada only:
The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Correct
Tire Pressure
The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
XCheck the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 338).
XIf necessary, correct the tire pressure.
XRestart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 341).
256 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Check
Tires
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
A warning tone also sounds.
GWARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
XStop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XCheck the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 314).
XCheck the tire pressure (Y page 338).
XIf necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Warning
Tire Malfunction
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The
wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.
GWARNING
If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire.
There is a risk of an accident.
XStop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XCheck the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 314).
Display messages 257
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tire Press. Monitor
Currently
Unavailable
Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received
from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily
malfunctioning.
XDrive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been solved.
TirePress.
Sensor(s) Missing
There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the
multifunction display.
XHave the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Inoperative No
Wheel Sensors
The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.
The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
XMount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving
for a few minutes.
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Inoperative
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Shift to 'P' or 'N'
to Start Engine
You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
position R or D.
XShift the transmission to position P or N.
Risk of Rolling
Shift to 'P'
You have attempted to stop the engine with the Start/Stop button
while the transmission was not in position P.
XShift the transmission to position P.
AThe tailgate is open.
GWARNING
When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
interior if the tailgate is open.
There is a risk of poisoning.
XClose the tailgate.
258 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?The hood is open.
GWARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XClose the hood.
CAt least one door is open.
XClose all the doors.
Ð
Power Steering
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
The power steering is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
GWARNING
You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
XCheck whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
XIf you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
specialist workshop.
XIf you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/
receiver range.
XWait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
¥
Check Washer Fluid
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
XAdd washer fluid (Y page 305).
Display messages 259
On-board computer and displays
Z
SmartKey
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Â
Key Does Not
Belong to Vehicle
You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.
XUse the correct SmartKey.
Â
Take Your Key from
Ignition
The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.
XRemove the SmartKey.
Â
Obtain a New Key
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Â
Replace Key Battery
The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.
XChange the batteries (Y page 79).
Â
Don't Forget Your
Key
The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and
is only a reminder.
You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.
The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.
XRemember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you
leave the vehicle.
Â
Key Not Detected 
(red display message)
The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.
A warning tone also sounds.
If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
centrally or start the engine.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164)
(Y page 164).
XLocate the KEYLESS-GO key.
The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running
because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.
A warning tone also sounds.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XOperate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
260 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Â
Key Not Detected 
(white display
message)
The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.
XChange the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO
functions in the vehicle.
If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
XOperate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Â
Key Detected in
Vehicle
The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during
locking.
XRemove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.
Â
Remove 'Start'
Button and Insert
Key
The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.
KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A
warning tone also sounds.
XInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
desired position.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Â
Close Doors to
Lock Vehicle
At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.
XClose all doors and lock the vehicle again.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Seat belts
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ü
After starting the
engine, the red seat
belt warning lamp lights
up for 6 seconds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
to fasten their seat belts.
XFasten your seat belt (Y page 58).
ü
After starting the
engine, the red seat
belt warning lamp lights
up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds
for up to six seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
XFasten your seat belt (Y page 58).
The warning tone ceases.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 261
On-board computer and displays
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ü
The red seat belt
warning lamp lights up
after the engine starts,
as soon as the driver's
or the front-passenger
door is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
XFasten your seat belt (Y page 58).
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
XRemove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü
The red seat belt
warning lamp flashes
and an intermittent
audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The
car is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly
been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
XFasten your seat belt (Y page 58).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The car is being
driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven
faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
XRemove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
262 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Safety systems
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
The red brake system
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is
running. A warning tone
also sounds.
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
GWARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XDo not add brake fluid. Topping up will not remedy the
malfunction.
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
!
The yellow ABS warning
lamp is lit while the
engine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) is deactivated due to a malfunction.
BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability
Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill
start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are therefore also
deactivated, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic
transmission, will not be available.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 263
On-board computer and displays
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
The yellow ABS warning
lamp is lit while the
engine is running.
ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, EBD
(electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®,
PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist and
ESP® trailer stabilization are therefore also deactivated, for
example.
Possible causes are:
RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.
RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident.
XCarefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering
movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
264 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
The yellow ABS warning
lamp is lit while the
engine is running. A
warning tone also
sounds.
EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, BAS, BAS
PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function,
hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are also unavailable,
for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
֌!
The red brake warning
lamp, the yellow ESP®
and ESP® OFF warning
lamps and the yellow
ABS warning lamp are
lit while the engine is
running.
ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore,
BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD
function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are also
unavailable, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 265
On-board computer and displays
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
֊
The yellow ESP®
warning lamp flashes
while the vehicle is in
motion.
ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of
skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
XWhen pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary.
XEase off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
XAdapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
XDo not deactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 70).
å
The yellow ESP® OFF
warning lamp is lit while
the engine is running.
ESP® is deactivated.
GWARNING
If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XReactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 70).
XAdapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:
XDrive on carefully.
XHave ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
÷äå
The yellow ESP® and
ESP® OFF warning
lamps are lit while the
engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD
function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are
unavailable due to a malfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
266 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
֌
The yellow ESP® and
ESP® OFF warning
lamps are lit while the
engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and
ESP® trailer stabilization are temporarily unavailable.
BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XCarefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering
movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
6
The red SRS warning
lamp is lit while the
engine is running.
There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System).
GWARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
XDrive on carefully.
XHave SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System,
see (Y page 43).
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 267
On-board computer and displays
Z
Engine
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
;
The yellow Check
Engine warning lamp
lights up while the
engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
Rin the engine management
Rin the fuel injection system
Rin the exhaust system
Rin the ignition system
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may
be in emergency mode.
XHave the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop.
iIn some states, you must immediately visit a qualified
specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning
lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in
these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations
apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
8
The yellow reserve fuel
warning lamp flashes
while the vehicle is in
motion. In addition,
the ; Check Engine
warning lamp may light
up.
The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XCheck that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
XIf the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler
cap.
XIf the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist
workshop.
8
The yellow reserve fuel
warning lamp lights up
while the engine is
running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
XRefuel at the nearest gas station.
268 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
The red coolant
warning lamp lights up
while the engine is
running and the coolant
temperature gauge is
at the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is
defective.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a
risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue
driving under any circumstances.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 269
On-board computer and displays
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
The red coolant
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is
running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator
may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be
malfunctioning.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XWait until the engine has cooled down.
XMake sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
XCheck the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 304). Observe
the warning notes.
XIf you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
XAt coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †) drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
XAvoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
?
The red coolant
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is
running. A warning tone
also sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The
airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level
may be too low.
GWARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XWait until the engine has cooled down.
270 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
XMake sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
XCheck the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 304). Observe
the warning notes.
XIf you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
XAt coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †) drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
XAvoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
·
The red distance
warning lamp lights up
while the vehicle is in
motion.
GWARNING
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed
selected.
There is a risk of an accident.
XIncrease the distance.
·
The red distance
warning lamp lights up
while the vehicle is in
motion. A warning tone
also sounds.
GWARNING
You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line
of travel at too high a speed.
There is a risk of an accident.
XBe prepared to brake immediately.
XPay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
brake or take evasive action.
More information about DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 175) and
PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 72).
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 271
On-board computer and displays
Z
Tires
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h
The yellow tire pressure
monitor warning lamp
(pressure loss/
malfunction) is lit.
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at
least one of the tires.
GWARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
XStop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 164).
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XCheck the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 314).
XCheck the tire pressure (Y page 338).
XIf necessary, correct the tire pressure.
h
The yellow tire pressure
monitor warning lamp
(pressure loss/
malfunction) flashes for
approximately one
minute and then
remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
GWARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire
pressure.
There is a risk of an accident.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
272 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Useful information ............................ 274
Loading guidelines ............................ 274
Stowage areas .................................. 275
Features ............................................. 282
273
Stowage and features
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 27).
Loading guidelines
GWARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury,
particularly in the event of sudden braking or
a sudden change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
GWARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running,
particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust
fumes could enter the passenger
compartment. There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the
tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicle
weight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, spare
wheel, installed accessories, vehicle
occupants and luggage/cargo.
The gross load limit and the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle must
never be exceeded. The gross load limit and
the GVWR are specified on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar of the
driver's door (Y page 342).
The load must also be distributed so that the
weight on each axle never exceeds the gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) for the front and
rear axles. The specifications for GVWR and
GAWR are on the vehicle identification plate
on the B-pillar of the driver's door
(Y page 342).
Further information can be found in the
"Loading the vehicle" section (Y page 342).
The handling characteristics of a laden
vehicle are dependent on the distribution of
the load within the vehicle. For this reason,
you should observe the following notes when
transporting a load:
RThe cargo compartment is the preferred
place to carry objects.
RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as
possible and as low down in the cargo
compartment as possible.
RThe load must not protrude above the
upper edge of the seat backrests.
RAlways place the load against the rear or
front seat backrests. Make sure that the
seat backrests are securely locked into
place.
RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
RUse the cargo tie down rings and the parcel
nets to transport loads and luggage.
RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening
materials appropriate for the weight and
size of the load.
RHook in the cargo net (if installed) when
loading.
RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edges
for protection.
274 Loading guidelines
Stowage and features
Stowage areas
Stowage space
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
thrown around in such situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets
or stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces while
driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the cargo compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 274).
Stowage compartments in the front
Glove box
XTo open: pull handle : and open glove box
flap ;.
XTo close: fold glove box flap ; upwards
until it engages.
The glove box can only be locked and
unlocked using the mechanical key.
XTo lock: insert the mechanical key into the
lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position
2.
XTo unlock: insert the mechanical key into
the lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise
to position 1.
iThe glove box can be ventilated
(Y page 141).
Stowage compartment under the armrest
XTo open: press left-hand button ; or right-
hand button :.
The stowage compartment opens.
iDepending on the vehicle's equipment, a
USB connection and an AUX IN connection
or a Media Interface are installed in the
stowage compartment. A Media Interface
is a universal interface for portable audio
equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player
(see the separate Audio or COMAND
Operating Instructions).
Stowage areas 275
Stowage and features
Z
Stowage space in the rear
Stowage compartment in the rear
! Do not sit on or support your body weight
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
down, as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cover of the stowage
compartment before folding the rear seat
armrest back into the seat backrest.
XTo open: fold down seat armrest ;.
XFold cover : of the armrest upwards.
Stowage net
Stowage nets are located in the front-
passenger footwell and on the left-hand side
of the cargo compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 274)
and the safety notes regarding stowage
spaces (Y page 275).
Cargo compartment enlargement
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold
forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo
compartment cannot be restrained by the
seat backrest.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 274).
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat
backrests can be folded forwards separately
to increase the cargo compartment capacity.
Folding the rear seat backrest forward
XFully insert the backrest head restraints
(Y page 102).
XMove the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
XPull left-hand or right-hand release
handle ; of the seat backrest forwards.
Corresponding seat backrest : is
released.
XFold backrest : forwards.
XMove the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
276 Stowage areas
Stowage and features
Folding the rear seat backrest back
:Backrest
;Lock verification indicator
=Backrest release handle
XMove the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be
damaged.
XFold seat backrest : back until it engages.
Red lock status indicator ; is no longer
visible.
XAdjust the head restraints if necessary
(Y page 102).
XMove the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down rings
GWARNING
The Top Tether anchorages cannot secure a
load. If you secure a load with the Top Tether
anchorages, the Top Tether anchorages could
be pulled out during braking, abrupt changes
in direction or in the event of an accident. The
load could slip, tip over or be flung around and
thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk
of injury.
Only use the cargo tie down rings when
securing a load.
Observe the following notes on securing
loads:
RObserve the loading guidelines
(Y page 274).
RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie down
rings evenly.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
a load, as these are only intended as an
anti-slip protection for light loads.
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges
or corners.
RPad sharp edges for protection.
There are four cargo tie down rings in the
cargo compartment and two in the rear-
compartment footwells14.
:Cargo tie-down rings in the cargo
compartment
14 Canada only.
Stowage areas 277
Stowage and features
Z
:Cargo tie down rings in the rear-
compartment footwell (Canada only)
Bag hook
GWARNING
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
or items of luggage. Objects or items of
luggage could be flung around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly
changing directions. There is a risk of injury.
Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load
of 11lbs (5kg) and should not be used to
secure a load.
There is one bag hook on the left side wall in
the cargo compartment and there are two
hooks on the right and left of the lower D-pillar
trim.
Cargo compartment cover
Important safety notes
GWARNING
On its own, the cargo compartment cover
cannot secure or restrain heavy objects,
items of luggage and heavy loads. You could
be hit by an unsecured load during sudden
changes in direction, braking or in the event
of an accident. There is an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using tie downs, even if you are using the
cargo compartment cover.
! When loading the vehicle, make sure that
you do not stack the load in the cargo
compartment higher than the lower edge of
the side windows. Do not place heavy
objects on top of the cargo compartment
cover.
The cargo compartment cover is located
behind the rear bench seat backrest.
iYou can fold up the solid section of the
cargo compartment cover approximately
45° to facilitate loading the cargo
compartment.
Extending/retracting the cargo
compartment cover
278 Stowage areas
Stowage and features
XTo extend: pull cargo compartment
cover : back and clip it into the retainers
on the left and right.
XTo retract: unhook cargo compartment
cover : from the retainers on the left and
right and guide it forwards by the grab
handle until it is fully retracted.
Installing/removing the cargo
compartment cover
XTo remove: make sure that cargo
compartment cover : is rolled up.
XPress handle ; on the right underside to
the left.
XRemove cargo compartment cover :.
XTo install: attach cargo compartment
cover : to the opening on the left-hand
side.
XPress handle ; to the left.
XAllow cargo compartment cover : to
engage in the appropriate recess.
Cargo net
Important safety notes
GWARNING
On its own, the cargo net cannot secure or
restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and
heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured
load during sudden changes in direction,
braking or in the event of an accident. There
is an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using tie downs, even if you are using the
cargo net.
It is important to use a cargo net if you load
the vehicle with small objects above the seat
backrests. For safety reasons, always use a
cargo net when transporting loads.
Preparing the cargo net
The cargo net can be used in two different
positions (behind the B-pillar or the C-pillar).
RThe brackets behind B-pillar : are
required for the cargo compartment
enlargement (Y page 276).
The corresponding cargo tie down rings to
tighten the net are located in the footwell
of the rear bench seat (Y page 277).
RThe brackets behind C-pillar ; are
required for the cargo compartment behind
the rear bench seat.
The corresponding cargo tie down rings to
tension the net are located in the cargo
compartment (Y page 277).
The cargo net is located in the loading tray in
the stowage well under the cargo
compartment floor (Y page 281).
Stowage areas 279
Stowage and features
Z
XOpen both Velcro fasteners and remove the
cargo net.
XUnroll and unfold the cargo net.
The upper and lower guide rods must
engage audibly.
Attaching the cargo net
Cargo net installed behind the C-pillar
XInsert guide rod ; into retainer : in the
direction of the arrow.
XSlide guide rod ; forwards into
retainer : in the direction of the arrow.
Tightening the cargo net
Seat belt reel holder behind the front seats
XInsert belt hook : into cargo tie-down
ring ; in the direction of the arrow.
XPull tensioning strap = by the loose end in
the direction of the arrow until the cargo
net is tight.
XAfter driving a short distance, check the
tension of the cargo net and retighten it if
necessary.
Releasing the cargo net
Seat belt reel holder behind the front seats
XPull belt adjuster : upwards in the
direction of the arrow to reduce the tension
on the tensioning strap.
XUnhook belt hook ; from cargo tie-down
ring =.
Detaching and storing the cargo net
XDetach guide rod ; from bracket :
(Y page 280).
XPress the red button on the upper and lower
guide rods.
XFold the cargo net and roll it up.
XClose the two Velcro fasteners on the cargo
net holder.
Coat hooks on the tailgate
:Coat hook
280 Stowage areas
Stowage and features
Stowage well under the cargo
compartment floor
GWARNING
If you drive when the cargo compartment floor
is open, objects could be flung around, thus
striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of
injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always close the cargo compartment floor
before a journey.
XTo open: open the tailgate.
XHolding the ribbing, press handle :
downwards ;.
Handle : folds up.
XSwing the cargo compartment floor
upwards using handle : until it rests
against the cargo compartment cover.
XRelease hook = from the bracket on the
underside of the cargo compartment floor.
XEngage hook = into rain trough ?.
iStowage compartments A and B can be
used to stow small, light and flat objects.
! Before you close the tailgate, unhook the
hook from the rain trough and fold the trunk
floor down.
XTo close: unhook hook = from rain
trough ?.
XFasten hook = to the bracket on the
underside of the cargo compartment floor.
XFold the trunk floor down.
XPress the cargo compartment floor down
until it engages.
Roof carrier
Important safety notes
GWARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the driving
characteristics change. If you exceed the
maximum roof load, the driving
characteristics, as well as steering and
braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a
risk of an accident.
Never exceed the maximum roof load and
adjust your driving style.
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use roof carriers that have been tested
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Stowage areas 281
Stowage and features
Z
This helps to prevent damage to the
vehicle.
Position the load on the roof rack in such a
way that the vehicle will not sustain
damage even when it is in motion.
Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's
equipment, you can raise the panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel fully and
open the tailgate fully when the roof carrier
is installed.
The maximum roof load is 165 lbs(75 kg).
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof
load could become detached from the
vehicle. Therefore, always comply with the
installation instructions supplied by the
manufacturer of the roof carrier.
Attaching the roof carrier
XSecure the roof carrier to the roof rails.
XObserve the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes
! Only use the cup holders for containers of
the right size and which have lids. The
drinks could otherwise spill.
Cup holder in the front-compartment
center console
:Cup holder
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
! Do not sit on or support your body weight
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
down, as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cup holder before folding the
rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup
holder could be damaged.
XFold down the rear seat armrest.
XTo open: raise the rear seat armrest cover.
XPress release catch :.
Cup holder ; folds out forwards.
XSwing the rear seat armrest cover back
down, if necessary.
XTo close: raise the rear seat armrest cover.
Swing cup holder ; back until it engages.
Sun visors
Overview
GWARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
282 Features
Stowage and features
:Mirror light
;Bracket
=Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
?Vanity mirror
AMirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover
A has been folded up.
Glare from the side
XFold down the sun visor.
XPull the sun visor out of retainer ;.
XSwing the sun visor to the side.
XPull or push the sun visor in the direction of
the arrow.
Ashtray
Front ashtray
! The stowage space under the ashtray is
not heat resistant. Before placing lit
cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that
the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise,
the stowage space could be damaged.
XTo open: slide cover : forwards.
XTo remove: open the cover of ashtray =.
XHold ashtray = at the sides and lift it
up ; and out.
XTo re-install: press ashtray = into the
holder until engages.
XClose the lid of ashtray =.
XTo close: pull cover : back.
Rear-compartment ashtray
Features 283
Stowage and features
Z
XTo open: pull cover ; out by its top edge.
XTo remove the insert: press release
button = and lift the insert up and out.
XTo install the insert: install insert : from
above into the holder and press down into
the holder until it engages.
Cigarette lighter
GWARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
out of reach of children. Never leave children
unsupervised in the vehicle.
Your attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette
lighter when road and traffic conditions
permit.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 145).
XTo open: slide cover : forwards.
XPress in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out
automatically when the heating element is
red-hot.
XTo close: pull cover : back.
12 V sockets
General notes
The sockets can be used for accessories with
a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A).
Accessories include such items as lamps or
chargers for mobile phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when
the engine is switched off, the battery may
discharge.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
ignition lock (Y page 145).
iAn emergency cut-out ensures that the
on-board voltage does not drop too low. If
the on-board voltage is too low, the power
to the sockets is automatically cut. This
ensures that there is sufficient power to
start the engine.
Socket in the front-compartment center
console
XTo open: slide cover : forwards.
XLift up the cover of socket ;.
XTo close: pull cover : back.
284 Features
Stowage and features
Socket in the rear-compartment center
console
XPull cover ; out by its top edge.
XLift up the cover of socket :.
115 V socket
Important safety notes
GDANGER
When a suitable device is connected, the
115 V power socket will be carrying a high
voltage. You could receive an electric shock
if the connector cable or the 115 V power
socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged
or wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.
RUse only connector cables that are dry and
free of damage.
RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the
115 V power socket is dry.
RHave the 115 V power socket checked or
replaced immediately at a qualified
specialized workshop if it is damaged or has
been pulled out of the trim.
RNever plug the connector cable into a
115 V power socket that is damaged or has
been pulled out of the trim.
GDANGER
If you reach into the power socket or plug
inappropriate devices into the power socket,
you could receive an electric shock. There is
a risk of fatal injury.
Only connect appropriate devices to the
power socket.
! Note that work and repairs on the 115 V
power socket should only be carried out by
qualified specialist personnel.
General notes
115 V power socket : provides an
alternating voltage of 115 V so that small
electronic devices can be connected. These
devices, such as games consoles, chargers
and laptops, should not consume more than
a maximum of 150 watts altogether.
Requirements for operation of these devices:
Rthe electronic device that you connect has
a suitable connector and conforms to
standards specific to the country you are
in.
Rthe plug of the electronic device is plugged
into 115 V power socket :.
Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be
connected must not exceed 150 watts.
Rthe on-board power supply is within a
permissible voltage range.
Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartment
and the cargo compartment are
operational (Y page 284).
Using the 115 V power socket
XTo switch on: switch the ignition on.
XOpen flap =.
Features 285
Stowage and features
Z
XInsert the plug of the electronic device into
115 V power socket :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
XTo switch off: remove the connector from
115 V socket :.
Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.
286 Features
Stowage and features
Problems with the 115 V power socket
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The warning lamp on
the 115 V power socket
is not lit.
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.
XStart the engine.
or
XCharge the battery (Y page 318).
If the indicator lamp still does not light up:
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.
XRemove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.
XLet the DC/AC converter cool down.
If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down the
converter:
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
You have connected a small electronic device that has a constant
nominal power of less than 150 W, but a very high switch-on
current. This device will not work. If you connect such a device,
the 115 V power socket will not supply it with power.
XConnect a suitable device.
mbrace
General notes
You must have a license agreement to
activate the mbrace service. Make sure that
your system is activated and operational. To
log in, press the ï MB Info call button. If
any of the steps mentioned are not carried
out, the system may not be activated.
If you have questions about the activation,
contact one of the following telephone
hotlines:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
Shortly after successfully registering with the
service, a user ID and password will be sent
to you by post.
USA only: you can use this password to log
onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online"
at http://www.mbusa.com.
The system is available if:
Rit has been activated and is operational
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network
is available for transmitting data to the
Customer Center
Ra service subscription is available
Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged
iDetermining the location of the vehicle on
a map is only possible if:
RGPS reception is available.
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to
the Customer Assistance Center.
Features 287
Stowage and features
Z
The mbrace system
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed
as follows:
XPress the W or X button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
XUse the volume controller of the audio
system/COMAND.
The system offers various services, e.g:
RAutomatic and manual emergency call
RRoadside Assistance call
RMB Info call
USA only: you can find information and a
description of all available features under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
System self-test
After you have switched on the ignition, the
system carries out a self-diagnosis.
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if one of the following occurs:
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does
not come on during the system self-test.
RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
Assistance button does not light up during
self-diagnosis of the system.
RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call
button does not light up during self-
diagnosis of the system.
RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the
following buttons continues to light up red
after the system self-diagnosis:
-SOS button
-F Roadside Assistance call button
-ï MB Info call button
RAfter the system self-diagnosis, the
Inoperative or Service Not
Activated message appears in the
multifunction display.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as
expected. In the event of an emergency, help
will have to be summoned by other means.
Have the system checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact
the following service hotlines:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
Emergency call
Important safety notes
GWARNING
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
emergency if:
Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the
vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an
accident
Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of
road
Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
seen by other road users, particularly when
dark or in poor visibility conditions
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or
similar situations as soon as it is safe to do
so. Move to a safe location along with other
vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure
the vehicle in accordance with national
regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.
You must have a license agreement to
activate the mbrace service. Make sure that
your system is activated and operational. To
register, press the ï MB Info call button.
If any of the steps mentioned are not carried
out, the system may not be activated.
288 Features
Stowage and features
If you have questions about the activation,
contact one of the following telephone
hotlines:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
General notes
An emergency call is dialed automatically if
an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is
triggered.
iYou cannot end an automatically
triggered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually.
As soon as the emergency call has been
initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The multifunction display shows the
Connecting Call message.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the
Call Connected message appears in the
multifunction display.
All important information on the emergency
is transmitted, for example:
RCurrent location of the vehicle (as
determined by the GPS system)
RVehicle identification number
RInformation on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergency call has been
initiated, a voice connection is automatically
established between the Customer
Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants.
RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center attempts to get more information
on the emergency.
RIf there is no response from the vehicle
occupants, an ambulance is immediately
sent to the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established to
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center, the system has been unable to initiate
an emergency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant
mobile phone network is not available. The
indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes
continuously.
The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display and must be confirmed.
In this case, summon assistance by other
means.
Making an emergency call
XTo initiate an emergency call
manually: press cover : briefly to open.
XPress SOS button ; briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ;
flashes until the emergency call is
concluded.
XWait for a voice connection to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center.
XAfter the emergency call, close cover :.
iIf the mobile phone network is
unavailable, mbrace will not be able to
make the emergency call. If you leave the
vehicle immediately after pressing the SOS
button, you will not know whether mbrace
placed the emergency call. In this case,
always summon assistance by other
means.
Features 289
Stowage and features
Z
Roadside Assistance button
XPress Roadside Assistance button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
button : flashes while the call is active.
The multifunction display shows the
Connecting Call message. The audio
output is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call
Connected message appears in the
multifunction display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
RCurrent location of the vehicle
RVehicle identification number
iThe audio system or COMAND display
indicates that a call is active. During the
call, you can change to the navigation menu
by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,
for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants.
From the vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of
the problem (Y page 293).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-
Benz technician or makes arrangements for
your vehicle to be transported to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
You may be charged for services such as
repair work and/or towing.
Further details are available in your mbrace
manual.
iThe system has not been able to initiate
a roadside assistance call, if:
Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside
Assistance call button : is flashing
continuously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center was
established.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
network is not available, for example.
The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display.
XTo end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
XPress the corresponding button for ending
a phone call on the audio system or on
COMAND.
MB Info call button
XPress MB Info call button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in MB Info call
button : flashes while the connection is
being made. The multifunction display
290 Features
Stowage and features
shows the Connecting Call message.
The audio system is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call
Connected message appears in the
multifunction display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
RCurrent location of the vehicle
RVehicle identification number
iThe audio system or COMAND display
indicates that a call is active. During the
call, you can change to the navigation menu
by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,
for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants.
You receive information about operating your
vehicle, about the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center and about other
products and services from Mercedes-Benz.
USA only: you can find further information on
the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
iThe system has not been able to initiate
an MB Info call, if:
Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call
button : is flashing continuously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center was
established.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
network is not available, for example.
The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display.
XTo end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
XPress the corresponding button for ending
a phone call on the audio system or on
COMAND.
Call priority
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency
call can still be initiated. In this case, an
emergency call will take priority and override
all other active calls.
The indicator lamp of the respective button
flashes until the call is ended.
An emergency call can only be terminated by
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center.
All other calls can be ended by pressing:
Rthe ~ button on the multifunction
steering wheel
Rthe corresponding button on the audio
system or on COMAND for ending a
telephone call
iWhen a call is initiated, the audio system
is muted. The mobile phone is no longer
connected to COMAND. However, if you
want to use your mobile phone, do so only
when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe
location.
Downloading destinations in COMAND
Downloading destinations
Destination Download gives you access to a
data bank with over 15 million Points of
Interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on
the navigation system in your vehicle. If you
know the destination, the address can be
downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the
location of Points of Interest (POIs)/
important destinations in the vicinity.
Furthermore, you can download routes with
up to 20 way points.
Features 291
Stowage and features
Z
You are prompted to confirm route guidance
to the address entered.
The system calculates the route and
subsequently starts the route guidance with
the address entered.
iIf you select No, the address can be saved
in the address book.
iThe destination download function is
available if the relevant mobile phone
network is available and data transfer is
possible.
iThe destination download function can
only be used if the vehicle is equipped with
a navigation system.
Route Assistance
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS
Package and cannot be purchased
separately.
iYou can also use the Route Assistance
function if your vehicle is not equipped with
a navigation system.
Within the framework of this service, you
receive a professional and reliable form of
navigation support without having to leave
your vehicle.
The customer service representative finds a
suitable route depending on your vehicle's
current position and the desired destination.
You will then be guided live through the
current route section.
Search & Send
"Search & Send" is a destination entry
service. You can find further information on
"Search & Send" in the separate COMAND
operating instructions.
Vehicle remote opening
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and
a replacement SmartKey is not available.
The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately opened
remotely within four days of the ignition being
turned off. After this time, the remote
unlocking may be delayed by 15 to
60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can no
longer be opened remotely.
XContact the following service hotlines:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your password.
XReturn to your vehicle at the time agreed
upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center.
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
opened via:
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"
section
Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,
Blackberry)
To do this, you will need your identification
number and password.
iVehicle remote opening is only possible if
the corresponding mobile phone network
is accessible.
Vehicle remote closing
The remote closing feature can be used when
you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you
are no longer nearby.
The vehicle can then be locked by the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately remotely
locked within four days of the ignition being
turned off. After this time, the remote closing
may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
30 days the vehicle can no longer be closed
remotely.
XContact the following service hotlines:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at
292 Features
Stowage and features
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your password.
The next time you are inside the vehicle and
you switch on the ignition, the Doors
Locked Remotely message appears in the
multifunction display.
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
locked via:
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"
section
Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,
Blackberry)
To do this, you will need your identification
number and password.
iThe vehicle remote closing feature is
available when the relevant mobile phone
network is available and data connection is
possible.
Stolen vehicle recovery service
If your vehicle has been stolen:
XNotify the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident
report.
XThis number will be forwarded to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center together with your PIN.
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center then tries to locate the system. The
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center contacts you and the local law
enforcement agency if the vehicle is
located.
However, only the law enforcement agency
is informed of the location of the vehicle.
iIf the anti-theft alarm system is activated
for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center is
automatically informed.
Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis
With the vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), the
Customer Assistance center can provide
improved support for problems with your
vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data
is transferred to the Customer Assistance
center. The customer service representative
can use the received data to decide what kind
of assistance is required. You are then, for
example, guided to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicle
is called.
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during
an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,
this is initiated by the Customer Assistance
center. You will see the Roadside
Assistance Connected message in the
COMAND display. If the vehicle remote
malfunction diagnosis can be started, the
Request for vehicle diagnosis
received. Start vehicle diagnosis?
message appears in the display.
XConfirm the message with Yes.
XWhen the Vehicle Diagnosis Please
start ignition message appears, turn
the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 145).
XWhen the Please follow the
instructions received by phone and
move your vehicle to a safe
position. message appears, follow the
customer service representative's
instructions.
The message in the display disappears.
If you select Cancel, the vehicle remote
malfunction diagnosis is canceled
completely.
The vehicle operating state check begins.
You will see the Vehicle diagnosis
activated. message.
When the diagnosis is completed, the Send
vehicle diagnostics data//(Voice
connection may be//interrupted
during data transfer) message appears.
Features 293
Stowage and features
Z
The vehicle data can now be sent to the
Customer Assistance center.
XPress OK to confirm the message.
The voice connection with the Customer
Assistance center is terminated.
You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis:
Transferring data... message.
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
Assistance center.
Depending on what the customer service
representative agreed with you, the voice
connection is re-established after the transfer
is complete. If necessary, you will be
contacted at a later time by another means,
e.g. by e-mail or phone.
Further functions of the vehicle remote
malfunction diagnosis include, for example:
Rtransfer of service data to the Customer
Assistance center. If a service is overdue,
the COMAND display shows a message
about various special offers at your
workshop.
Rmonthly status information e-mail on oil
level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,
etc. If applicable, you will receive
information on special offers in the e-mail.
USA only: this information can also be
called up under "Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com.
Information on the data stored in the vehicle
(Y page 28).
Information on Roadside Assistance
(Y page 24).
Downloading routes
Downloading routes allows you to transfer
and save predefined routes in the navigation
system. To do this, an SD memory card must
be inserted into the COMAND system. If no
SD memory card is inserted, you must insert
the card into the card slot on the COMAND
system before saving.
A route can be prepared and sent either by a
customer service representative or via the
mbrace portal on the Internet.
Each route can include up to 20 way points.
Once a route has been received by the
navigation system, you will see the <route
name> has been saved to memory card.
Do you want to start route
guidance? message in the COMAND display.
The route is saved to the SD memory card.
XTo start route guidance: select Yes.
An overview of the route is shown in the
display.
iIf you select No, the saved route can be
called up later via the navigation menu.
XSelect Start.
Route guidance is started.
iDownloaded and saved data can be called
up again in COMAND.
You can find further information in the
separate COMAND Operating Instructions.
Speed alert
You can define the upper speed limit, which
must not be exceeded by the vehicle.
If this selected speed is exceeded by the
vehicle, a message will be sent to the
Customer Assistance center. The Customer
Assistance center then forwards this
information to you.
You can select the way in which you receive
this information beforehand. Possible options
include text message, e-mail or an automated
call.
The data you receive contains the following
information:
Rthe location where the speed limit was
exceeded
Rthe time at which the speed limit was
exceeded
Rthe selected speed limit which was
exceeded
294 Features
Stowage and features
Geo fencing
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which
the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will
be informed if the vehicle crosses the
boundaries of the selected areas. You can
select the way in which you receive this
information beforehand. Possible options
include text message, e-mail or an automated
call.
The area can be determined as either a circle
or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.
You can specify up to ten areas
simultaneously. Different settings are
possible for each area.
USA only: these settings can be called up
under "Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com.
Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call
and inform the customer service
representative that you wish to activate geo
fencing.
Currently inactive areas can be activated by
text message.
Triggering the vehicle alarm
With this function, you can trigger the
vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An
alarm sounds and the exterior lighting
flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic
alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards,
the alarm switches off.
Garage door opener
Important safety notes
GWARNING
When you operate or program the garage door
with the integrated garage door opener,
persons in the range of movement of the
garage door can become trapped or struck by
the garage door. There is a risk of injury.
When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody is
within the range of movement of the garage
door.
GWARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces
without sufficient ventilation.
The HomeLink® garage door opener
integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you
to operate up to three different door and gate
systems.
Use the integrated garage door opener only
on garage doors that:
Rhave safety stop and reverse features and
Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards
When programming a garage door opener,
park the vehicle outside the garage.
iCertain garage door drives are
incompatible with the integrated garage
door opener. If you have difficulty
programming the integrated garage door
opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following
telephone assistance services:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100
RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515
(free of charge)
More information on HomeLink® and/or
compatible products is also available
online at http://www.homelink.com.
iNotes on the declaration of conformity
(Y page 26).
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Features 295
Stowage and features
Z
Programming
Programming buttons
Observe the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 295).
Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view
mirror
Garage door remote control A is not part of
the integrated garage door opener.
XThe first time before programming, clear
the integrated garage door opener memory
(Y page 298).
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XPress and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
the integrated garage door opener.
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
up yellow.
iIndicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon
as button ;, = or ? is programmed for
the first time. If the selected button has
already been programmed, indicator
lamp : will only light up yellow after ten
seconds have elapsed.
XRelease button ;, = or ?. Indicator
lamp : flashes yellow.
XPoint garage door remote control A
towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view
mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to
20 cm).
iThe required distance between remote
control A and the integrated garage door
opener depends on the garage door drive
system. Several attempts might be
necessary. You should test every position
for at least 25 seconds before trying
another position.
XPress and hold button B on remote control
A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
If indicator lamp : lights up green or
flashes, then programming has been
successful.
XRelease button B on remote control A for
the garage door drive system.
XIf indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat
the programming procedure for the
corresponding button on the rear-view
mirror. When doing so, vary the distance
between remote control A and the rear-
view mirror.
iIf the indicator lamp flashes green after
successful programming, the garage door
system is using a rolling code. After
programming, you must synchronize the
garage door opener integrated in the rear-
view mirror with the receiver of the garage
door system.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Observe the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 295).
Your vehicle must be within reach of the
garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure
that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
objects are present within the sweep of the
door or gate.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XPress the program button of the door or
gate drive (see the door or gate drive
operating instructions, e.g. under
"programming of additional remote
controls").
296 Features
Stowage and features
iUsually, you now have 30seconds to
initiate the next step.
XPress previously programmed button ;,
= or ? of the integrated garage door
opener until the door closes.
The rolling code synchronization is then
complete.
Notes on programming the remote
control
Canadian radio frequency laws require a
"break" (or interruption) of the transmission
signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.
Therefore, these signals may not last long
enough for the integrated garage door
opener. The signal is not recognized during
programming. Comparable with Canadian
law, some U.S. garage door openers also
feature a "break".
Proceed as follows:
Rif you live in Canada
Rif you have difficulties programming the
garage door opener (regardless of where
you live) when using the programming
steps
XPress and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
the integrated garage door opener.
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
up yellow.
XRelease the button.
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
XPress button B of garage door remote
control A for two seconds, then release it
for two seconds.
XPress button B again for two seconds.
XRepeat this sequence on button B of
remote control A until indicator lamp :
lights up green.
If indicator lamp : turns red, repeat the
process.
XContinue with the other programming
steps (see above).
Problems when programming
If you are experiencing problems
programming the integrated garage door
opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of
the following instructions:
RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage
door drive remote control A. This can
usually be found on the back of the remote
control.
The integrated garage door opener is
compatible with devices that have units
which operate in the frequency range of
280to 433MHz.
RReplace the batteries in garage door
remote control A. This increases the
likelihood that garage door remote control
A will transmit a strong and precise signal
to the integrated garage door opener in the
rear-view mirror.
RWhen programming, hold remote control
A at varying distances and angles from the
button that you are programming. Try
various angles at a distance between 2and
12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle
but at varying distances.
RIf another remote control for the same
garage door drive is available, repeat the
same programming steps with this remote
control. Before performing these steps,
make sure that new batteries have been
installed in garage door drive remote
control A.
RNote that some remote controls only
transmit for a limited amount of time (the
indicator lamp on the remote control goes
out). Press button B on remote control
A again before transmission ends.
RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
opener unit. This can improve signal
reception/transmission.
Opening/closing the garage door
After it has been programmed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of
the garage door system remote control.
Features 297
Stowage and features
Z
Please also read the operating instructions
for the garage door system.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XPress button ;, = or ? which you have
programmed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with a fixed code:
indicator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code:
indicator lamp : flashes green.
iThe transmitter will transmit a signal as
long as the button is pressed. The
transmission is halted after a maximum of
ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights
up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again
if necessary.
Clearing the memory
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XPress buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
XPress and hold buttons ; and ? until the
indicator lamp turns green.
iMake sure that you clear the memory of
the integrated garage door opener before
selling the vehicle.
Floormat on the driver's side
GWARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle
is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
XSlide the seat backwards.
XTo install: place the floormat in the
footwell.
XPress studs : onto retainers ;.
XTo remove: pull the floormat off
retainers ;.
XRemove the floormat.
298 Features
Stowage and features
Useful information ............................ 300
ASSYST PLUS .................................... 300
Engine compartment ........................ 301
Care .................................................... 305
299
Maintenance and care
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 27).
ASSYST PLUS
Service messages
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
informs you of the next service due date.
Information on the type of service and service
intervals (see the separate Maintenance
Booklet).
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
iThe ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not show any information on the
engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
engine oil level (Y page 302).
The multifunction display shows a service
message for several seconds, e.g.:
RService A in .. Days
RService A Due
RService A Exceeded by ... Days
Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until
the next service due date is displayed.
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with
a number or another letter, shows the type of
service. A stands for a minor service and B for
a major service.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not take into account any periods of
time during which the battery is
disconnected.
Maintaining the time-dependent service
schedule:
XNote down the service due date displayed
in the multifunction display before
disconnecting the battery.
or
XAfter reconnecting the battery, subtract
the battery disconnection periods from the
service date shown on the display.
Hiding a service message
XPress the % or a button on the
steering wheel.
Displaying service messages
XSwitch on the ignition.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Service
menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select the
ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by
pressing the a button.
The service due date appears in the
multifunction display.
Information about Service
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
interval display
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval
display has been inadvertently reset, this
setting can be corrected at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Have service work carried out as described
in the Maintenance Booklet. This may
otherwise lead to increased wear and
300 ASSYST PLUS
Maintenance and care
damage to the major assemblies or the
vehicle.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset
the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
after the service work has been carried out.
You can also obtain further information on
maintenance work, for example.
Special service requirements
The specified maintenance interval takes only
the normal operation of the vehicle into
account. Under arduous operating conditions
or increased load on the vehicle,
maintenance work must be carried out more
frequently, for example:
Rregular city driving with frequent
intermediate stops
Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel
short distances
Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces
Rif the engine is often left idling for long
periods
Under these or similar conditions, have, for
example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter
replaced or changed more frequently. Under
arduous operating conditions, the tires must
be checked more often. Further information
can be obtained at a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
is also available in other countries. You can
obtain further information from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Engine compartment
Hood
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when
the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
There is a risk of an accident.
Never unlatch the hood while driving.
GWARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is
a risk of injury to persons within range of
movement of the hood.
Open and close the hood only when no one is
within its range of movement.
GWARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is
overheated or when there is a fire in the
engine compartment could expose you to hot
gases or other service products. There is a
risk of injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
GWARNING
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment,
Rswitch off the ignition
Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
Rkeep clothing away from moving parts
Engine compartment 301
Maintenance and care
Z
GWARNING
The ignition system and the fuel injection
system work under high voltage. If you touch
components which are under voltage, you
could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
injury.
Never touch components of the ignition
system or fuel injection system when the
ignition is switched on.
Opening the hood
GWARNING
Certain components in the engine
compartment, such as the engine, radiator
and parts of the exhaust system, can become
very hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
GWARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield
wipers or the hood.
XMake sure that the windshield wipers are
turned off.
XPull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released.
XReach into the gap, pull hood catch
handle ; up and lift the hood.
If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in
(40 cm), the hood is opened and held open
automatically by the gas-filled strut.
Closing the hood
XLower the hood and let it fall from a height
of approximately 8 in (20 cm).
XCheck that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Open it again and close
it with a little more force.
Engine oil
General notes on the oil level
Depending on the driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil
over a distance of 600 miles (1,000 km). The
oil consumption may be higher than this when
the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at
high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
be in a different location.
302 Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
When checking the oil level:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
Rthe engine should be switched off for
approximately five minutes if the engine is
at normal operating temperature.
Rif the engine is not at normal operating
temperature, e.g. if the engine was only
started briefly: wait about 30 minutes
before carrying out the measurement.
Checking the oil level using the oil
dipstick
GWARNING
Certain components in the engine
compartment, such as the engine, radiator
and parts of the exhaust system, can become
very hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
Example: vehicles with a gasoline engine
Example: vehicles with a diesel engine
XPark the vehicle on a level surface.
To check the oil level with the engine at
operating temperature, switch the engine
off and wait for approximately five minutes.
XPull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide
tube.
XWipe off oil dipstick :.
XSlowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide
tube to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
XIf the oil level has dropped to MIN mark
= or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) engine
oil.
Adding engine oil
GWARNING
Certain components in the engine
compartment, such as the engine, radiator
and parts of the exhaust system, can become
very hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
GWARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot
components in the engine compartment, it
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next
to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down
and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the
components before starting the engine.
HEnvironmental note
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful
to the environment.
! Only use engine oils and oil filters that
have been approved for vehicles with a
service system. You can obtain a list of the
engine oils and oil filters tested and
Engine compartment 303
Maintenance and care
Z
approved in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service
center.
Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
caused by the following:
Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have
not been specifically approved for the
service system
Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after
the interval for replacement specified by
the service system has been exceeded
Rusing engine oil additives.
! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is
above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too
much oil has been added. This can lead to
damage to the engine or the catalytic
converter. Have excess oil siphoned off.
Example: engine oil cap
XTurn cap : counter-clockwise and remove
it.
XAdd engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark
on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of
engine oil.
XReplace cap : on the filler neck and turn
clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place
securely.
XCheck the oil level again with the oil
dipstick (Y page 303).
Further information on engine oil
(Y page 371).
Checking and adding other service
products
Checking coolant level
GWARNING
Certain components in the engine
compartment, such as the engine, radiator
and parts of the exhaust system, can become
very hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
GWARNING
The engine cooling system is pressurized,
particularly when the engine is warm. When
opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot
coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before opening the
cap. Wear eye and hand protection when
opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a
turn to allow pressure to escape.
Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
down.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 145).
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button twice (Y page 145).
XCheck the coolant temperature display in
the instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be below
158 ‡ (70 †).
304 Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
XSlowly turn cap : half a turn counter-
clockwise and allow excess pressure to
escape.
XTurn cap : further counter-clockwise and
remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar
= in the filler neck when cold, there is
enough coolant in coolant expansion
tank ;.
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the fuel
filler neck when warm, there is enough
coolant in expansion tank ;.
XIf necessary, add coolant that has been
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
XReplace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 372).
Adding washer fluid to the windshield
washer system/headlamp cleaning
system
GWARNING
Certain components in the engine
compartment, such as the engine, radiator
and parts of the exhaust system, can become
very hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
GWARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. If it comes into contact with hot
engine components or the exhaust system it
could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
XTo open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
XAdd the premixed washer fluid.
XTo close: press cap : onto the filler neck
until it engages.
The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the
windshield washer system and the headlamp
cleaning system.
If the washer fluid level drops below the
recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message
appears in the multifunction display
prompting you to add washer fluid
(Y page 259).
Further information on windshield washer
fluid/antifreeze (Y page 373).
Care
General notes
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any
of the following:
Rdry, rough or hard cloths
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rsolvents
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective
films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
scraper. You could otherwise scratch or
damage the surfaces and protective film.
Care 305
Maintenance and care
Z
HEnvironmental note
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible
manner.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after
cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and
the brake pads/linings, thus drying them.
The vehicle can then be parked.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents
recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
Exterior care
Automatic car wash
GWARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditions until full braking power is restored.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes
automatically in certain situations. To
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or other similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
! Make sure that the automatic
transmission is in position N when washing
your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The
vehicle could be damaged if the
transmission is in another position.
! Make sure that:
Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof
are fully closed.
Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off
(the OFF button has been pressed).
Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position
0.
Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash from the very start.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
wax from the windshield and the wiper
blades. This will prevent smears and reduce
wiping noises caused by residue on the
windshield.
Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements in all
countries concerned.
XDo not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight.
XUse a soft sponge to clean.
XUse a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
XThoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
gentle jet of water.
XDo not point the water jet directly towards
the air inlet.
XUse plenty of water and rinse out the
sponge frequently.
XRinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
thoroughly with a chamois.
XDo not let the cleaning agent dry on the
paintwork.
306 Care
Maintenance and care
When using the vehicle in winter, remove all
traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
soon as possible.
Power washers
GWARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components.
Components damaged in this way may fail
unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced
immediately.
! Always maintain a distance of at least
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
power washer nozzle. Information about
the correct distance is available from the
equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around
when cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
Rtires
Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
Relectrical components
Rbattery
Rconnectors
Rlights
Rseals
Rtrim
Rventilation slots
Damaged seals or electrical components
can lead to leaks or failures.
Cleaning the wheels
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after
cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and
the brake pads/linings, thus drying them.
The vehicle can then be parked.
Cleaning the paintwork
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
by corrosion and damage caused by
inadequate care cannot always be completely
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified
specialist workshop.
XRemove dirt immediately, where possible,
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
XSoak insect remains with insect remover
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
XSoak bird droppings with water and rinse
off the treated areas afterwards.
XRemove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,
oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently
with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
lighter fluid.
XUse tar remover to remove tar stains.
XUse silicone remover to remove wax.
! Do not affix:
Rstickers
Rfilms
Rmagnetic plates or similar items
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
surface, use the paint care products
recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz. This is the case approximately every
three to five months, depending on the
climate conditions and the care product used.
If the dirt has penetrated the paint surface or
if the paintwork has become dull, then the
paintwork should be cleaned. Use the
cleaning product Paint Cleaner, which has
been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Care 307
Maintenance and care
Z
Do not use these care products in the sun or
on the hood while the hood is hot.
XUse a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to
the paintwork quickly and provisionally.
Matte finish care
If your vehicle has a clear matte finish,
observe the following instructions in order to
avoid damage to the paintwork due to
incorrect care.
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels
with a clear matte finish.
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to
shine.
! The following may cause the paint to
become shiny and thus reduce the matte
effect:
RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable
materials.
RFrequent use of car washes.
RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or
polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.
wax. These products are only suitable for
high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles
with matte finish leads to considerable
surface damage (shiny, spotted areas).
Always have paintwork repairs carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
treatment under any circumstances.
iThe vehicle should preferably be washed
by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo
and plenty of water.
iUse only insect remover and car shampoo
from the range of recommended and
approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
Cleaning the windows
GWARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
! Only fold the windshield wipers away from
the windshield when vertical. Otherwise,
you will damage the hood.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing
solvents to clean the inside of the windows.
Do not touch the insides of the windows
with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or
ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging
the windows.
! Clean the water drainage channels of the
windshield and the rear window at regular
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
and pollen may under certain
circumstances prevent water from draining
away. This can lead to corrosion damage
and damage to electronic components.
XClean the inside and outside of the
windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
product that is recommended and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning wiper blades
GWARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
308 Care
Maintenance and care
! Only fold the windshield wipers away from
the windshield when vertical. Otherwise,
you will damage the hood.
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,
the wiper blade could be damaged.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
graphite coating could be damaged. This
could cause wiper noise.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if
the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
XFold the windshield wiper arms away from
the windshield.
XCarefully clean the wiper blades with a
damp cloth.
XFold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
Cleaning the exterior lighting
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths which are suitable for plastic light
lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or
cleaning cloths could scratch or damage
the plastic light lenses.
XClean the plastic lenses of the exterior
lighting using a wet sponge and a mild
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
shampoo. Or clean the exterior lighting
with cleaning cloths.
Cleaning the mirror turn signals
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
lenses of the mirror turn signals.
XClean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn
signals using a wet sponge and a mild
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
shampoo. Cleaning cloths may be used as
well.
Cleaning the sensors
! If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a
distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between
the vehicle and the power washer nozzle.
Information about the correct distance is
available from the equipment
manufacturer.
XClean sensors : of the driving systems
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the rear view camera
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the rear view camera with a power
washer.
XUse clear water and a soft cloth to clean
camera lens :.
Care 309
Maintenance and care
Z
Cleaning the exhaust pipes
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-
based cleaning agents such as sanitary
cleansers or wheel cleaners.
Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust
tail pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in
winter and after washing.
XClean the exhaust tail pipes with a chrome
care product tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch
HEnvironmental note
Dispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in an
environmentally responsible manner.
! Observe the note on care provided by the
trailer manufacturer.
The ball coupling must be cleaned if it
becomes dirty or corroded.
XRemove rust on the ball of the ball coupling,
e.g. with a wire brush.
XRemove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or
a brush.
XAfter cleaning, lightly grease the ball of the
ball coupling again.
XCheck that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is
working properly.
iYou can also have the maintenance work
on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch
carried out by a qualified specialist
workshop.
Interior care
Cleaning the display
! For cleaning, do not use any of the
following:
Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household
cleaning agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface
when cleaning. This could lead to
irreparable damage to the display.
XBefore cleaning the display, make sure that
it is switched off and has cooled down.
XClean the display surface using a
commercially available microfiber cloth
and TFT/LCD display cleaner.
XDry the display surface using a dry
microfiber cloth.
Cleaning the plastic trim
GWARNING
Care products and cleaning agents containing
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
come loose in the event of air bag
deployment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
agents to clean the cockpit.
! Do not affix the following to plastic
surfaces:
Rstickers
Rfilms
Rscented oil bottles or similar items
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent
or sunscreen to come into contact with the
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality
look of the surfaces.
310 Care
Maintenance and care
XWipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
XHeavy soiling: use care and cleaning
products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again.
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
selector lever
XThoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been
recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim
elements
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners,
polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk
of damaging the surface.
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
mostly made of anodized aluminum and
can lose their shine if chrome polish is
used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead
when cleaning the trim pieces.
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you
are unsure as to whether the trim pieces
are chrome-plated or not, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
XWipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with
a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber
cloth.
XHeavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the seat covers
General notes
! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean
genuine leather, artificial leather or
Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can
damage the cover.
iNote that regular care is essential to
ensure that the appearance and comfort of
the covers is retained over time.
Genuine leather seat covers
Leather is a natural product.
It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
example:
RDifferences in the texture
RSigns of stretching and marking
RSlight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not
material defects.
! To retain the natural appearance of the
leather, observe the following cleaning
instructions:
RClean genuine leather covers carefully
with a damp cloth and then wipe the
covers down with a dry cloth.
RMake sure that the leather does not
become soaked. It may otherwise
become rough and cracked.
ROnly use leather care agents that have
been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz. You can obtain these from a
qualified specialist workshop.
Seat covers of other materials
! Observe the following when cleaning:
RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing
1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
RClean cloth covers with a microfiber
cloth moistened with a solution
containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish
washing liquid). Rub carefully and always
wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving
visible lines. Leave the seat to dry
Care 311
Maintenance and care
Z
afterwards. Cleaning results depend on
the type of dirt and how long it has been
there.
RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp
cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
seat sections to avoid leaving visible
lines.
Cleaning the seat belts
GWARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event
of an accident. This poses an increased risk
of injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡
(80 †) or in direct sunlight.
XUse clean, lukewarm water and soap
solution.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets
XHeadliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush
or a cleaning agent recommended and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
XCarpets: use the carpet and textile
cleaning agents recommended and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
312 Care
Maintenance and care
Useful information ............................ 314
Where will I find...? ........................... 314
Flat tire .............................................. 314
Battery (vehicle) ................................ 316
Jump-starting .................................... 320
Towing and tow-starting .................. 322
Fuses .................................................. 325
313
Breakdown assistance
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 27).
Where will I find...?
First-aid kit
XOpen the tailgate.
XRemove first-aid kit : from the stowage
net.
iCheck the expiration date on the first-aid
kit at least once a year. Replace the
contents if necessary, and replace missing
items.
Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the
stowage well under the cargo compartment
floor.
XTo remove the cargo compartment
stowage tray/cover: lift up the cargo
compartment floor (Y page 281).
XRemove stowage tray : in the direction of
the arrow.
XRemove cover ; in the direction of the
arrow.
=Lug wrench
?Towing eye
AJack
BFuse allocation chart
CWheel bolts
DOne pair of gloves
ERatchet wrench
FTire inflation compressor
GValve extractor
HFolding wheel chock
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties) (Y page 315)
314 Flat tire
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
vehicles with MOExtended tires.
RCollapsible spare wheel
Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain
countries) (Y page 361)
Information on changing/mounting a wheel
(Y page 354).
XStop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground, as far away as possible from
traffic.
XSwitch on the hazard warning lamps.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 164).
XIf possible, bring the front wheels into the
straight-ahead position.
XSwitch off the engine.
XVehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
XVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the
driver's door.
The on-board electronics have status 0,
which is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
XVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 145).
XAll occupants must get out of the vehicle.
Make sure that they are not endangered as
they do so.
XMake sure that no one is near the danger
area while a wheel is being changed.
Anyone who is not directly assisting in the
wheel change should, for example, stand
behind the barrier.
XGet out of the vehicle. Pay attention to
traffic conditions when doing so.
XClose the driver's door.
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
General notes
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
pressure in one or more tires. The affected
tire must not show any clearly visible damage.
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
next to the tire size designation, the load-
bearing capacity and the speed index
(Y page 348).
MOExtended tires may only be used in
conjunction with an active tire pressure loss
warning system or with an active tire pressure
monitor.
If the pressure loss warning message
appears in the multifunction display:
RObserve the instructions in the display
messages (Y page 256).
RCheck the tire for damage.
RIf driving on, observe the following notes.
The maximum driving distance is
approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the
vehicle is partially laden and approximately
18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully
laden.
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving
distance possible depends upon:
RSpeed
RRoad condition
ROutside temperature
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
may be reduced by extreme driving
conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased
through a moderate style of driving.
The maximum permissible distance which
can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from
the moment the tire pressure loss warning
appears in the multifunction display.
Flat tire 315
Breakdown assistance
You must not exceed a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
iWhen replacing one or all tires, make sure
that you use only tires:
Rof the size specified for the vehicle and
Rmarked "MOExtended"
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be
replaced with a MOExtended tire, a
standard tire may be used as a temporary
measure. Make sure that you use the
proper size and type (summer or winter
tire).
Important safety notes
GWARNING
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when
cornering, accelerating quickly and when
braking. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
vehicle.
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
Ryou hear banging noises.
Rthe vehicle starts to shake.
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
RESP® is intervening constantly.
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
After driving in emergency mode, have the
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
workshop with regard to their further use. The
defective tire must be replaced in every case.
Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notes
Special tools and expert knowledge are
required when working on the battery, e.g.
removal and installing. You should therefore
have all work involving the battery carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
GWARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
lead to function restrictions applying to
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting
system, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The
operating safety of your vehicle may be
restricted. You could lose control of the
vehicle, for example:
Rbraking
Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuver
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar
incident, contact a qualified specialist
workshop immediately. Do not drive any
further. You should have all work involving the
battery carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
For further information about ABS and ESP®,
see (Y page 67) and (Y page 69).
GWARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
of sparks, which could ignite the highly
explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of
an explosion.
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
body to remove any existing electrostatic
build-up.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when
charging the battery as well as when jump-
starting.
316 Battery (vehicle)
Breakdown assistance
Always make sure that neither you nor the
battery is electrostatically charged. A build-
up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for
example:
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic
fibers
Rdue to friction between clothing and seats
Rif you push or pull the battery across the
carpet or other synthetic materials
Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth
GWARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
over the battery. Keep children away from
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
water and seek medical attention.
GWARNING
During the charging process, a battery
produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit
occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen
gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into
contact with vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a
battery.
RIt is important that you observe the
described order of the battery terminals
when connecting and disconnecting a
battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the
described order when connecting and
disconnecting the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running.
GWARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
Do not lean over a battery.
HEnvironmental note
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified
specialist workshop or a
special collection point for
used batteries.
! Have the battery checked regularly at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the service intervals in the
Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified
specialist workshop for more information.
! You should have all work involving the
battery carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop. In the exceptional case that it is
necessary for you to disconnect the battery
yourself, make sure that:
Ryou switch off the engine and remove the
SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-
GO, ensure that the ignition is switched
off. Check that all the indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,
electronic components, such as the
alternator, may be damaged.
Ryou first remove the negative terminal
clamp and then the positive terminal
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.
Battery (vehicle) 317
Breakdown assistance
Z
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic
system may be damaged.
Rthe transmission is locked in position P
after disconnecting the battery. The
vehicle is secured against rolling away.
You can then no longer move the vehicle.
The battery and the cover of the positive
terminal clamp must be installed securely
during operation.
Comply with safety precautions and take
protective measures when handling
batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the
battery. Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Wear suitable protective clothing,
especially gloves, apron and
faceguard.
Rinse any acid spills immediately
with clear water. Contact a
physician if necessary.
Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
In order for the battery to achieve the
maximum possible service life, it must always
be sufficiently charged.
Have the battery condition of charge checked
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly
for short trips or if you leave it standing idle
for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified
specialist workshop if you wish to leave your
vehicle parked for a long period of time.
Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
discharge over time if you do not use the
vehicle. In this case, have the battery
disconnected at a qualified specialist
workshop. You can also charge the battery
with a charger recommended by Mercedes-
Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop
for further information.
iRemove the SmartKey if you park the
vehicle and do not require any electrical
consumers. The vehicle will then use very
little energy, thus conserving battery
power.
iIf the power supply has been interrupted,
e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will
have to:
Rset the clock; see the separate operating
instructions.
On vehicles with COMAND and a
navigation system, the clock is set
automatically.
Rreset the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel. (Y page 94)
Rreset the function for folding the exterior
mirrors in/out automatically by folding
the mirrors out once (Y page 107)15.
Charging the battery
GWARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
Do not lean over a battery.
GWARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
15 This function is only available in vehicles for Canada.
318 Battery (vehicle)
Breakdown assistance
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
over the battery. Keep children away from
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
water and seek medical attention.
GWARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at
temperatures below freezing point. When
jump-starting the vehicle or charging the
battery, gases can escape from the battery.
There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
! Only charge the installed battery with a
battery charger which has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery
chargers allow the battery to be charged
while still installed in the vehicle.
! Only use battery chargers with a
maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 320).
XOpen the hood.
XConnect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same
order as when connecting the donor
battery in the jump-starting procedure
(Y page 320).
XRead the battery charger's operating
instructions before charging the battery.
Battery (vehicle) 319
Breakdown assistance
Z
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a
positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.
GWARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and
seek medical attention.
GWARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
GWARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
GWARNING
Non-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoid
repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
! Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper
cables. Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust
system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
320 Jump-starting
Breakdown assistance
ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.
Rbare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the
jumper cables are connected to the battery.
Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.
XApply the parking brake firmly.
XShift the automatic transmission to position P.
XSwitch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
XOpen the hood.
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
XSlide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.
XConnect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.
XStart the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
XConnect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using
the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
XStart the engine.
XBefore disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
Jump-starting 321
Breakdown assistance
Z
XFirst, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from
positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own
vehicle first.
XClose cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.
XHave the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
iJump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
iJumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any
qualified specialist workshop.
Towing and tow-starting
Important safety notes
GWARNING
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the
steering wheel lock has been engaged. There
is a risk of an accident.
Always switch off the ignition when towing the
vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.
GWARNING
If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow-
started is greater than the permissible gross
weight of your vehicle:
Rthe towing eye could detach itself
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could
rollover.
There is a risk of an accident.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
its weight should not be greater than the
permissible gross weight of your vehicle.
Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle
weight rating can be found on the vehicle
identification plate (Y page 366).
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes
automatically in certain situations. To
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or other similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of
30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be
raised and transported.
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could
be damaged.
! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery
purposes as this could damage the vehicle.
If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
! When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high,
the vehicles could be damaged.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
This could damage the vehicle.
! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop
button. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock and shift the automatic
transmission to N. Then, turn the SmartKey
back to 0 and leave it in the ignition lock.
It is better to have the vehicle transported
than to have it towed.
The automatic transmission must be in
position N when the vehicle is being towed.
322 Towing and tow-starting
Breakdown assistance
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock
Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to
position N
iDeactivate the automatic locking feature
(Y page 82). You could otherwise be locked
out when pushing or towing the vehicle.
Installing/removing the towing eye
Installing the towing eye
GWARNING
The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There
is a risk of burns when removing the rear
cover.
Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular
care when removing the rear cover.
Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: if you intend
to use the vehicle for towing, install the ball
coupling and connect the towbar to it
(Y page 214).
XRemove the towing eye from the vehicle
tool kit (Y page 314).
The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes are
located in the bumpers. They are under the
covers at the front and at the rear on vehicles
without a trailer coupling. On vehicles with a
trailer coupling, the bracket is at the front
under the cover.
Vehicles without the AMG Sports package
Vehicles with the AMG Sports package
XPress the mark on cover : inwards in the
direction of the arrow.
Rear bumpers on vehicles with the AMG
Sports package: lift up cover : from the
bumper by inserting a round, blunt object
into the recess.
XTake cover : off the opening.
XScrew in and tighten the towing eye
clockwise to the stop.
Removing the towing eye
XUnscrew and remove the towing eye.
XAttach cover : to the bumper and press
until it engages.
XPlace the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.
Towing and tow-starting 323
Breakdown assistance
Z
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised
Only possible for vehicles without
4MATIC.
When towing your vehicle with the rear axle
raised, it is important that you observe the
safety instructions (Y page 322).
! The ignition must be switched off if you
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised. Intervention by ESP® could
otherwise damage the brake system.
XSwitch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 115).
XTurn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock and remove the SmartKey
from the ignition lock.
XWhen leaving the vehicle, take the
SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO key with you.
Towing a vehicle with both axles on
the ground
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle
(Y page 322).
XSwitch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 115).
iWhen towing with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination
switch as usual to signal a change of
direction. In this case, only the indicator
lamps for the direction of travel flash. After
resetting the combination switch, the
hazard warning lamp starts flashing again.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal and keep it depressed.
XShift the automatic transmission to
position N.
XRelease the brake pedal.
XRelease the parking brake.
Transporting the vehicle
The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be
used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or
transporter if you wish to transport it.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XShift the automatic transmission to
position N.
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
XPrevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the parking brake.
XShift the automatic transmission to
position P.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock and remove the SmartKey
from the ignition lock.
XSecure the vehicle.
! You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
axle or steering components. Otherwise,
the vehicle could be damaged.
Notes on 4MATIC vehicles
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised,
as doing so will damage the transmission.
If the vehicle has transmission damage or
damage to the front or rear axle, have it
transported on a transporter or trailer.
In the event of damage to the electrical
system
If the battery is defective, the automatic
transmission will be locked in position P. To
shift the automatic transmission to position
N, you must provide power to the vehicle's
electrical system in the same way as when
jump-starting (Y page 320).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter
or trailer.
324 Towing and tow-starting
Breakdown assistance
Recovering a vehicle that has become
stuck
! Pull away smoothly, slowly, and in a
straight line when pulling out a vehicle that
has become stuck. Excessive tractive
power could damage the vehicles.
If the drive wheels get trapped on loose or
muddy ground, recover the vehicle with the
utmost care, especially so if the vehicle is
laden.
Never attempt to recover a vehicle with a
trailer attached.
Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible,
using the tracks it made when it became
stuck.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
! Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be started by tow-starting. This
could otherwise damage the transmission.
You can find information on "Jump-starting"
at (Y page 320).
Fuses
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher
amperage, the electric cables could be
overloaded. This could result in a fire. There
is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
new fuses having the correct amperage.
! Only use fuses that have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
have the correct fuse rating for the system
concerned. Otherwise, components or
systems could be damaged.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the
components on the circuit and their functions
stop operating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
the same rating, which you can recognize by
the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed
in the fuse allocation chart.
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Before changing a fuse
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 164).
XSwitch off all electrical consumers.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock and remove it (Y page 145).
or
XOn vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure
the ignition is switched off (Y page 145).
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
must be off.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
RFuse box on the driver's side of the
dashboard
RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
in the direction of travel
RFuse box in the stowage well under the
cargo compartment floor on the right-hand
side of the vehicle, when viewed in the
direction of travel
The fuse allocation chart is located in the
vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment
under the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 314).
Dashboard fuse box
! Do not use a pointed object such as a
screwdriver to open the cover in the
dashboard. You could damage the
dashboard or the cover.
Fuses 325
Breakdown assistance
Z
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
XTo open: pull out cover : slightly at the
bottom in the direction of arrow =.
XPull cover : outwards in the direction of
arrow ; and remove it.
XTo close: clip in cover : on the front of
the dashboard.
XFold cover : inwards until it engages.
Fuse box in the engine compartment
GWARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
XMake sure that the windshield wipers are
turned off.
XOpen the hood.
XUse a dry cloth to remove any moisture
from the fuse box.
XTo open: take lines ; from the guides.
XOpen clamps :.
XRemove the fuse box cover forwards.
XTo close: check whether the rubber seal is
lying correctly in the cover.
XInsert the cover at the rear of the fuse box
into the retainer.
XFold down cover and close clamps :.
XSecure lines ; in the guides.
XClose the hood.
Fuse box in the cargo compartment
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
XOpen the tailgate.
326 Fuses
Breakdown assistance
XTo open: lift up cargo compartment
floor ;(Y page 281).
XRemove stowage compartment :.
XOpen cover = of fuse box downwards.
Fuses 327
Breakdown assistance
Z
328
Useful information ............................ 330
Important safety notes .................... 330
Operation ........................................... 330
Winter operation ............................... 332
Tire pressure ..................................... 334
Loading the vehicle .......................... 342
Maximum load rating ....................... 345
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards .......................................... 346
Tire labeling ....................................... 347
Definition of terms for tires and
loading ............................................... 351
Changing a wheel ............................. 354
Mounting a wheel ............................. 355
Wheel and tire combinations ........... 359
Emergency spare wheel ................... 361
329
Wheels and tires
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 27).
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
the wheel brakes or suspension components
may be damaged. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always replace wheels and tires with those
that fulfill the specifications of the original
part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
correct:
Rdesignation
Rmodel
When replacing tires, make sure to use the
correct:
Rdesignation
Rmanufacturer
Rmodel
GWARNING
A flat tire severely impairs the driving,
steering and braking characteristics of the
vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
Rdo not drive with a flat tire.
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics:
Rpay attention to the information and
warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics).
Accessories that are not approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not
being used correctly can impair operating
safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit a qualified specialist
workshop and inquire about:
Rsuitability
Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
Information on the dimensions and types of
wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found
in the "Wheel/tire combinations" section
(Y page 359).
Information on air pressure for the tires on
your vehicle can be found:
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard on the B-pillar
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
flap
Rin the "Tire pressure" section
Modification work on the brake system and
wheels is not permitted. The use of wheel
spacers or brake dust shields is not
permitted. This invalidates the general
operating permit for the vehicle.
iFurther information on wheels and tires
can be obtained at any qualified specialist
workshop.
Operation
Information on driving
RIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the
tire pressures and correct them if
necessary.
RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,
noises and unusual handling
330 Operation
Wheels and tires
characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side.
This may indicate that the wheels or tires
are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is
defective, reduce your speed immediately.
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to
check the wheels and tires for damage.
Hidden tire damage could also be causing
the unusual handling characteristics. If you
find no signs of damage, have the tires and
wheels checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that
the tires do not get deformed by the curb
or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive
over curbs, speed humps or similar
elevations, try to do so slowly and at an
obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires,
particularly the sidewalls, may be
damaged.
Regular checking of wheels and tires
GWARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose
control of your vehicle. There is a risk of
accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
RRegularly check the wheels and tires of
your vehicle for damage at least once a
month, as well as after driving off-road or
on rough roads. Damaged wheels can
cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular
attention to damage such as:
-cuts in the tires
-punctures
-tears in the tires
-bulges on tires
-deformation or severe corrosion on
wheels
RRegularly check the tire tread depth and
the condition of the tread across the whole
width of the tire (Y page 331). If necessary,
turn the front wheels to full lock in order to
inspect the inner side of the tire surface.
RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve other than
the standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or
systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring
systems.
RRegularly check the pressure of all the tires
including the emergency spare wheel or the
spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips,
and correct the pressure as necessary
(Y page 334).
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 361).
The service life of tires depends, among other
things, on the following factors:
RDriving style
RTire pressure
RDistance covered
Important safety notes on the tire
tread
GWARNING
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
speed is not adapted to suit the driving
conditions. There is a risk of accident.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
may exhibit different levels of wear at
different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
should regularly check the tread depth and
the condition of the tread across the entire
width of all tires.
Minimum tire tread depth for:
RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
Operation 331
Wheels and tires
Z
For safety reasons, replace the tires before
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
tire tread depth is reached.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire
tread. They are visible once the tread depth
is approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the
case, the tire is so worn that it must be
replaced.
Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated
into the tire tread.
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same
type and make.
Exception: it is permissible to install a
different type or make in the event of a flat
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics)" section
(Y page 315).
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto
the wheels.
RAfter mounting new tires, break them in at
moderate speeds for the first 60 miles
(100 km), as they only reach their full
performance after this distance.
RDo not drive with tires which have too little
tread depth, as this significantly reduces
the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
RReplace the tires after six years at the
latest, regardless of wear.
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 361).
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
pressure in one or more tires.
MOExtended tires may only be used in
conjunction with an active tire pressure loss
warning system or with an active tire pressure
monitor and on wheels specifically tested by
Mercedes-Benz.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires in the
event of a flat tire can be found in the
"Breakdown assistance" section
(Y page 315).
Winter operation
Points to remember
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (Y page 354).
Driving with summer tires
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
braking power. Change the tires on your
vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at
very cold temperatures could cause cracks to
form, thereby damaging the tires
permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept
responsibility for this type of damage.
M+S tires
GWARNING
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
332 Winter operation
Wheels and tires
and do not provide sufficient traction. There
is a risk of an accident.
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã
in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use
winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of
tire are identified by the M+S marking.
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
symbol in addition to the M+S marking
provide the best possible grip in wintry road
conditions. Only these tires will allow driving
safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to
function optimally in winter. These tires have
been developed specifically for driving in
snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on
all wheels to maintain safe handling
characteristics.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
mounted.
When you have mounted M+S tires:
XCheck the tire pressures (Y page 337).
XVehicles for Canada: restart the tire
pressure loss warning system
(Y page 337).
XVehicles for USA: restart the tire pressure
monitor (Y page 338).
For more information on driving with the
emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 361).
Snow chains
GWARNING
If snow chains are installed to the front
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.
There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
Rnever install snow chains to the front
wheels
Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the
rear wheels.
! On some tire sizes there is not enough
space for snow chains. To avoid damage to
the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and
tire combinations" section under "Tires and
wheels".
! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you wish
to mount snow chains on steel wheels,
make sure that you remove the respective
wheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps may
otherwise be damaged.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use snow chains
that have been specially approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a
corresponding standard of quality.
If you intend to mount snow chains, please
bear the following points in mind:
Rsnow chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible
wheel-tire combinations (Y page 359).
Ronly use snow chains when driving on roads
completely covered by snow. Remove the
snow chains as soon as possible when you
come to a road that is not snow-covered.
Rlocal regulations may restrict the use of
snow chains. Observe the appropriate
regulations if you wish to mount snow
chains.
Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
iYou may wish to deactivate
ESP®(Y page 70) when pulling away with
snow chains installed. You can thereby
allow the wheels to spin in a controlled
manner, achieving an increased driving
force (cutting action).
For more information on driving with the
emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 361).
Winter operation 333
Wheels and tires
Z
Tire pressure
Tire pressure specifications
Operation with a trailer: the applicable
value for the rear tires is the maximum tire
pressure value stated in the table inside the
fuel filler flap.
GWARNING
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase.
Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires
including the spare wheel:
Rmonthly, at least
Rif the load changes
Rbefore beginning a long journey
Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
1.) Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the
vehicle (Y page 342).
The Tire and Loading Information placard
contains the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
iThe specifications given on the following
Tire and Loading Information placard are
examples. Tire pressure specifications are
vehicle-specific and may deviate from the
data shown here. The tire pressures
applicable to your vehicle can be found on
the Tire and Loading Information placard on
your vehicle.
:Recommended tire pressures
Option 2) Tire pressure table on the inside
of the fuel filler flap.
The tire pressure table contains the
recommended pressures for cold tires for
various operating conditions, i.e. differing
load and speed conditions.
iSpecifications shown in the examples of
tire pressure tables are for illustration
purposes only. Tire pressure specifications
are vehicle-specific and may deviate from
the data shown here. Tire pressure
specifications applicable to your vehicle
are located in your vehicle's tire pressure
table.
Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted
for this vehicle by the factory
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire
pressure information following is only valid
for that tire size. The load conditions "partially
laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the
334 Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
table for different numbers of occupants and
amounts of luggage. The actual number of
seats may differ.
Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.
R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size
and can be found on the tire sidewall
(Y page 348).
If the tire pressures have been set to the
lower values for lighter loads and/or lower
road speeds, the pressures should be reset
to the higher values:
Rif you want to drive with an increased load
and/or
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds.
iThe tire pressures for increased loads
and/or higher road speeds, shown in the
tire pressure table, may have a negative
effect on driving comfort.
iFor vehicles towing a trailer, the full load
value on the tire pressure label located on
the inside of the fuel filler flap is valid for
the rear axle.
Option 3) The tire pressure for the
emergency/collapsible spare wheel
(depending on vehicle equipment) can be
found:
Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the
emergency/collapsible spare wheel
Rin the "Wheel and tire combinations"
section (Y page 359) in this Operator's
Manual
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this
can lead to an excessive build up of heat and
a sudden loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Important notes on tire pressure
GWARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
pressure that is too low may result in a tire
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
RCheck the tire for foreign objects.
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
valve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
GWARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire
pressure monitors keep the tire valve open.
This can also result in tire pressure loss. There
is a risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Tire pressure 335
Wheels and tires
Z
To test tire pressure, use a suitable tire
pressure gauge. The outer appearance of a
tire does not permit any reliable conclusion
about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped
with the electronic tire pressure monitoring
system, the tire pressure can be checked
using the on-board computer.
The tire temperature and pressure increase
when the vehicle is in motion. This is
dependent on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire
pressures when the tires are cold.
The tires are cold:
Rif the vehicle has been parked without
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
hours and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
than 1 mile (1.6 km)
The tire temperature changes depending on
the outside temperature, the vehicle speed
and the tire load. If the tire temperature
changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure
changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/
1.5 psi). Take this into account when
checking the pressure of warm tires and only
correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the
current operating conditions. If you check the
tire pressure when the tires are warm, the
resulting value will be higher than if the tires
were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the
tire pressure to the value specified for cold
tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be
too low.
Observe the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of
the fuel filler flap
Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the
emergency/collapsible spare wheel
(depending on vehicle equipment)
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflation
GWARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can
overheat and burst as a consequence. In
addition, they also suffer from excessive and/
or irregular wear, which can severely impair
the braking properties and the driving
characteristics. There is a risk of an accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
Underinflated tires may:
Rwear quickly and unevenly
Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Roverheat, leading to tire defects
Rhave an adverse effect on handling
characteristics
Overinflation
GWARNING
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
because they are damaged more easily by
road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
also suffer from irregular wear, which can
severely impair the braking properties and the
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
Overinflated tires may:
Rhave an adverse effect on handling
characteristics
Rwear quickly and unevenly
Rbe more susceptible to damage
Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort
Rincrease the braking distance
Maximum tire pressures
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure. Always observe the
336 Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
recommended tire pressure for your vehicle
when adjusting the tire pressure
(Y page 334).
:Example: maximum permissible tire
pressure
iThe actual values for tires are vehicle-
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration.
Checking the tire pressures
Important safety notes
Observe the "tire pressure information"
section (Y page 334).
Information on air pressure for the tires on
your vehicle can be found:
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard on the B-pillar
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
flap
Rin the "Tire pressure information" section
Checking tire pressures manually
To determine and set the correct tire
pressure, proceed as follows:
XRemove the valve cap of the tire that is to
be checked.
XPress the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
XRead the tire pressure and compare it with
the recommended value on the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the
B-pillar on the driver's side of your vehicle.
XIf necessary, increase the tire pressure to
the recommended value (Y page 334).
XIf the tire pressure is too high, release air
by pressing down the metal pin in the valve
using the tip of a pen, for example. Then,
check the tire pressure again using the tire
pressure gauge.
XScrew the valve cap onto the valve.
XRepeat these steps for the other tires.
Tire pressure loss warning system
(Canada only)
General notes
While the vehicle is in motion, the tire
pressure loss warning system monitors the
set tire pressure using the rotational speed of
the wheels. This enables the system to detect
significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed
of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of
a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning
message will appear in the multifunction
display.
You can recognize the tire pressure loss
warning by the Run Flat Indicator
Active Press 'OK' to Restart message
which appears in the Service menu of the
multifunction display. Information on the
message display can be found in the
"Restarting the tire pressure loss warning
system" section (Y page 338).
Important safety notes
The tire pressure warning system does not
warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.
Observe the notes on the recommended tire
pressure (Y page 334).
The tire pressure loss warning does not
replace the need to regularly check the tire
pressure. An even loss of pressure on several
tires at the same time cannot be detected by
the tire pressure loss warning system.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
Tire pressure 337
Wheels and tires
Z
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
abrupt steering maneuvers.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning
system is limited or delayed if:
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
tires.
Rroad conditions are wintry.
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style
(cornering at high speeds or driving with
high rates of acceleration).
Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer.
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the
vehicle or on the roof).
Restarting the tire pressure loss
warning system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system
if you have:
Rchanged the tire pressure
Rchanged the wheels or tires
Rmounted new wheels or tires
XBefore restarting, make sure that the tire
pressures are set properly on all four tires
for the respective operating conditions.
The recommended tire pressure can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
A tire pressure table is also affixed to the
fuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss
warning system can only give reliable
warnings if you have set the correct tire
pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is set,
these incorrect values will be monitored.
XObserve the notes in the section on tire
pressures (Y page 334).
XMake sure that the SmartKey is in position
2(Y page 145) in the ignition lock.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Service
menu.
XPress the 9 or : button on the
steering wheel to select the Tire
Pressure menu.
XPress the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator Active
Press 'OK' to Restart message
appears in the multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
XPress the a button.
The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears in the multifunction display.
XPress the 9 or : button to select
Yes.
XPress the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted
message appears in the multifunction
display.
After a teach-in period, the tire pressure
loss warning system will monitor the set
tire pressures of all four tires.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
XPress the % button.
or
XIf the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears, use the 9 or : button to
select Cancel.
XPress the a button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Tire pressure monitor
General notes
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the
vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor
the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire
pressure monitor warns you if the pressure
drops in one or more of the tires. The tire
pressure monitor only functions if the
corresponding sensors are installed on all
wheels.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in
the multifunction display. After a few minutes
338 Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
of driving, the current tire pressure of each
tire is shown in the Service menu of the
multifunction display.
Example: current tire pressure display
For information on the message display, refer
to the "Checking the tire pressure
electronically" section (Y page 340).
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked at least once a month
when cold and inflated to the pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire
pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler
flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire pressure
for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will
flash for approximately a minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will be repeated every time the
vehicle is started as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
incompatible replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure to that recommended for cold tires
which is suitable for the operating situation
(Y page 334). Note that the correct tire
pressure for the current operating situation
must first be taught-in to the tire pressure
monitor. If there is a substantial loss of
pressure, the warning threshold for the
warning message is aligned to the reference
values taught-in. Restart the tire pressure
monitor after adjusting the pressure of the
cold tires (Y page 341). The current
pressures are saved as new reference values.
As a result, a warning message will appear if
the tire pressure drops significantly.
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you
of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
the notes on the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 334).
Tire pressure 339
Wheels and tires
Z
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
abrupt steering maneuvers.
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow
warning lamp in the instrument cluster for
indicating a pressure loss or malfunction.
Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up
indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or
the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the
tire pressure on one or more tires is
significantly too low. The tire pressure
monitor is not malfunctioning.
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a
minute and then remains lit constantly, the
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
iIn addition to the warning lamp, a
message appears in the multifunction
display.
Further information can be found on
(Y page 256).
If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning,
it may take more than ten minutes for the tire
pressure warning lamp to inform you of the
malfunction by flashing for approximately one
minute and then remaining lit. When the
malfunction has been rectified, the tire
pressure warning lamp goes out after a few
minutes of driving.
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-
board computer may differ from those
measured at a gas station with a pressure
gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-
board computer refer to those measured at
sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure
values indicated by a pressure gauge are
higher than those shown by the on-board
computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire
pressures.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can
be affected by interference from radio
transmitting equipment (e.g. radio
headphones, two-way radios) that may be
being operated in or near the vehicle.
Checking the tire pressure
electronically
XMake sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 145).
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Service
menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure.
XPress the a button.
The current tire pressure of each tire is
shown in the multifunction display.
If the vehicle has been parked for over
20 minutes, the Tire pressures will be
displayed after driving a few
minutes message appears.
After a teach-in process, the tire pressure
monitor automatically detects new wheels or
new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of
the tire pressure value to the individual
wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure
Monitor Active display message is shown
instead of the tire pressure display. The tire
pressures are already being monitored.
iIf a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel
is mounted, the system may continue to
show the tire pressure of the wheel that has
been removed for a few minutes. If this
occurs, note that the value displayed for
the position where the spare tire is
mounted is not the same as the spare
wheel/emergency spare wheel's current
tire pressure.
340 Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
Tire pressure monitor warning
messages
If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
loss in one or more tires, a warning message
is shown in the multifunction display and the
yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp
comes on.
RIf the Correct Tire Pressure message
appears in the multifunction display, the
tire pressure in at least one tire is too low
and must be corrected at the next
opportunity.
RIf the Check Tires message appears in the
multifunction display, the tire pressure in
one or more tires has dropped significantly
and the tires must be checked.
RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction
appears in the multifunction display, the
tire pressure in one or more tires has
dropped suddenly and the tires must be
checked.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in
the display messages in the "Tires" section
(Y page 256).
iIf the wheel positions on the vehicle are
rotated, the tire pressures may be
displayed for the wrong positions for a
short time. This is rectified after a few
minutes of driving, and the tire pressures
are displayed for the correct positions.
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
When you restart the tire pressure monitor,
all existing warning messages are deleted and
the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses
the currently set tire pressures as the
reference values for monitoring. In most
cases, the tire pressure monitor will
automatically detect the new reference
values after you have changed the tire
pressure. However, you can also define
reference values manually as described here.
The tire pressure monitor then monitors the
new tire pressure values.
XSet the tire pressure to the value
recommended for the corresponding
driving situation on the Tire and Loading
Information placard on the driver's side
B-pillar (Y page 334).
Additional tire pressure values for different
loads can also be found on the tire pressure
table on the inside of the fuel filler flap
(Y page 334).
XMake sure that the tire pressure is correct
on all four wheels.
XMake sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Service
menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure.
XPress the a button.
The multifunction display shows the
current tire pressure for the individual tires
or the Tire pressures will be
displayed after driving a few
minutes message.
XPress the : button.
The Use Current Pressures as New
Reference Values message appears in
the multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
XPress the a button.
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted
message appears in the multifunction
display.
After driving for a few minutes, the system
checks whether the current tire pressures
are within the specified range. The new tire
pressures are then accepted as reference
values and monitored.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
XPress the % button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Tire pressure 341
Wheels and tires
Z
Loading the vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
GWARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
steering and driving characteristics and lead
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
exceeding the maximum load.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show
the maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The
Tire and Loading Information placard
shows the maximum permissible number
of occupants and the maximum
permissible vehicle load. It also contains
details of the tire sizes and
corresponding pressures for tires
mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the
B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle
identification plate informs you of the
gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle
occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You
can also find information about the
maximum gross axle weight rating on the
front and rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried
by one axle (front or rear axle). Never
exceed the maximum load or the
maximum gross axle weight rating for the
front or rear axle.
:B-pillar, driver's side
Maximum permissible load
iThe specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the
illustration are examples. The maximum
permissible load is vehicle-specific and
may deviate from the data shown here. The
maximum permissible load that applies for
your vehicle can be found on your vehicle's
Tire and Loading Information placard.
XSpecification for maximum permissible
load : is listed on the Tire and Loading
Information placard: "The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
342 Loading the vehicle
Wheels and tires
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,
load, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the specified
value.
Number of seats
iThe specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the
illustration are examples. The number of
seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from
the details shown. The number of seats in
your vehicle can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information placard.
Maximum number of seats : indicates the
maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
Determining the correct load limit
Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
XStep 1: Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on
your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
placard.
XStep 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
XStep 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX
kilograms or XXX lbs.
XStep 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs (1 400 - 750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
XStep 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Refer to
this Operator's Manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle
(Y page 345).
Loading the vehicle 343
Wheels and tires
Z
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use
a load limit of 1 500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are
using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard (Y page 343).
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Step 1 Combined maximum
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Step 2 Number of people in
the vehicle (driver
and occupants)
5 3 1
Distribution of the
occupants
Front: 2
Rear: 3
Front: 1
Rear: 2
Front: 1
Weight of the
occupants
Occupant 1:
150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2:
180 lbs (82 kg)
Occupant 3:
160 lbs (73 kg)
Occupant 4:
140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5:
120 lbs (54 kg)
Occupant 1:
200 lbs (91 kg)
Occupant 2:
190 lbs (86 kg)
Occupant 3:
150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 1:
150 lbs (68 kg)
Gross weight of all
occupants
750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
344 Loading the vehicle
Wheels and tires
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Step 3 Permissible load and
trailer load/
noseweight
(maximum
permissible load
rating from the Tire
and Loading
Information placard
minus the gross
weight of all
occupants)
1500 lbs
(680 kg) -
750 lbs (340 kg)
= 750 lbs
(340 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg) -
540 lbs (245 kg)
= 960 lbs
(435 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg) -
150 lbs (68 kg) =
1350 lbs
(612 kg)
The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.
Further information can be found under "Towing a trailer" (Y page 345).
Vehicle identification plate
Even if you have calculated the total load
carefully, you should still make sure that the
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can
be found on the vehicle identification plate on
the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
(Y page 342).
Permissible gross vehicle weight: the
gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,
load and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross axle weight rating: the maximum
permissible weight that can be carried by one
axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross
vehicle weight and maximum gross axle
weight rating), have your loaded vehicle
(including driver, occupants, cargo, and full
trailer load if applicable) weighed on a
suitable vehicle weighbridge.
Trailer load/noseweight
The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross
weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,
the trailer load/noseweight is included in the
load along with occupants and luggage. The
trailer load/noseweight is usually
approximately 8% of the gross weight of the
trailer and its load.
Maximum load rating
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum
permissible load can be found on the
vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
(Y page 342).
iThe actual values for tires are vehicle-
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration.
Maximum load rating 345
Wheels and tires
Z
Maximum tire load : is the maximum
permissible weight for which the tire is
approved.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards
Overview of Tire Quality Grading
Standards
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are
U.S. government specifications. Their
purpose is to provide drivers with uniform
reliable information on tire performance data.
tire manufacturers have to grade tires using
three performance factors: tread wear :,
tire traction ; and heat resistance =. All
tires sold in North America are provided with
the corresponding quality class mark on the
sidewall of the tire, even though these
regulations do not apply to Canada.
iThe actual values for tires are vehicle-
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration.
Where applicable, the tire grading
information can be found on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and maximum
tire width.
For example:
Treadwear Traction Temperature
200 AA A
All passenger car tires must conform to the
statutory safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. government course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm, due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate conditions.
Traction
GWARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road
surfaces.
You should pay special attention to road
conditions when temperatures are around
the freezing point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum
tread depth of ã in (4 mm) for all four winter
tires (Y page 332) to maintain normal driving
characteristics in winter. Winter tires can
346 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Wheels and tires
reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
surfaces in comparison with summer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still
considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with ice or snow. Take
appropriate care when driving.
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage
to the drive train.
Temperature
GWARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C. These represent the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level
of performance which all passenger car tires
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Tire labeling
Overview of tire labeling
The following markings are on the tire in
addition to the tire name (sales designation)
and the manufacturer's name:
:Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard
(Y page 351)
;DOT, Tire Identification Number
(Y page 350)
=Maximum tire load (Y page 345)
?Maximum tire pressure (Y page 336)
AManufacturer
BTire material (Y page 351)
CTire size designation, load-bearing
capacity and speed index (Y page 348)
DLoad index (Y page 350)
ETire name
iTire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
Tire labeling 347
Wheels and tires
Z
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity and speed rating
:Tire width
;Nominal aspect ratio in %
=Tire code
?Rim diameter
ALoad bearing index
BSpeed rating
iTire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall
may not contain any letters or may contain
one letter that precedes the size description.
If there is no letter preceding the size
description (as shown above): these are
passenger vehicle tires according to
European manufacturing standards.
If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.
manufacturing standards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these
are light truck tires according to U.S.
manufacturing standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: these are
compact emergency spare wheels at high tire
pressure, to be used only temporarily in an
emergency.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal
tire width in millimeters.
Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the
size ratio between the tire height and tire
width and is shown in percent. The aspect
ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by
the tire height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents
diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial
tires.
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter
of the rim flange. The rim diameter is
specified in inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A
is a numerical code that specifies the
maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum
permissible load can be found on the
vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
(Y page 342).
Example:
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can
bear. For further information on the maximum
tire load in kilograms and lbs, see
(Y page 345).
For further information on the load bearing
index, see "Load index" (Y page 350).
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the
approved maximum speed of the tire.
GWARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing
capacity and the approved maximum speed
could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting.
There is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
Regardless of the speed rating, always
observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and
348 Tire labeling
Wheels and tires
adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions.
Summer tires
Index Speed rating
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR"
in the size description, depending on the
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).
The service specification is made up of
load-bearing index A and speed rating
B.
RIf the size description of your tire includes
"ZR" and there are no service
specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in
order to find out the maximum speed.
If a service specification is available, the
maximum speed is limited according to the
speed rating in the service specification.
Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In this
example, "97 Y" is the service specification.
The letter "Y" represents the speed rating.
The maximum speed of the tire is limited to
186 mph (300 km/h).
RThe size description for all tires with
maximum speeds of over 186 mph
(300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the
service specification must be given in
parentheses. Example:
275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)"
indicates that the maximum speed of the
tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the
tire manufacturer about the maximum
speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Index Speed rating
Q M+S16 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S16 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S16 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S16 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
iNot all tires with the M+S marking provide
the driving characteristics of winter tires.
In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires
also have the i snowflake symbol on
the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill
the requirements of the Rubber
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC)
regarding snow traction, and were specially
developed for driving on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph
(210km/h).
The speed rating of tires mounted at the
factory may be higher than the maximum
speed that the electronic speed limiter
permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating for your vehicle as specified in
the "tires" section (Y page 359), e.g. if you
buy new tires.
Further information about reading tire data
can be obtained from any qualified specialist
workshop.
16 Or M+Si for winter tires.
Tire labeling 349
Wheels and tires
Z
Load index
iTire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
In addition to the load-bearing index, load
index : may be imprinted after the letters
that identify speed rating B(Y page 348) on
the sidewall of the tire.
RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard
load (SL) tire
RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced
tire
RLight Load: represents a light load tire
RC, D, E: represents a load range that
depends on the maximum load that the tire
can carry at a certain pressure
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every
manufacturer of new tires or retreader has to
imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire
produced.
The TIN is a unique identification number. The
TIN enables tire manufacturers to inform
purchasers of recalls and other safety-
relevant matters. It makes it possible for the
purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer
identification code ;, tire size =, tire type
code ? and manufacturing date A.
iTire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : indicates that the tire complies
with the requirements of the U.S. Department
of Transportation.
Manufacturer identification code:
manufacturer identification code ; provides
details on the tire manufacturer. New tires
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded
tires have a code with four symbols.
For further information about retreaded tires,
see (Y page 330).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used
by the manufacturer as a code to describe
specific characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
A provides information about the age of a
tire. The first and second positions represent
the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
for the first calendar week. Positions three
and four represent the year of manufacture.
For example, a tire that is marked with
"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in
2008.
350 Tire labeling
Wheels and tires
Tire characteristics
iTire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
This information describes the type of tire
cord and the number of layers in
sidewall : and under tire tread ;.
Definition of terms for tires and
loading
Tire ply composition and material
used
Describes the number of plies or the number
of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,
nylon, polyester and other materials.
Bar
Metric unit for tire pressure.
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and
100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
1 bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of
the United States Department of
Transportation.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants for which the
vehicle is designed multiplied by
68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards
A uniform standard to grade the quality of
tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction
and temperature characteristics. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
government testing procedures. The ratings
are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
Recommended tire pressure
The recommended tire pressure applies to
the tires mounted at the factory.
The Tire and Loading Information placard
contains the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the
recommended pressures for cold tires for
various operating conditions, i.e. differing
load and speed conditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to
optional equipment
This is the combined weight of all standard
and optional equipment available for the
vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually
installed on the vehicle or not.
Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire
is mounted.
Definition of terms for tires and loading 351
Wheels and tires
Z
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The
gross axle weight rating can be found on the
vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
the driver's side.
Speed rating
The speed rating is part of the tire
identification. It specifies the speed range for
which the tire is approved.
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
The GTW is the weight of a trailer including
the weight of the load, luggage, accessories
etc. on the trailer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight
of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare
wheel, accessories installed, occupants,
luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if
applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not
exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR
as specified on the vehicle identification plate
on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of
the vehicle including all accessories,
occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar
noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle
weight rating is specified on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The maximum weight is the sum of the curb
weight of the vehicle, the weight of the
accessories, the total load limit and the
weight of the optional equipment installed at
the factory.
Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa
corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire
pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the
equivalent of 1 bar.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall
of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing
capacity more precisely.
Curb weight
The weight of a vehicle with standard
equipment including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-
conditioning system and optional equipment
if these are installed in the vehicle, but does
not include passengers or luggage.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load rating in kilograms or
pounds is the maximum weight for which a
tire is approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one
tire.
352 Definition of terms for tires and loading
Wheels and tires
Maximum load on one tire
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle
by two.
PSI (pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
Aspect ratio
Relationship between tire height and tire
width in percent.
Tire pressure
This is pressure inside the tire applying an
outward force to each square inch of the tire's
surface. The tire pressure is specified in
pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal
(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only
be corrected when the tires are cold.
Tire pressure of cold tires
The tires are cold:
Rif the vehicle has been parked without
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
hours and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
than 1 mile (1.6 km)
Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Bead
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
securely on the wheel. There are several steel
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from
coming loose from the wheel rim.
Sidewall
The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Weight of optional extras
The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These
optional extras, such as high-performance
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-
performance battery, are not included in the
curb weight and the weight of the
accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
This is a unique identifier which can be used
by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
example for a product recall, and thus identify
the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
type code and the manufacturing date.
Load bearing index
The load bearing index (also load index) is a
code that contains the maximum load bearing
capacity of a tire.
Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the
tires and the road surface.
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)
The TWR specifies the maximum permissible
weight that the ball coupling of the trailer tow
hitch can support.
Definition of terms for tires and loading 353
Wheels and tires
Z
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are
distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread
is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in
(1.6 mm) has been reached.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
their designated seating positions.
Total load limit
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in
the vehicle.
Changing a wheel
Flat tire
You can find information on what to do in the
event of a flat tire in the "Flat tire" section
(Y page 314).
Information on driving with MOExtended tires
in the event of a flat tire can be found under
"MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
characteristics" (Y page 315).
Rotating the wheels
GWARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
severely impair the driving characteristics if
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
The wheel brakes or suspension components
may also be damaged. There is a risk of
accident.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
and tires are of the same dimensions.
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
monitor, electronic components are
located in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used
near the valve. This could damage the
electronic components.
Only have tires changed at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 355).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
in the center.
If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you
can rotate the wheels according to the
intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty
book in your vehicle documents. If no
warranty book is available, the tires should be
rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Do
not change the direction of wheel rotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if
necessary, restart the tire pressure loss
warning system or the tire pressure monitor.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
is rotated. Check the tire pressures.
Information on changing tires and mounting
the spare wheel (Y page 354).
Direction of rotation
Tires with a specified direction of rotation
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
of hydroplaning. You will only gain these
benefits if the correct direction of rotation is
maintained.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
its correct direction of rotation.
354 Changing a wheel
Wheels and tires
Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the
tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Cleaning the wheels
GWARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components.
Components damaged in this way may fail
unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced
immediately.
Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
XStop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
XApply the parking brake.
XBring the front wheels into the straight-
ahead position.
XMove the selector lever to position P.
XSwitch off the engine.
XVehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
XVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the
driver's door.
The on-board electronics have status 0,
which is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
XVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 145).
XIf included in the vehicle equipment,
remove the tire-change tool kit from the
vehicle.
XSecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
away.
Securing the vehicle to prevent it
from rolling away
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
it can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(Y page 314).
The folding wheel chock is an additional
safety measure to prevent the vehicle from
rolling away, for example when changing a
wheel.
XFold both plates upwards :.
XFold out lower plate ;.
XGuide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
the openings in base plate =.
Securing the vehicle on level ground
XOn level ground: place chocks or other
suitable items under the front and rear of
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
wheel you wish to change.
Mounting a wheel 355
Wheels and tires
Z
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients
XOn light downhill gradients: place
chocks or other suitable items in front of
the wheels of the front and rear axle.
Raising the vehicle
GWARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
There is a risk of injury.
Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the
jack must be positioned vertically, directly
under the jacking point of the vehicle.
The following must be observed when raising
the vehicle:
Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used
incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the
vehicle raised.
Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed. It is not suited for
performing maintenance work under the
vehicle.
Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and
downhill slopes.
Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from
rolling away by applying the parking brake
and inserting wheel chocks. Never
disengage the parking brake while the
vehicle is raised.
Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
large, load-bearing underlay must be used.
On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay
must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the
jack will not be able to achieve its load-
bearing capacity due to the restricted
height.
Rmake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does
not exceed 1.2 inches (3 cm).
Rnever place your hands and feet under the
raised vehicle.
Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.
Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Rnever open or close a door or the tailgate
when the vehicle is raised.
Rmake sure that no persons are present in
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
! The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.
356 Mounting a wheel
Wheels and tires
XUsing lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on
the wheel you wish to change by about one
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts
completely.
The jacking points are located just behind the
wheel housings of the front wheels and just
in front of the wheel housings of the rear
wheels (arrows).
XTake the ratchet wrench out of the vehicle
tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of
the jack so that the letters AUF are visible.
XPosition jack = at jacking point ;.
XTurn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits
completely on jacking point ; and the
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
XTurn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is
raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground.
Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub
threads could otherwise be damaged when
you screw them in.
XUnscrew the wheel bolts.
XRemove the wheel.
Mounting a new wheel
GWARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
Mounting a wheel 357
Wheels and tires
Z
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event
of damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
GWARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (Y page 354).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety
reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you only use wheel bolts which have been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel.
:Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by the
factory
;Wheel bolts for the collapsible spare
wheel
! Always use wheel bolts ; to mount the
collapsible spare wheel. Using other wheel
bolts to mount the collapsible spare wheel
could damage the brake system.
Be sure to use the original-length wheel bolts
when re-mounting the original wheel after it
has been repaired.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
XClean the wheel and wheel hub contact
surfaces.
XPlace the new wheel on the wheel hub and
push it on.
XTighten the wheel bolts until they are
finger-tight.
XInflate the collapsible spare wheel
(Y page 362).
Only then lower the vehicle.
Lowering the vehicle
GWARNING
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
and bolts are not tightened to the specified
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Have the tightening torque immediately
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed.
! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using
the tire inflation compressor before
lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim could
otherwise be damaged.
358 Mounting a wheel
Wheels and tires
XPlace the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon
nut of the jack so that the letters AB are
visible.
XTurn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is
once again standing firmly on the ground.
XPlace the jack to one side.
XTighten the wheel bolts evenly in a
crosswise pattern in the sequence
indicated (: to A). The tightening torque
must be 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
XTurn the jack back to its initial position and
store it together with the rest of the tire-
change tool kit in the cargo compartment.
XTransport the faulty wheel in the cargo
compartment.
XCheck the tire pressure of the newly
mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observe the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 334).
For further information on stowing the
collapsible spare wheel, see (Y page 363).
iVehicles with tire pressure monitor: all
wheels mounted must be equipped with
functioning sensors.
Wheel and tire combinations
General notes
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use tires and
wheels which have been approved by
Mercedes-Benz specifically for your
vehicle.
These tires have been specially adapted for
use with the control systems, such as ABS
or ESP®, and are marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only
certain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires
may only be used on wheels that have been
specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,
vehicle noise emissions or fuel
consumption, may otherwise be adversely
affected. In addition, when driving with a
load, tire dimension variations could cause
the tires to come into contact with the
bodywork and axle components. This could
result in damage to the tires or the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for
damage resulting from the use of tires,
wheels or accessories other than those
tested and approved.
Information on tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop.
! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
previous damage cannot always be
detected on retreaded tires. As a result,
Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle
safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do
not mount used tires if you have no
information about their previous usage.
iThe recommended pressures for various
operating conditions can be found:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information
placard with the recommended tire
pressures on the B-pillar on the driver's
side
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of
the fuel filler flap
Wheel and tire combinations 359
Wheels and tires
Z
Observe the notes on recommended tire
pressures under various operating
conditions (Y page 334).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only
when the tires are cold. Comply with the
maintenance recommendations of the tire
manufacturer in the vehicle document
wallet.
iNotes on the vehicle equipment – always
equip the vehicle with:
Rtires of the same size on a given axle
(left/right)
Rthe same type of tires at a given time
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
tires)
iOn the following pages, you can find
information on approved wheel rims and
tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with
winter tires. Winter tires are not available
at the factory as standard equipment or
optional extras.
If you would like to equip your vehicle with
approved winter tires, you may also, in
certain circumstances, require rims of the
appropriate size. The size of the approved
winter tires may deviate from that of the
standard tires. This is dependent on the
model and the equipment installed at the
factory.
The tires and wheel rims, as well as further
information, can be obtained at a qualified
specialist workshop.
iOverview of abbreviations used in the
following tire tables:
RBA: both axles
RFA: front axle
RRA: rear axle
In the following table, the wheel/tire
combinations are assigned to the vehicle
models through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.:
V1 GLK 250 BlueTEC, GLK 350, GLK 350
4MATIC
iNot all wheel and tire combinations are
available at the factory for all countries.
360 Wheel and tire combinations
Wheels and tires
Tires
Summer tires Alloy wheels V1
FA
RA
235/50 R 19 99 V17
255/45 R 19 100 V17, 18
7.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)
8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)
#
All-weather tires Alloy wheels V1
BA 235/60 R17 102 H M+S17 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.87 in (47.5 mm)
#
BA 235/50 R19 99 H M+S17 7.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)
#
BA 235/50 R19 99 H M+S
MOExtended19
7.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)
#
BA 235/45 R20 100 H XL M+S17 8.0 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
#
All-terrain tires Alloy wheels V1
BA 235/60 R17 102 H M+S17 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.87 in (47.5 mm)
#
Winter tires Alloy wheels V1
BA 235/60 R17 102 H M+Si17 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.87 in (47.5 mm)
#
Emergency spare wheel
Important safety notes
GWARNING
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type
of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel
and the wheel to be replaced may differ.
Mounting an emergency spare wheel may
severely impair the driving characteristics.
There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
Radapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or
emergency spare wheel that differs in size.
17 USA: not for GLK 250 BlueTEC.
18 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
19 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressure
loss warning system.
Emergency spare wheel 361
Wheels and tires
Z
Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel of a different size briefly.
Rdo not switch ESP® off.
Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel of a different size replaced at the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions
as well as the tire type must be correct.
When using an emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a different size, you must not
exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Snow chains must not be mounted on
emergency spare wheels.
General notes
You should regularly check the pressure of
the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior
to long trips, and correct the pressure as
necessary (Y page 334). The applicable value
is found on the wheel or under "Technical
data" (Y page 359).
iWhen you are driving with the collapsible
spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure
loss warning system or the tire pressure
monitor cannot function reliably. Only
restart the tire pressure loss warning
system/the tire pressure monitor when the
damaged wheel has been replaced with a
new wheel.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitor:
after mounting an emergency spare wheel,
the system may still display the tire
pressure of the removed wheel for a few
minutes. The value displayed for the
mounted emergency spare wheel is not the
same as the current tire pressure of the
emergency spare wheel.
An emergency spare wheel may also be
mounted against the direction of rotation.
Observe the time restriction on use as well as
the speed limitation specified on the
emergency spare wheel.
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. This also applies to the
emergency spare wheel.
Collapsible spare wheel
Removing the collapsible emergency
spare wheel
The collapsible spare wheel can be found in
the stowage well under the cargo
compartment floor.
XLift the cargo compartment floor up
(Y page 281).
XRemove stowage compartment :.
XTurn retaining screw ; counter-clockwise
and remove it.
XRemove collapsible spare wheel =.
XTake the wheel bolts for the collapsible
spare wheel from the vehicle tool kit.
For further information on changing a wheel
and mounting the spare wheel, see
(Y page 314).
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel
! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using
the tire inflation compressor before
lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim could
otherwise be damaged.
362 Emergency spare wheel
Wheels and tires
XPull connector ? and the air hose out of
the housing.
XRemove the cap from the valve on the
collapsible spare wheel.
XScrew union nut : on the air hose onto the
valve.
XMake sure on/off switch A of the tire
inflation compressor is set to 0.
XInsert plug ? into the socket of the
cigarette lighter (Y page 284) or into a 12 V
power socket (Y page 284) in your vehicle.
XMake sure that the SmartKey is in position
1(Y page 145) in the ignition lock.
XPress on/off switch A on the tire inflation
compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched
on. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is
shown on pressure gauge =.
! Do not operate the tire inflation
compressor for longer than eight minutes
at a time without a break. It may otherwise
overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be
operated again once it has cooled down.
XInflate the tire to the specified tire
pressure.
The specified tire pressure is printed on the
yellow label of the emergency spare wheel.
XWhen the specified tire pressure has been
reached, press on/off switch A on the
electric air pump to 0.
The tire inflation compressor is switched
off.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock.
XIf the tire pressure is higher than the
specified pressure, press pressure release
button ; until the correct tire pressure has
been reached.
XUnscrew union nut : on the air hose from
the valve.
XScrew the cap onto the valve of the
collapsible spare wheel again.
XStow plug ? and the air hose in the lower
section of the blower housing.
XStow the tire inflation compressor in the
vehicle.
Stowing a used collapsible spare wheel
Take the following steps to stow a used
collapsible spare wheel. Otherwise, the
collapsible spare wheel will not fit in the spare
wheel well. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you have this work carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in
the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise,
moisture may get into the vehicle.
XRemove the valve extractor from the
vehicle tool kit.
XUnscrew the valve cap from the valve.
XUnscrew the valve insert from the valve and
release the air.
iFully deflating the tires can take a few
minutes.
XScrew the valve insert back into the valve.
XScrew the valve cap back on.
XPlace the valve extractor back into the
vehicle tool kit.
XStow the collapsible spare wheel in the
emergency spare wheel well under the
cargo compartment and fasten in place.
Emergency spare wheel 363
Wheels and tires
Z
Technical data
Collapsible emergency spare wheel20
Tires Wheels V1
185/75 – 17 98 P
Tire pressure: 280 kPa (2.8 bar/41 psi)
6.0 B x 17 H2 ET 25 #
iThe specified tire pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel.
20 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the section on snow chains.
364 Emergency spare wheel
Wheels and tires
Useful information ............................ 366
Information regarding technical
data .................................................... 366
Warranty ............................................ 366
Identification plates ......................... 366
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ..................................................... 367
Vehicle data ...................................... 375
Vehicle data for off-road driving ..... 375
Trailer tow hitch ................................ 376
365
Technical data
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 27).
Information regarding technical data
General information
iThe data stated here specifically refers to
a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
the data for all vehicle variants and trim
levels.
Warranty
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following
warranties:
RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
REmission Systems Warranty
REmission Performance Warranty
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
Control System Warranty
RState warranty enforcement laws (Lemon
Laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
Accessories warranties. These are available
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
iIf you lose the Service and Warranty
Information booklet, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to arrange a
replacement. It will be mailed to you.
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with
vehicle identification number (VIN)
XOpen the driver's door.
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
366 Identification plates
Technical data
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
;Paint code
=VIN
iThe data shown on the identification plate
is example data. This data is different for
every vehicle and can deviate from the data
shown here. You can find the data
applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle
identification plate.
VIN
XSlide the right-hand front seat to its
rearmost position.
XFold floor covering : upwards.
You will see VIN ;.
The VIN can also be found in the following
locations:
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 367)
Ron the vehicle identification plate
(Y page 366)
Engine number
:Emission control information plate,
including the certification of both federal
and Californian emissions standards
;Engine number (stamped into the
crankcase)
=VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
Service products and filling
capacities
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Service products may be poisonous and
hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
Service products and filling capacities 367
Technical data
Z
HEnvironmental note
Dispose of service products in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Service products include the following:
RFuels (e.g. gasoline, diesel)
RExhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.
DEF
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
RCoolant
RBrake fluid
RWindshield washer fluid
RClimate control system refrigerant
Comply with all valid regulations with respect
to handling, storing, and disposing of service
fluids.
Components and service products must be
matched. You should therefore only use
products that have been tested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz.
Information about tested and approved
products can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved
by Mercedes-Benz by the following
inscription on the containers:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations
indicate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.
MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Fuel
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and
explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
GWARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
RWash away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance
without delay.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical
assistance without delay. Do not induce
vomiting.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
Tank capacity
Model Total
capacity
All models 17.4 US gal
(66.0 l)
Model Of which
reserve
All models Approx.
2.1 US gal
(8.0 l)
368 Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
Gasoline
Fuel grade
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the
ignition if you accidentally refuel with the
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
wrong fuel could result in damage to the
fuel system and the engine. Notify a
qualified specialist workshop and have the
fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Only refuel using unleaded gasoline with
a minimum octane rating of 91.
! Only use the fuel recommended.
Operating the vehicle with other fuels can
lead to engine failure.
! Do not use the following:
RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)
RE100 (100% ethanol)
RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)
RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)
RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)
RM100 (100% methanol)
RGasoline with metalliferous additives
RDiesel
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel
recommended for your vehicle. Do not use
additives. This can otherwise lead to engine
damage. This does not include cleaning
additives for the removal and prevention of
residue build-up. gasoline may only be
mixed with cleaning additives
recommended by Mercedes-Benz; see
"Additives". You can obtain further
information from any authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
! To ensure the longevity and full
performance of the engine, only premium-
grade unleaded gasoline must be used.
If standard premium-grade unleaded
gasoline is unavailable and unleaded
gasoline of a lower grade is used for
refueling, observe the following
precautions:
Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full with
regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest
with premium-grade unleaded gasoline
as soon as possible.
Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.
Ravoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds above 3000 rpm.
Rnever refuel using fuel with an octane
number lower than 87. Otherwise,
engine failure could occur.
Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not
permitted. E10 fuel or E15 fuel (unleaded
gasoline with 10% or 15% ethanol) can be
used.
You will usually find information about the fuel
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the
label on the pump, ask the staff for
assistance.
iFor further information, consult a
qualified specialist workshop or on the
Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
Information on refueling (Y page 158).
Additives
! Operating the engine with fuel additives
added later can lead to engine failure. Do
not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does
not include additives for the removal and
prevention of residue buildup. gasoline
must only be mixed with additives
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply
with the instructions for use on the product
label. More information about
recommended additives can be obtained
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
fuel brands that have the additives.
Service products and filling capacities 369
Technical data
Z
The quality of the fuel available in some
countries may not be sufficient. Residue
could build up as a result. In such cases, and
in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center, the gasoline may be mixed with
the cleaning additive recommended by
Mercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254512).
You must observe the notes and mixing ratios
specified on the container.
Diesel
Fuel grade
GWARNING
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
When the engine is running, exhaust system
components could overheat without being
noticed. There is a risk of fire.
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline
with diesel fuel.
! Only use commercially available vehicular
ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL (ULSD,
15 ppm maximum sulfur content) that
meets the ASTM D975 standard. If you do
not refuel with ULSD, you may damage the
BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment
system of the vehicle.
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with
a diesel engine. Do not mix diesel fuel with
gasoline, kerosene or paraffin. This may
otherwise result in damage to the fuel
system and engine.
You will usually find information about the fuel
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the
label on the pump, ask the staff for
assistance.
iFor further information, consult a
qualified specialist workshop or on the
Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
Information on refueling (Y page 158).
Bio-diesel - FAME (fatty acid methyl ester)
Mercedes-Benz USA approves the use of bio-
diesel B5 for all BlueTEC diesel engines. The
concentration of bio-diesel in the ULSD may
not exceed 5% by volume.
Pure bio-diesel and diesel fuel with a higher
percentage of bio-diesel, such as B20, can
damage the engine and the fuel system. For
this reason, they are not approved.
For more information, consult the gas station
staff. The bio-diesel B5 label on the gasoline
pump must clearly state that the standard for
ULSD has been fulfilled. If the label is not
clear, do not refuel the vehicle.
Do not refuel your vehicle with fuels unless
they have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Information on refueling (Y page 159).
Low outside temperatures
iDiesel fuel with improved cold flow
properties is available during the winter
months. Further information about fuel
properties can be obtained from oil
companies, e.g. at gas stations.
DEF
Important safety notes
Comply with the important safety notes for
service products when handling DEF
(Y page 367).
DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust
gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:
Rnot poisonous
Rcolorless and odorless
Rnot flammable
When you open the DEF container, small
amounts of ammonia vapor may be released.
Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are
particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous
membranes and to the eyes. You may
experience a burning sensation in your eyes,
nose and throat. Coughing and watering of
the eyes are possible.
370 Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF
tank only in well-ventilated areas.
Low outside temperatures
DEF freezes at a temperature of
approximately 12 ‡ (-11 †). The vehicle is
delivered from the factory equipped with a
DEF preheating system. Winter operation can
thus be guaranteed even at temperatures
below 12 ‡ (-11 †).
Additives
! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO
22241. Do not use additives with DEF and
do not dilute DEF with water. This may
destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas
aftertreatment system.
Purity
! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to other
service products, cleaning agents or dust)
lead to:
Rincreased emission values
Rdamage to the catalytic converter
Rengine damage
Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas
aftertreatment system
Assuring the purity of DEF is particularly
important with respect to avoiding
malfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas
aftertreatment system.
If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g.
during repair work, it must not be returned to
the tank. The purity of the fluid can no longer
be guaranteed.
Filling capacities
Model Total capacity
GLK 250 BlueTEC 7.3 US gal
(27.5 l)
Engine oil
General notes
! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a
specification other than is necessary to
fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do
not change the engine oil or oil filter in
order to achieve longer replacement
intervals than those prescribed. You could
otherwise cause engine damage or damage
to the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Follow the instructions in the service
interval display regarding the oil change.
Otherwise, you may damage the engine and
the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the
important safety notes on service products
(Y page 367).
The engine oils are matched to the
performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and
service intervals. You should therefore only
use engine oils and oil filters that are
approved for vehicles with maintenance
systems.
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Or visit the website
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The table shows which engine oils have been
approved for your vehicle.
Model Engine
model
MB
Approval
GLK 350
GLK 350 4MATIC
276 229.5
GLK 250
BlueTEC
651 228.51,
229.31,
229.51
iMB approval is indicated on the oil
containers.
Service products and filling capacities 371
Technical data
Z
Filling capacities
The following values refer to an oil change
including the oil filter.
Model Capacity
All models 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
Additives
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
This could damage the engine.
Engine oil viscosity
Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
this means that it is thick; a low viscosity
means that it is thin.
Select an engine oil with an SAE classification
(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside
temperatures. The table shows you which
SAE classifications are to be used. The low-
temperature characteristics of engine oils
can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result
of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore
strongly recommended that you carry out
regular oil changes using an approved engine
oil with the appropriate SAE classification.
Brake fluid
GWARNING
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
brake system when the brakes are applied
hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
There is a risk of an accident.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
the specified intervals.
When handling brake fluid, observe the
important safety notes on service products
(Y page 367).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-
Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.
Information about approved brake fluid can
be obtained at any qualified specialist
workshop or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
iHave the brake fluid regularly replaced at
a qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Coolant
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot
components in the engine compartment, it
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Let the engine cool down before you add
antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not
spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly
clean the antifreeze from components before
starting the engine.
! Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
Further information on coolants can be
found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications
for Service Products, MB Specifications for
Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the
Internet at
372 Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
even in countries where high temperatures
prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating.
iHave the coolant regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Comply with the important safety precautions
for service products when handling coolant
(Y page 367).
The coolant is a mixture of water and
antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs
the following tasks:
Rcorrosion protection
Rantifreeze protection
Rraising the boiling point
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down
to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the
coolant during operation is approximately
266 ‡ (130 †).
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor
concentration in the engine cooling system
should:
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat
will not be dissipated as effectively.
If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal
amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion
inhibitor.
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in
accordance with MB Specifications for
Service Products 310.1.
iWhen the vehicle is first delivered, it is
filled with a coolant mixture that ensures
adequate antifreeze and corrosion
protection.
iThe coolant is checked with every
maintenance interval at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Filling capacities
Model Capacity
GLK 350
GLK 350 4MATIC
Approx. 8.9 US qt
(8.4 l)
GLK 250 BlueTEC Approx. 10.4 US qt
(9.8 l)
iUse MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosion
inhibitor/antifreeze.
Windshield washer system
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. If it comes into contact with hot
engine components or the exhaust system it
could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or
MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid
could damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to
the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the
level sensor may be damaged.
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
washer fluid should be mixed together. The
spray nozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
When handling washer fluid, observe the
important safety notes on service products
(Y page 367).
Service products and filling capacities 373
Technical data
Z
At temperatures above freezing:
XFill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.
MB SummerFit.
XAdd 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts
water.
At temperatures below freezing:
XFill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB
WinterFit.
Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside
temperature.
RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB
WinterFit to 2 parts water.
RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB
WinterFit to 1 part water.
RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB
WinterFit to 1 part water.
iAdd windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer
fluid all year round.
Climate control system refrigerant
Important safety notes
The climate control system of your vehicle is
filled with refrigerant R-134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
type used can be found on the radiator cross
member.
! Only the refrigerant R-134a and the PAG
oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be
used. The approved PAG oil may not be
mixed with any other PAG oil that is not
approved for R-134a refrigerant.
Otherwise, the climate control system may
be damaged.
Service work, such as topping-up refrigerant
or replacing components, may only be carried
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All
applicable regulations must be adhered to,
SAE standard J639 included.
Always have work on the climate control
system carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Refrigerant instruction label
Example: refrigerant instruction label
:Warning symbol
;Refrigerant filling capacity
=Applicable SAE standards
?PAG oil part number
AType of refrigerant
Warning symbols : indicate:
Rpossible dangers
Rthat it is necessary to have maintenance
work carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop
Filling capacities
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
All models Capacity
Refrigerant 20.8 ± 0.4 oz
(590 ± 10 g)
PAG oil 4.2 oz
(120 g)
374 Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
Vehicle data
General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle
data:
Rthe heights specified may vary as a result
of:
-tires
-load
-condition of the suspension
-optional equipment
Roptional equipment reduces the maximum
payload.
Dimensions and weights
Model :
Opening
height
;
Max.
headroom
GLK 250
BlueTEC
82.2 in
(2087 mm)
77.0 in
(1955 mm)
All other
models
82.1 in
(2086 mm)
76.9 in
(1954 mm)
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
All models
Vehicle length 178.6 in (4536 mm)
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
79.4 in (2016 mm)
Wheelbase 108.5 in (2755 mm)
Turning radius 38.2 ft (11.65 m)
Maximum roof load 165 lb (75 kg)
GLK 250 BlueTEC
Vehicle height 66.7 in (1694 mm)
Ground clearance 8.0 in (204 mm)
GLK 350
GLK 350 4MATIC
Vehicle height 66.7 in (1693 mm)
Ground clearance 8.2 in (208 mm)
Vehicle data for off-road driving
Fording depth
Fording depth : must not exceed 12 in
(30 cm).
For more information about off-road fording,
see (Y page 170).
Vehicle data for off-road driving 375
Technical data
Z
Approach/departure angle
Front approach/departure angle : is a
maximum of 22.5° and rear approach/
departure angle ; is a maximum of 24.3°.
For further information about approach/
departure angles, see (Y page 173).
Maximum gradient-climbing
capability
Note that the vehicle's gradient-climbing
capability depends on the off-road conditions
and the road surface conditions.
The maximum gradient climbing capability is
70%.
iIf the load on the front axle is reduced
when pulling away on a steep uphill slope,
the front wheels have a tendency to spin.
4ETS recognizes this and brakes the
wheels accordingly. The rear wheel torque
is increased, making it easier to drive off.
For further information about the maximum
gradient climbing ability, see (Y page 173).
Trailer tow hitch
Mounting dimensions
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
changes to the engine cooling system and
drive train may be necessary, depending on
the vehicle type.
Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch
(example)
:Anchorage points
;Rear axle center line
Trailer loads
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
All models
Permissible trailer load,
unbraked
Permissible trailer load,
braked21
3500 lbs
(1588 kg)
Maximum drawbar
noseweight22
280 lbs
(127 kg)
Permissible rear axle
load when towing a trailer
3108 lbs
(1410 kg)
The actual noseweight may not be higher than
the value which is given. The value can be
found on the trailer tow hitch or trailer
21 At a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill.
22 The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load.
376 Trailer tow hitch
Technical data
identification plates. The lowest weight
applies.
The maximum permissible trailer drawbar
noseweight is the maximum weight with
which the trailer drawbar can be loaded. Limit
for Mercedes-Benz-approved trailer
couplings.
Trailer tow hitch 377
Technical data
Z
378
379
380
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz
vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
on the following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
only)
Editorial office
©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated
or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
without written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstraße 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
As at 31.10.2012
Order no. 6515080213 Part no. 2045844383 Edition A 2014
É2045844383ÌËÍ
2045844383
Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only

Navigation menu